Sunsetter’s Premium Awnings are a reliable choice as a retractable premium awning. The designs are varied and appealing, and the awning is durable enough to offer protection against all kinds of weather.
A retractable overhang can transform a patio from being hot and uncomfortable to lounge in to be the perfect summer hangout spot.
It can create shade and comfort or allow the sun in with a simple press of a button. Several criteria dictate which retractable awning proves to be the best for your home. But, does the Sunsetter awning fit the bill for your home?
So, to see if it makes the cut, we’ve reviewed the Sunsetter awning.
Sunsetter Retractable Awning Review
Fabric: Solution-Dyed Acrylic
Sunsetter brings several solution-dyed acrylic fabric choices on the standard series, woven acrylic series, laminated series, and Sunbrella series. Solution-dried acrylic fabric retains its color and shape for longer than most other fabrics, making it the most preferred for awnings.
The Sunsetter awnings resist harmful UV rays by up to 98%, keep away mold and mildew along with being waterproof. This is due to the three-layered fabric, which consists of a protective coating on the top and bottom and a center layer of woven fabric.
As a result, the Sunsetter Awning will protect you from the weather, come heavy rain or high sun.
Build Quality: Highly Wind-Resistant And Well-Made
Sunsetter’s frames are made from reinforced metal that allows for mounting on most surfaces of your home. The sturdiness offered by its frame will give you the freedom to choose where you wish to install it, be it rooftops or walls.
All good awnings have a high resistance to winds, and Sunsetter is no different. Throughout the days we tested the awnings, we found that they showed no visible damage, even if they were extended during strong winds. It is advised to keep the contraption retracted during gusty winds, however, as they may damage the fabric.
The build quality of the awning is quite high, designed to be free of faults for years. You’ll find that even after repeated use, the retraction mechanism and the arms will see no problems during operation.
If you encounter any issues, the Sunsetter awnings are covered by a 10-year warranty to ensure your comfort for a long time.
Model Variety: Many To Choose From
Across Sunsetter’s range of awnings, there is a model for everyone’s needs. The standard awning extends out 8 feet from your house, or the XL variant 3 can extend up to 13 feet. Each model has a hand crank version, as well as a motorized variant. But wait, there’s more!
The Sunsetter PRO series is a top-of-the-line motorized awning that has a built-in solar screen to block up to 90% of the sun. You have the option of choosing the freestanding Oasis awning from the standard series as well.
Each of these models has a Platinum series variant, featuring state-of-the-art Performance Acrylic fabrics and Sunbrella performance fabric for more excellent protection. The Platinum variants have an optional semi-cassette that shields the awning from the elements when not in use.
Design Variety: Appealing Across The Range
The fabric color selection is vast, allowing you to match it with the color of your house. Additionally, Sunsetter offers you free swatches to see what strikes your fancy, along with two valence types. Across the four different types of patio awnings, you will surely find the one that suits your home the best.
From solid colors to patterns, we found the design variety to pass with flying colors.
Width: Wide Enough To Cover Any Patio
The manual and motorized awnings have different coverage areas, with the former ranging from eight to 18 feet in width. When it comes to the motorized versions, there are two variants to choose from: the standard and the XL models. The former ranges from eight to 18 feet in width, while the latter ranges from 14 to 20 feet.
Sunsetter awnings have ample coverage in both the manual and motorized versions, and if you have a particularly large patio or backyard, the XL model will serve you quite well.
Installation: Simple And Quick
You have the option of contacting a local dealer and having your awning installed, or you can do it yourself. The installation process is fairly straightforward, and the platinum series products can collapse into the housing once properly installed.
To install your Sunsetter awning, you only need a few simple tools to mount the brackets and fit the awning in. After this, simply plug the power cord in, and you’re ready to use it. If you have trouble with the process, Sunsetter provides you with detailed instructions through a helpline, an included DVD or on their website.
The Sunsetter products can be installed on a multitude of surfaces, such as wood, brick, aluminum, etc.
Retraction Mechanism: Smooth And Responsive
The Sunsetter awnings have motorized and manual retraction mechanisms. For this review, we tested both variants, in which the lateral arms open and close under the canopy.
Its motorized awnings are powered by a Somfy electric motor that promises to respond at the touch of its remote control. We found the operation of the motor to be relatively smooth during a testing period of several days, during which it showed no visible faults. The push-button remote control was surprisingly responsive, making the operation a delightful experience.
As for the manual version, it works with a hand crank which can be rotated to retract or extend the canopy. We did need to put in a little effort while extending it with the crank, but overall the operation remained as smooth as the motorized variant.
Sunsetter has designed the awnings to be highly adjustable, allowing you to adjust the front height as per your preference. You can move them to keep the harsh sun, heavy rain, or strong winds away and use the two arms independently for higher effectiveness.
Available Optional Accessories: Varied Enough To Cover All Bases
You would not expect awnings to have as many accessories, but Sunsetter has them. At night, you can add the Sunsetter dimming LED lights to keep using the awning through the evening. It can turn your patio into a superb outdoor living room all the while keeping the harsh weather at bay.
Furthermore, you can optionally add a protective aluminum hood to protect your awning fabric. The hood is designed to match the color of your fabric, completing its look and enhancing its aesthetic appeal as well.
As for other notable accessories, you can purchase patio lights, awning covers, cleaning kits, and mats to enhance your experience with the awning further. The sheer variety offered by Sunsetter when it comes to accessories is quite impressive.
Maintenance: Only Needs Periodic Cleaning
The Sunsetter fabric is easy to clean using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water. Simply brush the dirt and grime off your awning and wash it afterward. Sunsetter has included a detailed cleaning guide as well, should you run into any trouble while cleaning it.
Price: Medium To High End
Sunsetter deck awnings are some of the most affordable awnings in the segment. The manual variant remains the lightest on your pocket, coming in a medium price range, while the motorized awning is more expensive.
Bottom line, Sunsetter awnings are some of the best on the market that most other brands would struggle to compete with.
Post-Purchase Support And Delivery: Limited Warranty And 24/7 Customer Support
Sunsetter awnings are shipped without any additional charges and have a 24/7 hotline available for customer service. The brand offers a 90-day money-back guarantee in addition to the 10-year limited warranty, which is a testament to the company’s faith in its product.
However, this is offset somewhat by Sunsetter’s lack of company installation services, which may cost extra if you have to hire a third-party service for it.
Competition: Sunsetter Vs RetractableAwnings.com
One of the most prominent names in the awnings category, other than Sunsetter, is Retractableawnings.com. The awnings from this company are also tried and tested to resist strong winds and have had their retraction mechanisms put through rigorous 80,000 open/close cycles. They are available in various widths up to 52 feet, along with a projection of up to 16 feet.
Retractableawnings.com products perform in a similar vein to their Sunsetter counterparts, with minor differences in responsiveness of the retraction mechanism. The fabric options are quite varied in both, and you will not be left wanting for more in either option. As such, this is a good alternative to Sunsetter awnings only if the latter isn’t available to you for any reason.
What We Like:
Wide selection of colors
Easy DIY installation
Five to 10-year warranties
Superb selection of widths
What We Do Not Like:
Sunsetter does not provide installation
Specs
Product Name: Sunsetter Retractable Awnings
Product Brand: Sunsetter
Awning Style: Lateral Arm
Method Of Operation: Manual hand crank / Remote control with manual override
Fabric: Solution-dyed woven acrylic
Material: High-quality aluminum
Available Awning Width: 8 ft. to 18 ft. for the manual variant
Warranty: 10-year limited warranty
Installation: DIY or by third-party service, installation DVD included
Sunsetter Retractable Awning Final Verdict
Sunsetter awnings are some of the best products in the retractable awnings category, boasting a great variety of fabrics and offering excellent protection with excellent build quality.
The retraction mechanism is highly responsive in both the motorized and the hand crank variants. And its durability ensures that the product will stand the test of time. No matter the variant you choose, you will be satisfied with what you get from the awning.
There is one minor caveat with Sunsetter’s products, which is the lack of manufacturer-included installation service. Even so, they are simple enough to install on your own or have a third-party service perform it for you. All in all, the product has impressed us on many levels.
Summer knocks on our windows, tries to lure us out of our offices, homes and shops outside where we would be able to enjoy the majestically nature in all its splendor. We have presented several methods on how you can enhance your connection with the exterior spaces and enjoy it and here today we have yet another idea : stylish and fashionable outdoor beds for the ultimate backyard lounge!
We are all in love with our beds, we know how comfortable and relaxing they are in the end of the day, it`s impossible not to appreciate a cozy and warm atmosphere, and brought to the exterior in a warm summer evening beds are becoming an extraordinary treat for any individual. This solution is extremely fashionable functional and comfortable, outdoor beds can be found in hundreds of shops, in different sizes and shapes that can be adapted for the tiniest spaces or positioned in the bigger backyard lounge.
Serene Deck Space Overlooking the Atlantic Ocean with a Impeccable Minimal Outdoor Bed by the Infinity Swimming Pool
by LKID Interior Designers & Decorators / Photography by Steve Passmore
Whether you would like to enhance and enjoy your spacious apartment balcony or to create the perfect cherry on your exclusive backyard lounge, the outdoor bed is opulent and indulgent at the same time, bending to you desires and offering the supreme relaxing spot. There are several outdoor beds out there, several are similar to regular beds but adapted to the exterior design whilst most are modifying the experience entirely to adapt it and make it as soft and smooth as possible in bigger dimensions meant to acommodate more people. The outdoor bed is meant to be shared with the loved ones and enjoyed to its full potential.
Spectacular Infinity Pool with Shattering Ocean Views and Outdoor Bed on the Deck
by Dan Forer, Photographer / Architecture by Mike de Hass
Beautiful Exclusive Hampton Outdoor Canopy Day Bed Envisioned by Forever Patio
by PatioProductions Furniture & Accessories
Breathtaking Minimalist Patio with Outdoor Bed Enjoying a Serene Landscape
Dinning Area Meant to Complement the Outdoor Bed on the Patio by the Swimming Pool
Luxurious Contemporary Pool Space With a Unique Outdoor Bed
by Kyle Lindsey Custom Homes
Simple Outdoor Canopy Bed That Can Be Relocated With Easy on the Patio or Swimming Pool
by Touzet Studio / Claudia Uribe Photography
Beautiful Pergola Design Sheltering a Suspended Outdoor Bed by the Swimming Pool
by BellaWood Builders
Serene Surrounding Around a Trending Hanging Outdoor Bed
by James Cloud, Miami
The Outdoor Beds- A Poolside Summer Delight
It is impossible not to notice the presence of outdoors bed in exotic luxurious tropical hotels and resorts, encouraging you to spend as much possible in the exterior as you can and enjoy the magnificent resort. This encouragement has the same effect at home as well, it`s meant to lure you out and enjoy your view, your backyard garden or swimming pool in the summer warmth. This outdoor will enhance your pool deck and backyard design in both aesthetics value as well as in functional ones.
Orange Outdoor Bed by The Swimming Pool Surrounded by a Lush Serene Landscaping
The Perfect Way to Take Advantage of a Lazy Summer Evening
by Island Stone
Beautiful Gazebo With an Outdoor Bed Next to the Infinity Swimming Pool
by Tropical Architecture Group
Even though it does not help in terms of comfort, is important to choose a color scheme and stick with it through out the entire design. It would be ideally to complement the landscape and home`s apparel if possible. To further accentuate this look or help the color pallet communicate with the ensemble color scheme you can use some chaise lounge chairs as transition items.
White Large Outdoor Beds Offering Ample Space to Rest Relax and Rejuvenate
Serene Circular Outdoor Bed in a Jaw-Dropping Landscape
by Escale Design
Outdoor Bed with Trendy Recliners for a Family Hangout by the Swimming Pool
by Urrutia Design
Beautiful Daybed with Canopy and Drapes Enhancing Privacya
by Bernard Andre Photography
Outdoor Bed by the Pool and Fireplace
Twin Outdoor Beds in Poolside Lounging Area
by Liquidscapes
Creativity Unraveled
Forms follows function in most cases but not in all truly. When you`re imagining a luxurious exotic location and one or two outdoor beds on the pool deck you`re instantly imagining a large canopy bed. While these are extraordinary, there are better alternatives for smaller spaces. Size is after all a very important aspect that must be considered at all times and you should not erase this comfortable idea of your mind just because you have a smaller balcony. Contemporary daybeds can be found with interesting shapes and sizes offering retractable shades to protect you.
You can even pick some trendy hanging outdoor bed to be sheltered under a shaded patio or beautiful pergola. A rather interesting huge chair or small outdoor bed for that matter we have featured previously on our website . Make no compromises! Enjoy your landscape, be outdoorsy!
Urban Patio a Stylish Contemporary Canopy Outdoor Bed
by Angel Mangarakov
Highly Geometric Clam Like Futuristic Outdoor Bed
by Contour Interior Design, LLC
Stylish White Outdoor Bed Protected by a Umbrella in Tropical Style
by A Pleno Sol
You should not stop with the outdoor bed if you`re planning extraordinary summer outdoors. Depending on how much space you have available you can consider an outdoor dinning space and an extraordinarycozy fireplace to keep you warm in the evening. Additional patio seating can be very useful and it can help you enhance the aesthetics values as well with a remarkable apparel.
If your space is limited do not worry, a few flower pots exuding aromas and some candles will give your retreat an extraordinary cozy and romantic atmosphere.
A sturdy Outdoor Bed Made Out Of Teakwood
Rooftop Deck/Sky Garden with Tweak wood Outdoor Bed Exuding Charm and Dinning Area
Impeccable Twin-Sized Outdoor Bed on the Deck
by flott home design
Simple Canopy Bed in the Backyard
by Adriana Aristizabal
Suspended Outdoor Daybed Enhancing a Tropical Patio
by MCM Design
Wrapped in Mistery
Whether you place it in a backyard, pool deck or lush vegetation garden, an outdoor canopy bed will exude a serene and relaxing vibe. You have to imagine that a little secluded little heaven will be emphasized by a natural canopy bed that would allow the individual to enjoy it perfectly. If crafted properly, a quality canopy bed can withstand a lifetime with proper care whilst offering privacy, relaxation and rejuvenation at the same time. In addition, a simple sculptural garden stool, a bench at the foot of the bed or a fashionable cool outdoor coffee table can help you paint an outstanding image.
Inserting an Bamboo Outdoor Bed in the Perfect Landscape
Perfect Cubic Outdoor Bed Complementing the Pool Deck
Luxurious Home Complemented by a Canopy Day Bed
by Turtle Beach Construction & Remodeling
A canopy bed can become a sculptural piece when animated by wind, the rigid structure contrasted by the organic textile flood by natural elements. Curved and organic patterns are highlighting the structure enhancing its apparel. In a natural background like a beach or garden with lush vegetation the canopy bed will instantly animate the scenery by becoming a focal point and enhancing the entire snapshot.
Simple Outdoor Bed by The Pool Deck
Sky Terrace With Canopy Daybed
by Susan Lachance Interior Design
Extraordinary Terrace Overlooking Bucharest With an Outdoor Bed and a Hammock
Outdoor beds are coming in a variety of shapes and sizes and despite popular belief they make a bigger impact in smaller balconies and patio. In a small backyard it instantly changes the decor and the whole picture anchoring in the space and defining it.It would be a great idea to decor everything in the same manner so choosing a dominant style from the very beginning is really important, Mediterranean or Asian design lines are popular in exotic luxurious designs.
Accessories, lighting fixtures and appliances, accent fabrics and pillows well help you highlighting the chosen design line.
Mediterranean Style Porch With a Cozy and Warm Outdoor Bed
by Elad Gonen
Small Outdoor Bed with Canopy Enhancing A Compact Modern Deck
by Busybee Design
Sculptural Outdoor Bed Under a Beautiful Pergola Design Creating a Romantic Setting
by ELEVATE interiors + design
Very similar to the bed in your bedroom the design can be however you want and there are not constraints in design. If you want to obtain the proper result you should start by analyzing your setup whether its a pool deck, terrace or backyard, the composition in which the outdoor bed is placed must be right. Identifying the proper color schemer dimension and design line may be tricky in a complex scenery and we strongly advise you to consider reaching out to a professional if you need too.
We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section bellow, on Facebook , Twitter or G+ regarding outdoor beds!
Minimalist Colorful Breezy Outdoor Daybed
Open Air Living in Bali Sheltering an Outdoor Bed
by Jeni Lee
Suspended Outdoor Bed Taking Advantage of Scenic Views and Tranquility
A Marvelous View To Be Enjoyed From The Outdoor Bed
Hey there world! Are you in the mood for some DIY projects that will keep your hands busy? Not only that you will kill time, but you will also make some interesting decorations for your home. Scroll down through the photos below and see the Stunning Coffee Bean Crafts For All The Coffee Lovers.
If you love the smell of coffee in the morning, you will definitely love these crafts as well. Seeing coffee all around your home will make you happy, an extraordinary scent will create a one of a kind atmosphere. Pick your favorite project from the gallery below, the one that you like the most, get some coffee beans and create some unique pieces of art!
Christmas is just around the corner, so you should start thinking about decorating your Christmas tree soon. These see-through Christmas balls filled with beans will get all eyes on the tree!
More and more people decide to make their own lamps as they are unique, creative designs that can't be bought in a store, exquisite objects. What do you say about making yours by using coffee?
Is there someone who would't want to have this awesome coffee clock in their home? It`s always coffee o'clock when you look at it! How cool is this design?
Get your DIY skills on a higher level, and make this craft by using a spoon and glue, it may look complicated at first but as soon as you start the project and find the balance between the elements the only thing that remains for you to do is to hide the spoon by in coffee beans !
Empty walls are boring and dull, so add a statement to yours and show the world how much you love coffee, use coffee beans to make your next wall decoration.
When you get bored of your old photo frames just update their look by covering them up with coffee beans. It's not difficult to make the craft and it will only took you around 15 minutes.
When you are hosting a dinner, mark the seats on the table of your guest by making these eye-catching decorations. Put coffee beans in a coffee mug, add a succulent and a piece of paper stating the name of the person who is supposed to sit on that seat.
What do you say about adding coffee beans in your glass flower holder? it will get an interesting look that will attract the attention of everyone who comes in the room.
Coffee bean crafts may not look like something promising in the world of do it yourself project but their immense advantage is the scent and the richness of the coffee bean. This translates into volume, and texture all embellished in an extraordinary aroma that one simply cannot overlook. What do you think? Will you take on a coffee bean DIY project?
Learn how to stretch watercolor paper like a pro! My article will guide you through the process with tips and tricks for optimal results. So, let's dive in and get ready to stretch!
If you're a watercolor artist, you know that painting on stretched paper is the way to go. But why? The answer is simple: stretched paper allows you to control the paint better, leading to fewer accidents and more satisfying results.
Plus, it prevents the paper from warping or buckling as you apply the paint. In this article, I'll show you how to stretch watercolor paper and some tips and tricks to get it just right.
Essential Materials for Stretching Watercolor Paper
To get started, you'll need a few materials to prepare the watercolor paper. Let's take a look at what you'll need:
First up, you'll need some masking watercolor tape to secure your paper to the watercolor stretching board. A watercolor stretching board is also a must-have - this will keep your paper taut and prevent it from warping as you work. Butcher tape paper towel, and gummed paper tape are also great to have on hand to keep your workspace clean and tidy.
Of course, you can't stretch watercolor paper without, well, watercolor paper! Look for a large watercolor paper that is thick enough to handle the process but not so thick that it becomes difficult to work with. A watercolor block is great for smaller paintings, while larger watercolor sheets are perfect for bigger projects.
Next, you'll need some watercolor paint, a flat surface to work on, and a wet sponge. Thicker paper will also come in handy, as will a spray bottle for misting your paper as you work. You may also want to invest in a palette knife for mixing your paint and some blotting paper to soak up any excess water.
It's important to make sure your paper stays flat as it dries, so a sturdy board is a must. Marine-grade plywood is a popular choice, but any flat surface will do. And don't forget about watercolor cleaning supplies! You'll want clean paper and a clean watercolor stretching board to work with, as well as a damp sponge to clean up any messes.
Finally, you'll need a few hours and a lot of patience. Many artists opt to soak their paper before stretching it to help the fibers expand evenly. Once you've stretched your paper and allowed it to dry flat, you're ready to start your watercolor painting journey!
Unlocking the Magic: Benefits of Stretching Paper
Now that we have discussed the materials needed for stretching watercolor paper let's talk about the benefits of this technique. Trust us, stretching your large watercolor paper is worth the extra effort!
Firstly, stretching your watercolor paper keeps it taut and prevents it from warping or buckling when wet. This ensures that your painting will have a smooth and even surface, which is crucial for achieving those fine details and creating a professional-looking piece.
Secondly, stretching your paper helps to keep the paper fibers intact, preventing them from getting damaged during the painting process. This means that your paper will be more durable and able to withstand multiple layers of watercolor paints.
Thirdly, stretched watercolor paper is able to absorb water and paint more evenly, allowing you to achieve a wider range of textures and gradients. This gives you more control over your painting and allows you to experiment with different techniques.
Finally, the stretched watercolor paper makes the painting process more enjoyable and less frustrating. By keeping your paper flat and even, you can focus on your art without worrying about your paper warping or buckling.
So, there you have it! Stretching your watercolor paper may take a little extra time and effort, but the benefits are well worth it. Not only will it improve the quality and durability of your paintings, but it will also make the painting process more enjoyable.
How to Stretch & Prepare Watercolor Paper
Stretching watercolor paper is a fun and rewarding experience that every watercolorist should try. With a little bit of practice and patience, you can easily master this essential skill and create beautiful watercolor paintings that will leave everyone in awe.
So, are you ready to create beautiful watercolor paintings on stretched paper? Well, there are two common methods you can use: wet stretching and dry stretching. Let's dive into the step-by-step process for each method:
Wet Stretching Method
If you're looking to achieve a perfectly flat and smooth surface for your watercolor paintings, the wet stretching method is a great option. Here are the steps to wet stretching:
First, cut your watercolor paper to the desired size.
Next, soak the paper in cold water for about 5-10 minutes to help the fibers expand.
While the paper is soaking, make sure you have a clean, flat surface to work on.
After soaking, remove the paper from the water and place it on a flat surface, making sure the smooth side is facing up.
Secure the edges of the paper to the surface using masking tape.
Finally, allow the paper to dry completely before you start painting.
One of the benefits of wet stretching is that it allows the paper fibers to expand and relax, which creates a flatter surface for painting. Additionally, by soaking the paper before stretching, you can avoid any buckling or warping that may occur when painting on dry paper.
However, wet stretching can be a bit time-consuming and requires some patience, as you need to wait for the paper to dry completely before you can start painting. Additionally, it's important to use the right kind of tape to secure the paper to the surface, as some tapes may damage the paper or leave residue behind.
Overall, the wet stretching method is a great option for artists who want to achieve a smooth, flat surface for their watercolor paintings.
Dry Stretching Method
If you're looking for an alternative to wet stretching, the dry stretching method can be a great option for stretching your watercolor paper.
Again, start by cutting your watercolor paper to the desired size.
Using a spray bottle or watercolor brush, wet the back of the paper with water.
While the paper is still damp, place it on a clean, flat surface, making sure the smooth side is facing up.
Secure the edges of the paper to the surface using masking tape, ensuring that the paper is taut and wrinkle-free.
Finally, allow the paper to dry completely before you start painting.
Dry stretching is a great option if you don't want to deal with a tub of water and the potential mess that can come with wet stretching. Plus, with dry stretching, you can start painting sooner, as it doesn't need as much time to dry as with wet stretching.
One thing to keep in mind with the dry stretching method is that the paper may not be as taut as with wet stretching, which can result in some buckling or warping. However, this can be easily remedied by flattening the paper after it dries using a heavy book or similar object.
Overall, both wet and dry stretching methods have their pros and cons, and it's up to you to decide which method works best for your needs and preferences. For wet stretching, soaking will help prevent tearing during the process. For dry stretching, wetting the back of the paper is key. Make sure your paper is completely dry before you start painting for the best results.
Don't be afraid to experiment and find the method that works best for you. With practice, you'll soon be creating beautiful, professional-looking watercolor paintings on perfectly stretched paper. Now, let's get creative!
Common Mistakes to Avoid
It's easy to make mistakes during the process of stretching paper that can result in a less-than-ideal painting surface. Here are some common mistakes to avoid while stretching watercolor paper:
1. Not Properly Soaking the Paper
Whether you're wet stretching paper or dry stretching, it's important to make sure you have thoroughly dampened or soaked the paper before securing it. This will help prevent tearing and ensure a smooth surface.
2. Using the Wrong Type of Tape
Not all tapes are created equal when it comes to securing watercolor paper. Avoid using strong adhesive tapes or tapes that are difficult to remove, as these can damage the paper or leave a residue.
3. Overstretching the Paper
It can be tempting to really stretch the paper tight to avoid any wrinkles, but overstretching can actually cause the paper to become too thin and fragile. This can result in paint bleeding through the paper or even tearing.
4. Rushing the Drying Process
It's important to let the paper dry completely before starting to paint. Using a hairdryer or other methods to speed up the process can cause the paper to warp or buckle.
5. Over-wetting the Paper
While it's important to wet the paper before stretching it, overwetting can cause the paper to become too delicate and prone to tearing. Make sure to only wet the paper enough to allow for easy stretching, and avoid soaking it for too long.
6. Under-taping the Paper
When securing the edges of the paper to the surface, it's important to use enough masking tape to keep the paper taut and wrinkle-free. If the tape isn't secure enough, the paper may shift or warp while it is drying, resulting in an uneven surface for painting.
By avoiding these common mistakes, you can ensure that your watercolor paper is properly stretched and ready for painting. Remember, taking the time to properly prepare watercolor paper stretchers will ultimately lead to a more successful and satisfying painting experience.
Creating Artwork with Watercolor Pencils on Stretched Paper
Creating artwork with watercolor pencils on stretched paper is a great way to experiment with the medium and produce beautiful, vibrant pieces. By following a few simple steps, you can create stunning artwork that showcases the unique qualities of both watercolor pencils and stretched paper.
First, start by stretching your watercolor paper using the method of your choice. Once it is stretched and dry, use a regular pencil to sketch out your design. Then, use your watercolor pencils to add color to your sketch.
When working with watercolor pencils on stretched paper, it's important to keep in mind that the colors will appear more vibrant and saturated than on regular paper. You can layer the colors to create depth and texture and blend them with water to create a more watercolor-like effect.
To blend the colors with water, use a clean, damp brush and work in small sections. Be careful not to use too much water, as this can cause the paper to become overly saturated and potentially warp or buckle. Instead, work slowly and allow each section to dry before moving on to the next.
Once you have finished adding color, allow the paper to dry completely. You can then add additional details using watercolor paints or other art materials if desired. When your artwork is complete, you can display it proudly, knowing that you have created a stunning piece using the unique qualities of watercolor pencils and stretched paper.
Overall, creating artwork with watercolor pencils on stretched paper is a fun and rewarding process. With a little practice, you can create beautiful pieces that showcase the unique qualities of both mediums.
Pro Tips For Mastering Watercolor Paper Stretching
Pro Tips
Tip #1
Tip #2
Tip #3
Tip #4
Tips for Preparation
Choose the right adhesive for your paper, considering its weight and thickness.
Measure and cut your paper to the desired length before soaking it in water.
Avoid using too much water to prevent over-soaking.
---
Tips for Soaking and Applying Adhesive
Use a tray to soak the paper and allow it to rest for at least 5-10 minutes.
Remove the paper from the water and place it on a clean surface.
Use a ruler to ensure the paper is straight and even.
Apply the adhesive to the edges of the paper using a paintbrush or your finger.
Tips for Stretching and Securing the Paper
Fold the edges of the paper onto a piece of medium-density fiberboard (MDF) or canvas and staple them down.
Use a utility knife to trim off any excess paper.
Hammer the staples down to ensure they are secure.
---
Tips for Drying and Finishing
Allow the paper to dry completely, using a fan or hair dryer if necessary.
Once dry, remove the staples and trim off any excess MDF or canvas.
Applying a primer or sizing to the paper before stretching can also help improve its absorbency and prevent pigment from sinking into the paper fibers.
---
Additional Tips
To prevent fingerprints on your paper, handle it with clean hands or use drawing pins to hold it in place instead of your fingers.
If you're having trouble getting the paper to stick to the MDF or canvas, try using a candle or wax to create a wax seal on the edges of the paper.
---
---
Stretch watercolor paper with butcher tape, gummed tape, or stretching boards. Soak paper and place it on a flat surface, then use a spray bottle to apply excess water. Keep edges taped to prevent warping. Use a sturdy board and avoid air pockets. Clean and dry the paper before stretching. Use a large brush to apply glue on one side of the paper for a watercolor paper stretcher. Use watercolor sheets and ensure they are the same size.
Use a large brush or clean sponge to remove excess water and air bubbles, ensuring a smooth surface. The paper should be allowed to dry flat on the board. When purchasing art materials, it is important to choose a clean board and clean paper to prevent any damage to the surface.
Many artists prefer to stretch large sheets in the same direction to avoid any unwanted marks or creases. Heat and angle should also be taken into account during the papermaking process to prevent any unwanted watermarks or damage to the paper.
Metal should be avoided when working with watercolor paper, as it can leave scratches on the surface. Overall, stretching watercolor paper is an important step in creating successful paintings and should be done with care and attention to detail.
With these pro tips for mastering watercolor paper stretching, you'll be able to create a perfect surface for your watercolor painting, allowing you to fully express your creativity and achieve stunning results.
Alternatives to Stretching Watercolor Paper
Stretching watercolor paper isn't always feasible or desirable. Luckily, there are other methods for preventing your paper from buckling. Here are a few alternatives:
1. Using Heavyweight Paper
One way to prevent the paper from buckling is to use heavyweight paper. A heavier paper can absorb more water, making it less likely to warp or buckle. This method is a good option if you don't want to go through the stretching process, but it does have its drawbacks. Heavier paper can be more expensive, and it may not work as well for certain techniques.
What I like
Can absorb more water, making it less likely to warp or buckle
Can provide a smoother surface for certain techniques
May not require stretching
What I Don't Like
Can be more expensive than lighter-weight paper
May not work as well for certain techniques
2. Using Watercolor Blocks
Watercolor blocks are pre-stretched pads of watercolor paper that are glued together on all four sides. Because the paper is already stretched, there's no need to go through the stretching process. This method can be convenient and time-saving, but it can also be more expensive than buying loose watercolor sheets of paper.
What I like
Already pre-stretched; no need to go through the stretching process
Convenient and time-saving
Easy to transport and store
What I Don't Like
Can be more expensive than buying loose watercolor sheets of paper
Limited sizes and options available
3. Using Masking Tape
If you're looking for a quick and easy way to prevent your paper from buckling, you can try using masking tape. Simply apply masking tape to the edges of your paper before you start painting. This will help keep the paper flat as it dries. However, this method can be a bit messy and may not work as well for larger pieces of paper.
What I like
Quick and easy to apply
Can work for smaller pieces of paper
Inexpensive
What I Don't Like
Can be a bit messy and leave residue on the paper
May not work as well for larger pieces of paper
Can damage the paper when removing the tape
4. Using a Paper Press
A paper press is a tool that can be used to flatten and dry your watercolor paper. This method involves placing your wet paper between two pieces of absorbent material (such as blotters or towels) and then pressing them together using a press. This can be a good option if you don't have the space or materials for stretching, but it does require an additional investment in the press.
What I like
Can be a good option if you don't have the space or materials for stretching
Can provide a flatter surface than other methods
Can be used for other paper-based art forms
What I Don't Like
Can be expensive to purchase
Can take longer to dry
May require additional materials such as blotters or towels
Watercolor artists who want to try alternative methods to stretching paper have a few options to choose from. One popular method involves using a stretch fabric or textile, like cotton, to create a taut surface for the watercolor paper.
Another option is to use poly(methyl methacrylate) or gelatin sizing to prevent moisture from seeping into the paper. Some artists also use foam or punched tape to create a textured surface that helps keep the paper in place.
Additionally, natural rubber can be used to create a gummed paper tape that can be applied to the edges of the paper to prevent warping. It's important to note that these methods may have pros and cons, such as requiring more time and effort or not providing the same level of tautness as traditional stretching methods.
Each of these methods has its own pros and cons, and it's up to you to decide which one is the best fit for your needs. Whichever method you choose, remember that preventing buckling is crucial for achieving a professional-looking watercolor piece.
Watercolor Paper Stretching FAQs
How do I know if my watercolor paper needs to be stretched?
If your watercolor paper begins to buckle or warp and weft when it becomes wet with watercolor paints, it may need to be stretched.
What materials do I need to stretch watercolor paper?
You will need watercolor paper, masking tape, a clean flat surface, and either cold water (for wet stretching) or a spray bottle/brush and water (for dry stretching).
Can I stretch watercolor paper after I've already started painting it?
It’s possible, but it may be more difficult and could cause the paint to buckle or warp. It’s best to stretch the paper before starting to paint.
What's the best way to stretch watercolor paper?
There are two common methods for stretching watercolor paper: wet stretching and dry stretching. Both methods have their advantages, and it depends on personal preference.
How long should I soak my watercolor paper before stretching it?
For wet stretching, soak the paper in cold water for about 5-10 minutes.
Can I use a hair dryer to speed up the drying process after stretching the paper?
It’s not recommended to use a hairdryer as it may cause the paper to warp or buckle. It’s best to allow the paper to air dry completely.
What happens if I don't stretch the watercolor paper?
If you don’t stretch watercolor paper, it may buckle or warp when it becomes wet with watercolor paint.
Are there any alternative methods for stretching watercolor paper?
Yes, there are alternative methods, such as using heavier-weight paper or a watercolor block.
Can I reuse stretched watercolor paper?
Yes, you can reuse stretched watercolor paper multiple times as long as it’s in good condition.
How often do I need to stretch my watercolor paper?
It depends on personal preference and the specific paper you’re using. Some artists prefer to stretch every watercolor sheet, while others may only stretch large watercolor sheets or those with heavier washes.
What type of watercolor tape is best for securing watercolor paper during the stretching process?
It is recommended to use acid-free paper masking watercolor tape or artist tape to secure watercolor paper during the stretching process.
Can I use a stretching board or a paper stretcher bar instead of taping the paper to a flat place?
Yes, you can use a stretching board or a paper stretcher instead of taping the paper to a flat place. These tools can make the stretching process easier and more precise.
Can I use a different type of water-based medium on stretched watercolor paper, such as gouache or acrylic paint?
Yes, you can use different types of water-based mediums on stretched watercolor paper, such as gouache or acrylic ink. However, keep in mind that these mediums may behave differently on stretched paper than watercolor, so it’s important to experiment and test the paper beforehand.
Is it possible to overstretch watercolor paper, and what are the risks of doing so?
Yes, it is possible to overstretch watercolor paper. Overstretching can cause the paper to become too thin and fragile, making it more prone to tearing or damage. It’s important to stretch the paper just enough to achieve a flat surface without overdoing it.
How can I store my stretched watercolor paper to prevent damage or warping?
To store stretched watercolor paper, it’s best to keep it in a dry and flat location, away from direct sunlight and humidity. You can store it in a portfolio or a cardboard sleeve to protect it from dust or accidental damage.
Alright, folks, I've reached the end of my guide about stretching watercolor paper. So, let's do a quick recap of the benefits of stretching, shall we?
Firstly, stretching your watercolor paper helps to prevent it from buckling or warping when you add water to it. This is especially important if you're using a lot of water in your painting, which is pretty common with watercolor.
Secondly, the stretched paper provides a smooth and even surface to work on, which is crucial for achieving those stunning watercolor effects. Plus, it just looks so much more professional and polished than a wrinkled or uneven surface.
So, there you have it, the importance of stretching and proper paper preparation for watercolor painting. Remember, practice makes everyone perfect, so keep experimenting with different techniques and find what works best for you. Happy painting!
Are you a budding artist? A beginner who wishes to make a mark in the art industry?
Confused about making a start and how? Or are you looking for inspirations nowhere to be found?
Here’s an outline into why you must look into Still Life drawing and Paintings which would provide the kickstart to the project you’ve been longing for!
Art comes in several forms and types. One of the most ancient ways of drawing and painting is that of Still Life, which continues to gather momentum in the contemporary era.
Still Life drawings and paintings, primarily, focus on objects which we tend to overlook but possesses its unique beauty, when provided with deep focus and kept motionless.
These include objects such as flower vase, utensils, and ceramics, or any subjects kept at a dining table, etc. In general, the matter of interest does not move at any point in time.
Primarily, the subject of the art does not represent a symbolic entity, such as an older man or a damsel in distress, for instance. In other words, Still Life Art does not encompass subjects comprising of any live human model.
How to play with Still Life Art?
This form of drawing and painting may appeal to the observer through the charms of luster, such as shine from fruit or glaze from a flower vase.
Any arbitrary object might be transformed into a matter of interest in Still Life art, provided it remains still. Even a simple pen or a pencil might be able to create a subject matter for Still Life.
Still Life Art and its Traits
Typically, a kettle or a bowl containing fruits, possessing traits of simplicity in shapes and structures constitute this medium of drawing and painting.
Still Life also lay the stepping stone of any budding artist, through which one develops their skill sets, eventually, creating a more sophisticated art form.
Keeping in mind that the subject matter will remain stationary at all times, it becomes easier for beginners to put life into their work.
However, many distinct types of media and styles comprise to form Still Life Art. As long as the matter of interest remain inanimate, Still Life art can be classified through the brush strokes. Brush strokes can be accurate and noticeable or abstract, based on the requirement of the art.
Starting as a tool for beginners, this form of drawing and painting has quietly developed into an advanced art genre. Artists have the option of using graphite and charcoal pencils, acrylics, watercolors, or the commonly used oil paints.
Usually, it is the instructor in a classroom who arranges the composition for a beginner. But, you can have a free hand while choosing the arrangement of objects, when working on a personal project with liberty.
Perks of working with Still Life art form is that you can curb the magnitude of reference from a photograph, thereby, fabricating ideas from life directly.
Some of the more familiar themes applied in this type of drawing and paintings are enlisted below:
Symbolic Representations - These include implementation of various colors, composition, and visuals through which painters or artists depict a specific pattern to their work.
Miscellaneous Representations - Normally, these themes include various objects which do not seek much attention in a household but holds deep meanings when subjected as a matter of art.
Decorative Arrangements - Use of flowers, leaves, focus on petals, bouquets and flower vase are common in these types of arrangement
Apart from the themes mentioned above, one common theme is that of table spread or objects in a dining table in general. These find broad applications in Still Life Art.
Earlier, the use of dead animals was used to portray the unpredictability of lifespan, which remains a common subject in these avenues of art, even in the modern era. Spectators often comprehend the concept of the pursuit of earthly possessions and its utilization in the afterlife through the visual medium.
Identifying Still Life as an Art through the Eras and Various Movements
In this section, we try to identify Still Life and its components through multiple eras and movements.
Primitive Art
Still Life Paintings can be traced back to 15th Century BCE during Egyptian Civilization. Deep excavations carried out at the ancient burial sites discovered several funerary artworks of edibles.
One of the most famous Still Life paintings discovered was in the Tomb of Menna, which depicted images of fish, birds, crops, and other objects. Moving to Europe, Greek and Roman civilizations also sheltered many Still Life artworks
Most prominent of them being ‘Still Life with Glass Bowl of Fruit and Vases’ during (63-79 AD). This wall painting which originated in Pompeii depicted a collection of inanimate objects such as an enormous bowl and pitcher housing fruits such as grapes.
Medieval Period
During the medieval period, the Northern Renaissance artists flourished with their trademark flower paintings. The artist popularized still life iconography by displaying colorful flora.
Jan Brueghel the Elder - Flowers in a Wooden Vessel
Jan Brueghel the Elder created ‘Flowers in a Wooden Vessel’ in 1606-1607 which was coming together of various flowers from different part of the world in a single vase.
Cubism
Cubism is an early-20th-century art movement which brought European painting and sculpture historically forward towards modern art. Its various forms inspired other related changes in literature and architecture.
Some of the famous artists during the movement were - Pablo Picasso (Spain), Georges Braque (France), Salvador Dali (Spain).
Photograph of Violin and Checkerboard by Juan Gris, 1913, Oil on Canvas
To cite out the best example for Still Life as art during Cubism, Violin and Checkerboard (1913) by Juan Gris should be the most appropriate of them all. The graphic has been integrated into several directions, creating a mesh haphazardly, but still holding meaning in it.
The vague concepts portrayed in the art voluntary made admirers think towards the alternative spectrum.
Realism
In recorded history, Still Life drawings and paintings gained the pinnacle of prominence during the 16th Century Realism, which originated in Holland. The paintings glorified aristocracy prevalent using objects which glorified the social hierarchy.
Still Life with Ewer, Vessels and Pomegranate by Willem Kalf, 1619 - 1693; mid-1640s, Oil on Canvas
Ewer, Vessels, and Pomegranate(1640) by Willem Kalf is a classic example of the reason why this art form flourished during Realism in 16th-17th Century Europe. In the painting, we tend to observe the majestic lifestyle in the form of lavish crockeries, precious jugs, laced in gold.
Impressionism
During the modern age, movement known as Impressionism took shape in the form of prominent artist such as Pierre-Auguste Renoir. The baton during the Post-Impressionist period was passed on to Vincent Van Gogh who took up flower vases as one of his critical subjects in ‘Sunflowers’ (1889).
Later, Paul Cézanne in 1895, painted the famous series ‘The Basket of Apples’ which contained water jugs, wine urns, and apples, in an irregular table surface.
Dutch Golden Age
Vanitas paintings gained prominence during the Dutch Golden age, which condemned against the pursuit of inflated pride and self-consciousness.
Pieter Claeszoon, Vanitas Still Life, 1625
This genre of paintings reminded the spectators that man is a mere mortal and the pursuit for earthly possessions go in vain in the afterlife. In 1630, Pieter Claesz painted Vanitas Still Life which comprised of a human skull along with an hourglass and a burning candle to point out the inevitability of life and death.
Fauvism
Finding prominence in the 19th Century, Fauvism dealt with the magnification of day to day objects using bright, bold colors, thereby, promoting a radiant and lustrous tone in the style of art.
ALFRED H. MAURER, Aestheticism to Modernism, Fauve Still Life, Oil on Canvas
Alfred H. Maurer, in his work ‘Fauve Still Life’ (1908-10), used a combination of various colors to depict different objects, which attempt to counter each other for attentional superiority.
Both elements in the picture, i.e., the wall and the tablecloth demand an equal level of attention due to its boldness and exaggeration.
Pop-Art
This form of art was pioneered by American illustrator, Andy Warhol, who shot to fame with his artworks in Campbell's Soup Cans (1962), Coca-Cola (3) (1962) and Gold Marilyn Monroe (1962).
Pop-Art, through the work of Andy Warhol, glamorized objects which are usually taken for granted, by using intrepid lines and radiant colors. It is a well-known fact that Warhol, himself, was an ardent fan of soup and had it for lunch every day.
The salient feature of Campbell’s Soup Cans was that every one of the cans was hand-painted with no stress on lighting or shading.
Inspired by the rich heritage of Still Life painting as a full-fledged genre of art, modern artists portray their adaptations by adding a hyperrealistic tone to their work. Contemporary artists tend to come with the most bizarre inanimate objects and turning them into masterpieces.
A decent understanding of Still Life acts as a catalyst in the transformation of even the most mundane objects into an artwork, based on the capabilities of artists. Also, this form of art notably enriches the skill sets of the painter or sketcher.
Still Life practice is nothing but a method of simple compositions and scenes by providing an element of realism into it. Further, it includes the lighting, use of different colors, and shapes to create a radiant work of art.
Additionally, through Still Life paintings, artists have a free hand in the composition of the scene which, in turn, makes room for experimentation and improvisation.
So what are you waiting for? Look around in your vicinity to find the subject matter and start your Still Life Artwork. It can be anything from a stale sandwich or a composition of your study desk!
Did you know that steel frames are a viable option for building your home?
The huge cost of lumber can be quite bothersome to those on a budget. However, very few people are aware of the fact that steel-frame homes exist, and often these can cost 50% less as compared to wood-framed homes.
First introduced in the United States after World War II, these buildings weren't a huge hit then. But, around 1,500 of the 2,500 houses built by the Lustron Company stand to date, proving the durability of the steel frames. More recently, eco-conscious people have started to build homes with steel frames due to the reduced carbon footprint.
Today, we are here to tell you everything there's to know about these frames that remind us of futuristic homes. So, without further ado, let's get started!
History Of Steel Framing Houses
When it comes to home construction, the invariable choice of most people was to side with wood. But, things took a turn when people had the idea of using metal for framing homes in nineteenth-century Europe. Granted, it wasn't fruitful back then as the primary metal used in construction was cast iron, which wasn't very durable.
Things changed once again when Carl Strandlund, a Chicago industrialist, thought of solving the housing crisis in the United States caused by World War II. However, this time the choice of metal was prefabricated porcelain-enameled steel, which ensured durability.
Even though the Lustron Company had promised to build 45,000 homes, only 2,500 came into existence. Today, many of the surviving homes are part of the National Register of Historic Places to commemorate the hardships faced by the country.
Today, building lightweight steel-framed homes can be related to building Ikea furniture. The home frames come in kits that can be easily assembled in much less time than wooden frames. Having said that, the concept of using steel to frame a home is much like traditional wood, including the essential components of design.
Advantages Of Steel Framing
If wood frames are the go-to option, why should you ever bother about giving steel-framed homes a thought? Well, to begin with, they are lightweight materials and often more sustainable than wood. To drive the point home, we have gathered some of the advantages of building a steel-framed building. So, let's check them out!
1. Stronger Than Wood
Steel frames are stronger than the usual lumber used to construct homes. The steel used is also more durable and lasts for a long time. You don't need to worry about warping or expanding when using a steel frame. And steel even helps keep your house from getting damaged or cracked when there are natural disasters like floods or storms.
In general, the lifespan of steel frames is taken to be around 150 years, even when it comes in contact with pollutants or higher humidity levels. Further, steel frames can be recycled and reused, unlike wood.
Another aspect we want to point out is that new wood isn’t as durable as old wood. And older forests should not be cut just for the sake of getting lumber. Hence, the younger wood used for framing isn't as durable as the wood obtained from old trees.
Many have even shifted to using a hybrid method where wood is used to frame the insides of a house while steel is used in the outer shell for stability.
2. Fire And Moisture Resistance
Two common problems faced by wood are its vulnerability to fire and water. Firefighters often have a hard time stopping fires in wood-framed buildings. In comparison, steel is non-combustible, so there's no need to worry about a spreading fire. However, if steel is exposed to temperatures higher than 550°F, it can lose strength.
Like fire, steel frames are also water-resistant, so there's no need to worry about growing mold, rain damage, or shrinkage. Most steel-framed homes are also free from pests like termites which adds to their durability.
You can even stop rusting by using enameled, coated, or galvanized steel to increase the lifespan of your house. Due to these reasons, a steel-framed house requires much less maintenance, making it a cost-effective option for those on a budget.
3. Time-Saving
Compared to wooden frames, building with steel frames is relatively easy and requires little to no heavy equipment. The parts of the frame can be put together easily following the manual provided by the company. That's because most of the steel frames come somewhat assembled right from the factory. Hence, you wouldn't need to worry about lugging timber or getting hold of specialized nail guns.
The prefabricated frames are further beneficial as there’s no chance of warping or moving once they are erected. Moreover, if you pick the right brand, the metal frames will come with pre-punched holes for installing plumbing and electrical components.
4. Customizable
To be honest, it's hard to imagine that a house frame made out of steel beams can be customizable. But the reality is quite different, as the steel frames are made in a way that allows more accurate and customized constructions. You also get to choose your dream home from a catalog of countless design possibilities.
Besides, steel buildings don't necessarily have to be built with just steel components. Many modern home builders use other materials to bring unique finishes to their projects. The best part about working with steel frames is that they do quite well with traditional approaches like utilizing drywall or stucco to get an aesthetic design.
Your steel frame home doesn't need to be restricted to the living quarters, as most companies also carry kits to add a garage, agricultural buildings, and even barns. Plus, most steel frame home companies welcome queries and requests to help you build a house that meets your expectations or area requirement.
5. Better For The Environment
One major reason people should choose light gauge steel framing is that it has a lesser impact on the environment. As you can tell, to make steel, there's no need to cut trees, unlike the wood frame counterparts.
On top of that, no hazardous chemicals are used to produce steel, which is always good news for the environment. Plus, all steel components are 100% recyclable, and 650 million tons of steel get recycled every year. The steel industry is even regarded as the largest recycler in North America.
Utilizing steel frames in your home can help to leave a smaller ecological footprint due to its never-ending life cycle. In addition, you have the choice to make your steel home energy efficient by adding solar panels and environment-friendly insulation.
Disadvantages Of Steel Framing
However, even with so many advantages, there are some cons to using steel frames for constructing homes. Most builders opine that there's always a way to work around things to reduce the implications posed by the disadvantages of steel homes. However, we think it's justified to let you know about them.
Now, let's check out the disadvantages of using steel framing:
1. Achieving Insulation
Even though steel frame houses are regarded as the more environment-friendly option, they can greatly suffer from poor insulation and energy efficiency. That's because steel is a better conductor of heat than wood, which can lead to the phenomenon of thermal bridging. It can affect insulation efficiency by up to 60%, resulting in higher heating and cooling costs.
That being said, there are ways to minimize the issue to achieve better insulation. A popular choice is to wrap the beams with insulation boards to stop them from conducting the heat quickly. Another technique used in residential construction is to use a hybrid steel and wood frame to have better insulation as well as protection from exterior exposures.
New homeowners can contact a local contractor to discuss the raw materials and insulation options suitable for the area.
2. Limited Roof Designs
One of the things to be wary of while getting your steel homes built is the limited choices in roof designs. The metal-framed roofs often lack dormers or high pitches and are rather plain-looking. Sometimes adding wood frames to the roof during the construction process can help get a more customized design. However, seeking more roof elevations can end up costing a lot more than the usual options.
3. Difficulty In Acquiring Municipality Approval
There have been instances of people finding it difficult to acquire municipality approval for steel house construction. This is because many institutions are still unaware of steel is a superior choice based on the needs of homeowners. Some areas even have specific rules regarding the materials that can be used for construction.
Getting in touch with an experienced contractor can ease this issue as they will provide guidance regarding preparation work for building your steel home.
4. Rusting Problem
You may have noticed that we have already touched upon this point. Even though steel homes are usually rust-resistant, leaving leaks unrepaired or untreated can make the metal prone to rusting. This can affect the infrastructure of your home, leading to higher costs of repair.
To avoid this problem, try buying steel framing or readymade home kits from a brand that provides metal that has been treated for water resistance. You can also paint or coat the frames yourself to save money and ensure that the running piping is regularly checked for maintenance.
Steel Framing Houses Frequently Asked Questions?
Are steel frame homes cheaper to build?
Based on the company you select for procuring the steel frames or kits, costs can be lower. However, the total cost of finishing the whole home might vary based on your design or architectural choices. You may need to put in a bit more money to perfect the insulation and make the home energy-efficient.
Another aspect that brings down the cost of steel-framed homes is the need for less labor and specialized tools. We suggest contacting a contractor with experience in building steel homes to get the best price possible.
What are the problems with steel-framed houses?
There are pros and cons to most building choices. In the case of steel-framed houses, this comes in the form of irregular insulation caused by thermal bridging. The main problem lies in the higher heat conductivity of steel, which requires your heating and cooling system to work harder due to the uneven temperature.
Another common problem that exists is the inability to change the style of your roof. Most steel homes have a conventional roof that comes with the kit or works best for the installed frame. Other than that, finding suitable insurance and mortgage can be challenging for a steel frame home, especially when you're building in an area where no such buildings exist.
Can you use steel for framing a house?
Yes, you can definitely use steel for framing a house, and the technique has been present since the end of World War II. These days lightweight steel is used for framing, which lets you design a long-lasting home that you'll cherish.
Unlike wood, you don't need to design the whole home from scratch as there are companies that sell prefabricated framing and house kits. Apart from minimizing preparation work, these kits reduce the time needed for house building.
Are steel-framed houses more expensive?
One of the things to remember when building a house is that the cost changes based on the aspects of your design choice. For instance, if you choose to build a steel-framed house exactly as per the home-building kit, then it might not be as expensive as using wood frames.
However, you may need to shell out more money to add higher quality internal walls, better insulation, or expand the area. It's also true when you choose to build metal frames from scratch. So, even if the initial cost of building a steel frame home seems expensive, the final bill may be worth it, considering the superior protection and durability on offer.
Which is better, wood or metal framing?
To be honest, there's no clear answer to choosing between wood or metal framing. You can choose a wood-framed home if you're more comfortable with traditional materials and want to save costs on insulating the home. Wood also provides better aesthetic value and makes homes easier to sell when compared to metal buildings. Most builders are used to wood, so you can readily find one for your project.
On the other hand, metal can be a superior choice if you value minimized preparation work and support benefits provided by its durability. Metal homes are more environment-friendly when they are built with steel frames. You can also benefit from the advantage of low maintenance if you're looking to build a new property that won't be used frequently.
Steel Framing Houses Final Words
That's everything we had to tell you about steel framing houses. We hope that you'll give metal frames a thought when moving forward with your next project of building homes.
Having said that, we would like you to know that buying pre-owned metal-framed houses isn't as simple as building one. If you find one in the market, do inspect it thoroughly.
Some tell-tale signs to look for are suspicious cracks, areas of corrosion, and crooked doors or window openings to be sure about the health of a home. We suggest you only buy houses with steel frames, as other metals might not have enough durability.
And in case you have decided to build a house with steel frames, take your time to find a suitable kit. We are sure that you'll enjoy working on the project due to the simplicity of construction and rewarding results.
We have been accustomed with the phrase "Form follows function" but who says a function has just one form? Trends come and go and just s few stick with the general population whereas others remain in history as bold experiments designers try hardy to bring to the every day life. So today we are talking about round beds. The concept itself is not a new one but finding a round bed in a common bedroom is quite unusual. But the round shape of the bed can freshen a bedroom design up and bring something new to the design scheme. Besides the aesthetic appeal, a round bed is also very practical. They can be placed literally anywhere in a room: in the center of it making the design scheme gravitate around it or in a round corner so hard to use otherwise. It can save up lots of space due to the lack of angles and makes cleaning a hole lot easier. A round bed is easy to move around and generates a feeling of lightness and freshness in the interior design, occupying less space than a regular bed. Traditional or modern, a round bed can fix any bedroom design. Its just a matter of taste and mixing the right textures, colors and materials. On the other hand it is a matter of perception. Round beds are not usually promoted so a regular customer will probably not be inclined to buy a round bed for his own private bedroom. But in the end we all have to adapt to the changing trends and transform them, mold them to our own taste and personality.
Round Bed Collection for Your Bedroom Design
1. Get romantic
A round bed can be the perfect item in a romantic bedroom scenery. The following hart bed from Cranium Furniture can be a bit over too much but the essential idea of romance is perfectly exuded by the overall red and dim light ambiance.
Red harted bed with red matching side lamps
by Cranium Furniture
2. Round fits perfectly into a minimalist design
The following decor by S.ID Ltd features a simple white leather bed in a modern futuristic interior design with simple clear round lines and a neutral color scheme. Next a bold black and yellow contrast brings to life a small room.
Simple minimalist round bed design.
by S.I.D Ltd
Contemporary round bed in bold black and yellow contrast
by Cranium Furniture
3. Retro round style
Where would you think to find a round bed better than in a retro bedroom? Dots, bold contrasts, mirrors, velvet and the center piece-the round bed placed not in the center in this case but in a round corner.
Retro round bed creation.
by Catherine Condoroussis Design
4. A white color scheme with interesting accents
White is the all classical choice and the accents are the ones that bring a design scheme to life. The following bedroom designs focus on the surrounding atmosphere of the round beds: floral wallpaper, colorful pillows, a zebra rug or red velvet curtains.Every little accents can make a difference in the bedroom design scheme.
Black and white fluffy round bed.
by Dupuis Design
Modern colorful bedroom design.
by S.I.D Ltd
Neutral color scheme with the white round bed positioned in the center of this interior decor.
by EuroLux
Simple round bed with a touch of classic.
by Dupuis Design
5. Different textures generate different bedroom design atmospheres
Whether we talk about chocolate velvet, white leather or black wood, texture is very important and can make the difference. Velvet represents a more romantic, intimate ambiance while wood is classical and leather more modern, controversial decor. Leather is not the first choice for a bedroom bed but for the open minded the round bed-leather headboard combination is quite an interesting one.
Modern chocolate velvet round bed.
by SHH
Classical yet simple round bed bedroom.
by Vadim kadoshnikov
Multi-textured round bed bedroom.
by Pressoto
Black and white minimalist round bed.
by Cranium Furniture
Simple beautiful round bed.
by EuroLux
Pastel bedroom with white leather round bed.
by Prime Classic Design
In the end its a problem of taste and personality. So, what do you think? Is a round bed a viable alternative to the classical traditional bed or is the idea a little bit too eccentric for your taste? Do you by chance own a round bed? If you found inspiration here yet are not sure about the entire design you can follow some DIY headboard projects, you can upholster the entire bed if the finishing is not spot on or built your own circular bed entirely! Nothing can stop you! We would like to hear you thoughts and opinions in the comment section below.
Irrespective of the time of year, adding a string of lights along the fence of your house will never stop being a hit.
Whether it is for illumination or just for aesthetic purposes, lights add a certain flair to any space. This is why many homeowners choose to light up their decks, and gardens or even add lights to the driveway, as it serves multiple purposes. However, the real issue lies in the amount of energy these lights consume.
If not careful, you could end up using lights that will hike up the electricity bill to another level. This is why we are here today to recommend the 18 best solar fence lights on the market. Not only are these beautiful but also economical and environment-friendly.
Without further ado, let’s check these products out!
Let’s kick off this list with the 10-pack solar lights by Roshwey. These stainless steel lights are ideal for outdoor use as they are all-weather resistant. Moreover, the design is sleek, which makes it a good choice for outdoor lighting.
Solar Powered: The working time of the solar light depends...
High Quality Material: The solar outdoor lights waterproof...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, it is waterproof (IP65), making it the ideal choice for outdoor lighting. Whether you want to add them to the outside wall or along with the steps of the front porch, these lights will remain unharmed. Additionally, the body of the lights is made out of stainless steel and plastic, enhancing their durability.
The next great feature is that the lights have a built-in night sensor. This sensor turns the light on as soon as it’s dark and turns them off during the day, ensuring that the battery lasts for a long time. Speaking of batteries, these lights have rechargeable ones and need about 6-8 hours of charge before first-time use.
Overall, we really like the glow these lights offer as it is bright but not the kind that hurts the eye. Just make sure they are kept in direct sunlight as that is essential for charging.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While these lights are ideal for anyone looking to add light outside of their home, the installation is a bit tricky. The brand mentions that it can be fitted using double-sided tape, but many users say it is more sturdy when screwed in.
Next on the list are these solar-powered lights by JSOT. Available in packs of six and 12, these can be bought in two shades - cool white and warm white. Moreover, the durable and weather-resistant body makes them ideal for most outdoor spaces, while the best part is that they are pretty affordable too.
Upgraded Solar Panel - Charge Faster: Solar step lights come...
Waterproof & High Quality Metal: Outdoor solar step lights...
Why Did We Like It?
Equipped with a 0.3W solar power panel, these solar lights are the perfect product to consider if you want weather-resistant lighting for an outdoor space. With a solar energy conversion rate of 18%, these lights can illuminate for around 10 hours once fully charged.
The lights are designed at a 31-degree angle which enhances the charging rate under direct sunlight. Furthermore, they have an automatic on-and-off mode, making operating these lights a lot easier.
This also makes it the ideal light for pathways, fences, and front porches as they will come on and illuminate the space when it is most needed. Additionally, they can be installed on a multitude of surfaces such as wood, PVC, vinyl, and even glass.
In a nutshell, these solar-powered lights make for excellent decorative solar lamp posts that are eco-friendly.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The thing that stood out for us was the quality of the lamps and how sturdy they were. However, the plastic inserts that came as anchors aren’t that great and tend to break easily. Hence, it is best to use your own screws while installing this solar light.
Up next, we have the Sunface solar deck lights that have crystal clear bodies and dual light options. Since they can tolerate changing weather conditions, do not hesitate to use these as fence, garden, or deck lights. Additionally, the installation of these solar lights is a breeze which makes them all the more popular.
【LIGHTING MODES】Fence solar lights offers 2 lighting...
【AUTOMATIC CONTROL】Fence solar lights with upgraded...
Why Did We Like It?
Who doesn’t like lights that change colors? We know we do, and that is why these lights by Sunface are featured on this list. With a warm white and RGB color mode, you can pick exactly how you want the outside of your house to look. Furthermore, these solar-powered lights not only illuminate outdoor spaces but amplify the look of garden decorations.
Another thing we really liked about this was the conversion rate of solar energy. Slightly higher than the JSOT lights, the Sunface solar deck lights have a solar energy conversion rate of 19.5%. If you need these to work well, all you need to do is put them under direct sunlight and let them work their magic.
Moving on, the solar panel on each light is quite large, so charging shouldn’t be a problem. What’s even better is that they have two mounting modes, allowing you to install them based on your desired aesthetic.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the biggest complaints with these lights is that they might be a bit small and hence, have a reduced coverage area. However, we suggest buying a few more as they are pretty affordable to cover the outdoor space better. Other than that, these solar lights are one of the most highly recommended options on the market.
There are many homeowners who are looking for lights that look good, are bright, and can offer some security around the house. That is why we have added these outdoor solar fence lights by Roopure. They feature a polysilicon solar panel, waterproof switch, and gorgeous design, making them ideal for outdoor spaces.
Elegant Garden Lighting Made Easy: This solar stainless...
Convenient Motion Sensor for Security Lighting: This...
Why Did We Like It?
One of the first things that stood out for us was the FCC certification these solar lights have. This is quite important, ensuring that the products are safe for usage as installing new lights in a house can be a bit of a risk.
Additionally, the durable make of these solar fence lights is quite impressive as well as they are made with stainless steel. They are resistant to most weather conditions and are IP65 waterproof, making them ideal for outdoor spaces like fences, decks, and gardens. Even the design is very sleek and is in the shape of a semi-arc, amplifying the look of any space you install them in.
Another great feature is that these lights have a PIR motion sensor to detect movement up to 20 feet at a 120-degree angle. Moreover, the LEDs are pretty bright as well and provide ample illumination in any outdoor space.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Installation of these lights can be a bit of trouble since there is only one hole to put the screw through, which is not enough. This leads to the light being left loosely installed, which is never ideal. However, double-sided tape is provided for a more secure fit but might not be ideal on painted walls.
If you have been looking for a solar-powered light brand that ensures low electricity cost and is affordable, check this one out. The JSOT solar-powered gutter lights are ideal as they are durable, bright, and not too bad to look at either. Plus, you can choose between cool and warm white lights.
We all love lights that can illuminate the space while having a gorgeous design, and that is precisely what the JSOT solar-powered gutter lights do. These not only provide lighting in most outdoor spaces but also work as the perfect decorative solar lights. Plus, the dual-color options allow you to be more creative in the aesthetic you wish to create.
Another impressive feature is the 1,600mAh rechargeable battery that only needs 4-6 hours under direct sunlight. Once fully charged, these solar gutter lights will work to their full potential for eight hours at least. What’s even better is that there is no wiring involved in installing these lights, making them ideal for fences, pools, and pathways.
On top of all that, the company offers a 30-day money-back guarantee and a 12-month risk-free guarantee on every purchase. Also, these lights are waterproof while being resistant to frost and heat.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the most significant downsides to these solar outdoor lights is the rechargeable batteries. While they do charge in a short time and offer ample lighting time through the night, the life of the battery is relatively short. Means, you will end up buying new batteries in a short time.
If you are looking to add something a bit out of the box on your fence or in the garden, check this out. The Greluna solar wall lights are beautiful to look at and offer even more beautiful colors for illumination. Let’s take a look at some of its features.
☀【 NEW VERSION 】 Upgraded Solar LED design allows you...
☀【 EASY TO INSTALL 】These Solar Lights Outdoor are...
Why Did We Like It?
Multiple color modes when it comes to solar-powered LED lights is a hit feature that most people love. If you are one of those people, the Greluna solar lights are the ideal option to look at.
You can choose between warm white and multi-color with just the press of a button. And the best part is that none of the colors are jarring or harsh.
The next best thing about these lights is that they are waterproof, heat-resistant, and even dust-resistant. What’s more, the lights come with built-in rechargeable batteries that fully charge in less than six hours under direct sunlight. Despite being outside, you do not have to worry about these solar wall lights getting spoiled.
We also appreciate that the company offers a full kit with about 16 screws and a clear instruction manual. This makes it much easier for amateur people to install lights on their fences or in their backyards without confusion.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although it has been mentioned by the company already, cloudy weather has a drastic effect on the charging. This is a bit of an issue because many competitor light brands do not struggle as much in semi-cloudy weather and can still charge. Unfortunately, these lights die out too quickly.
Pros
Easy installation on fences, decks, and gardens
Multiple light modes
Sturdy and durable
Easily offers more than eight hours of light when fully charged
Next on this list of outdoor solar fence light recommendations is the SEZAC outdoor solar lights. Other than for aesthetic purposes, many people like to install a layer of lights for added security, and these lights are perfect for that. Additionally, they aren’t too expensive either and are eco-friendly.
【3 Lighting Working Modes】The upgraded solar lights...
【 Waterproof IP65】 Solar lights with waterproof...
Why Did We Like It?
When you have a big house with more than just a few dark corners, adding a layer of lighting can be a good idea. This will not only make the house stand out but also add some security to the property. Hence, we bring the SEZAC solar fence lights as an option.
With a waterproof rate of IP 65, these lights are more than ideal to be kept in outdoor spaces as they can tackle all kinds of weather. Additionally, the lights are quite bright and provide ample illumination even if it is slightly foggy or rainy. The monocrystalline solar panels have a conversion rate of 18% and work best under direct sunlight.
One of our favorite features is the three-mode lighting. Pick between the motion sensor mode, bright light mode, and dim long light mode for maximum security around the house. Plus, the 150-degree angle lighting ensures a wide coverage irrespective of the mode.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Since these lights are bright, they are ideal for offering a level of security. But this also tends to backfire as some people find it too bright, to the point where it hurts the eye if it is a clear night. Moreover, the motion sensor claims to work at 10 feet, but it is actually around 20 feet.
Next, we have the stylish-looking solar-powered lights but GIGALUMI that are ideal on the fence, deck, and even the garden. These lights are energy efficient as well as affordable, offering plenty of opportunities to save money. Additionally, they can effectively provide illumination without hurting the eyes.
First of all, these lights are a bit of an upgrade from most lights as others only have three LED beads while this one has six. This allows for the lights to be brighter than other competitor brands but without hurting the eyes. Hence, this is why these GIGALUMI solar lamps are ideal for any outdoor space.
Another feature we were pretty impressed with was the auto-turn-on and off mode of the lights. Sometimes, it can be a bit of a hassle to manually turn lights on and off, especially in the middle of the night. And, GIGALUMI has made it easier by ensuring the lights turn on when the sun goes down and turns on at dawn again.
Additionally, the lights have a waterproof rate of IP 44 and are heat resistant. In fact, these lights are perfectly fine even in rain and snow as they are very durable.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only issue you may face with these lights is that they are a little challenging to install. While everything is provided for easy installation, the screw holes are too far apart to put on a standard four-inch post. Hence, make sure to either use double-sided tape or install it on wider fence posts.
If you feel most deck and fence lights tend to stick out like a sore thumb, why not take a look at these lights? The APONUO solar lights are designed in such a way that they can seamlessly provide light to any outdoor space. Read on below to know what we liked about them.
【Longer Working Time】We changing amorphous (thin-film)...
【300mAh Battery】 Each solar light with 3 lumens, warm...
Why Did We Like It?
The polycrystalline solar panels are pretty efficient and have a conversion rate of about 17%, which is an upgrade from the previous model’s 10%. Moreover, the rechargeable batteries that come with this solar-powered fence light allow it to keep the area well-lit for a long time (once fully charged). The best part is that they come in packs of 16.
In addition, you can pick between the default wooden brown color, black or white, whichever one offer a more seamless look. These solar lights only have three LED beads, ensuring it is not jarringly bright but offers enough light at night. Furthermore, the installation is easy as it can be mounted to the edge of any surface.
We also like the inclusion of the automatic turn-on feature that ensures the light turns on as soon as it is sundown. This way, you do not have to turn anything on (or off) manually.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is not the lights that are a bit problematic, but it is the customer service by the company. It is almost impossible to get a hold of them if you have any issues, which can be a red flag for many people.
Next on the list is an excellent brand to consider if you are looking for solar cap post lights. These by Sunwind are perfect for the job as it comes with a kit that makes installation on these posts relatively easy. Moreover, the design is sleek and neutral so that it won’t look out of place.
Application: These Solar Cap Post Lights will Fit 4X4 5X5...
EASY DIY INSTALL: Included 2x wall plugs and stainless steel...
Why Did We Like It?
Fence post lights can be a great way to illuminate the area in a uniform manner without having the lights look out of place. And this is possible with the solar lights by Sunwind as it is made for a 4x4 post. Additionally, these lights give out an amber glow because of the LED bulbs and the inner reflector making the area look warm and cozy.
Furthermore, they take about eight to 10 hours in direct sunlight to fully charge, after which they can offer six-eight hours of illumination. And the good thing is it provides a bit of convenience with the auto turn-on/off feature, so you do not have to operate it once it’s fully charged.
If you are worried about keeping these lights outdoors, do not worry, as it is IP 44 waterproof and can handle a few weather changes.
What Could’ve Been Better?
As we mentioned, these lights are ideal for 4x4 posts. But, that is the only place these can be used at. Plus, it is only compatible with wooden surfaces, and that makes it a bit restrictive in terms of usage. However, it is ideal for people who are looking for precisely this.
If you are looking for something classic and timeless in terms of design that is also efficient, then these lights are ideal. The Maggift solar step lights come in a pack of 12, with batteries included, and are ideal to light up any fence, deck, or patio.
Solar Fence Lights-- Add safety lighting to your fence with...
Easy to Install-- Includes mounting hardware to install....
Why Did We Like It?
For people who love a warm outdoor glow, these solar lights by Maggift are one to consider. On a bright and sunny day, these lights take about eight hours to charge fully and can then provide illumination through the night. Hence, it is worth considering if you are looking for lights to provide a layer of security around the house.
We love that the lights are equipped with batteries that recharge and have an auto turn-on/off feature, making it a convenient product. Additionally, they are IP 44 waterproof and resistant to heat, dust, and vibrations. So, you do not have to worry about it being outside if the weather gets a bit rough.
Another great feature is that these lights can be installed on multiple surfaces and not just wood, which makes the ideal step lights. Furthermore, installation is pretty easy as all mounting hardware is provided.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Considering that these are advertised as great step lights, it was slightly disappointing to see it is motion-activated. No matter where you install them, motion activation allows the lights to conserve solar power when it is most needed. But other than that, these lights are efficient and exceptionally durable.
Many homeowners prefer metal bodies over plastic ones when it comes to lights. If you are one of them, check out these lights by Maggift. Not only do they have a sturdy, metal body that makes it durable, but the lights are pretty bright too. Plus, these are a breeze to install.
Solar Fence Lights-- Add safety lighting to your fence with...
Easy to Install-- Includes mounting hardware to install....
Why Did We Like It?
Gone are the days when outdoor fence solar lights needed to look like little floodlights to provide ample illumination. The Maggift solar lights have a unique and beautiful design that allows them to be the perfect accent light in your garden or deck. Moreover, they are effortless to install since all mounting hardware is included.
We appreciate that these lights come with a dusk-to-dawn sensor, so you do not have to operate them manually once it is turned on. Additionally, keeping them outside is not a problem either since they are IP44 waterproof and resistant to most weather, including snow. Just make sure it is kept under direct sunlight for efficient charging.
It is the body of these solar fence lights that stands out the most for us since it is unlike its plastic competitors. Since it has a metal body, you can rest assured that it will remain unharmed outdoors.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It is not just us that highly recommend these lights, but most users who get these are quite happy with them. However, the batteries are a little problematic as they do not have a long life and require frequent changes. We suggest buying a more trusted brand of batteries for these lights for longer illumination.
Another great set of lights offered by Sunface is these deck lights that can be used in any outdoor space. Despite the large solar panel and excellent design, these are pretty affordable. And since they don’t increase the electricity bill, it is the perfect product to invest in when on a tight budget.
If you are on a budget but need some illumination in dark corners or along a dark fence, these are the lights to look at. These Sunface solar deck lights are ideal as they are affordable, powered by solar energy, and eco-friendly. Additionally, installing them is effortless and is ideal for wooden fences.
Much like most solar fence lights, these feature dusk-to-dawn sensors. This allows the light to turn off when there is light and turn on during the dark hours providing illumination in the place it is installed, through the night.
Additionally, the lights have two switching modes - warm light and multi-color; But that’s not even the best part. The best thing about these lights is that it offers seven different colors to choose from in the multi-color mode. Hence, it is ideal for people who love to change the vibe outside.
What Could’ve Been Better?
These come in a pack of eight, ideal for covering a large area around a small home. However, these lights are a little smaller than some of the others in the market. So, you might have to buy more for uniform coverage by these lights.
Up next, we have a great recommendation for fence lights, and it’s these by KBP. We featured this on here because of the modern design it has and how easy it is to install it. Plus, we think these provide ample illumination and work well as decorative solar lights.
Unique Design:With unique lampshade which looks like fish...
Intelligent Light Sensor:KBP solar lights will automatically...
Why Did We Like It?
Made with a unique design that allows light to disperse more evenly, these lights by KBP make for the ideal fence lights. They are bright and can provide ample illumination at a very low cost. Additionally, there are two screw holes incorporated into the design, which allows the light to be sturdy after installation.
These solar lights by KBP have an IP 65 waterproof rating and have a strong make that can handle most types of weather. Additionally, they do not pose any threat to the environment, making them a great, low-budget eco-friendly product. We also love that they can be installed using double-sided tape and even strings.
Furthermore, these lights have an on/off button, which has to be turned on the first time after which the sensor is activated. It also comes with a rechargeable battery which charges most effectively when exposed to direct sunlight.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only downside to these lights is that they do not offer a ton of coverage and act like shed lights covering a limited area. Hence, if you are looking for something with wider coverage, we suggest buying more than just one pack and installing them close together.
If the design is a crucial factor you take into consideration, then it doesn’t get better than these lights by EHO. But that’s not the only reason they made it to the list, as these lights are high-quality and bright as well. Furthermore, they are available in packs of four and eight.
【Upgraded Solar Decoration Lights 】Compared with the...
【Fully Automatic Solar Lights】Eho solar deck light...
Why Did We Like It?
Set out on a mission to provide bright illumination using elegant and intricate design, these lights by EHO are doing just that. These solar lights feature a beautiful pattern that is accentuated by the warm lights it offers. Furthermore, no matter where you install these, the lights provide a cozy and romantic vibe.
One of the things that caught our eye was the highly efficient solar panel made out of polysilicon. The panel itself is pretty large, which is ideal if you want more efficient charging and hence, charges fully in six-eight hours. Furthermore, it has a conversion rate of 17%-19% depending on the weather and will always provide ample illumination for a long time.
Another very impressive feature is that the lights automatically adjust to the brightness in its surrounding. This is why if there is a lot of illumination around the light, they switch to energy-saving mode. Furthermore, they have an auto on/off feature for added convenience.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It was hard to find a fault in these lights since they are pretty popular and for a good reason. However, many reviewers felt that the “EHO” logo is a bit too big compared to the size of the lights and ruins the aesthetics. Other than that, the lights work beautifully and create a very cozy environment.
If you are not the kind of person who likes to attach a string of lights along a wall or a fence, then these might be for you. The Fooyancho lights are made to be used on posts that aren’t too close to each other.
Sometimes, it can become hard to choose between white, warm, or warm white lights for the house, and each has a different aesthetic. This is where these lights by Fooyancho come into the picture as it has three lighting modes for you to pick from.
Since these are made for posts, you can choose whether to use them for security or create a cozy look. In addition to having a classic look, the light works really well. The solar panels on these lights have an 18% conversion rate when kept under direct sunlight.
Plus, they have an IP65 waterproof rating making them the ideal lights to illuminate the space without a care about the weather. Rest assured, these lights will stay on through the night
We found the installation of these lights to be quite simple as well. No need for a professional as the company offers all mounting hardware and a well-explained user manual.
What Could’ve Been Better?
These are one of the more popular post lights considering their design and then durability. The only issue is that they are a bit on the expensive side when compared to the prices of other similar lights. However, we think it might be an excellent investment.
Next on the list are these solar-powered fence lights by Bridika. The design is pretty standard, but the illumination is beyond great. If you are looking for lights that can secure the property from animal (or human) trespassers, this is the product to consider.
One of the biggest issues people have with solar lights is the conversion rate, but not with this one. The solar panels on these lights are made out of monocrystalline and are also quite large, allowing a conversion rate of about 18%. Furthermore, the charging time is only about four-six hours, after which they illuminate the space all night.
The next most important feature this one has is the large-capacity batteries and the 18 LED beads that offer bright illumination. Additionally, you can choose between warm and cold lights depending on the aesthetic you’re trying to create.
We also love that the lights can alter how much power needs to be used to conserve the energy of the battery. Plus, they have an auto on/off feature, which is quite helpful.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the most significant downsides is that while the lights and the batteries are high-quality and work well, the body of the lights is not. The issue is that the lights do well in the heat and cold but not that well when it rains despite being waterproof.
Finally, we have the Otdair fence lights that are stylish, illuminate the place, and maintain a cozy vibe. The wide solar panel ensures the conversion rate of solar energy remains high so the lights can work all night long. Now, let’s take a look at some of the exciting features they offer.
【Multi-Modes】 The Fence lights have two modes: cold...
【Wide Application】 With the wireless design, our fence...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, we love having options when it comes to light color choices, and this one offers plenty of that. The Otdair lights have two modes: mode 1 is cold light, and mode two is multi-colored lights that can randomly switch to 7 different lights. Hence, whether it is mood lighting or something more festive, these can be used for any occasion.
We were also very impressed with the durability of these lights as they have an IP65 waterproof rating and are resistant to most weather conditions. Since they are highly durable, you can easily install them in any outdoor space without hesitation. Plus, the installation is super easy and can be done with either screws or tape.
In a nutshell, these lights are worth looking into if you want something that can be used throughout the year.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While the solar panels are pretty wide and can catch ample sun when installed correctly, the light itself is quite small. So if you are looking to cover a large area with uniform illumination, buying more of these may be necessary.
Pros
Dual light modes
Waterproof and highly durable
Ample illumination
Easy to install
Cons
Smaller than expected
Solar Fence Lights Buying Guide
Now that we are done reviewing the products let’s talk about how we selected these 18. Naturally, solar lights are not new to the market, and picking one can be difficult. However, we noted some essential features that are crucial when selecting the best solar fence light.
Let’s take a look at what these factors are.
1. Brightness
When buying such lights, most people hope it performs a dual purpose - making the fence look good and offering some security. It may not be from trespassers or animals, but a little bit of light is needed outside the house, simply to avoid tripping over a branch. This is why brightness is a very crucial aspect.
2. Quality
Of course, the quality of the lights is another essential factor because most of the time, these lights are outside. They need to be resistant to all kinds of weather and mainly waterproof.
3. Aesthetic
Finally, no one likes ugly lights. No matter how good the lights may be, the design has to match the house’s aesthetic. It may be in the overall layout, some pattern on the front, or embellishment in the body, but it is important it looks good.
Verdict
On that note, we finally come to the end of our reviews on the best outdoor solar lights for fences, decks, and gardens.
Hopefully, this has inspired you to look into some of these products or steered you in the right direction. We know 18 products is a lot to take in at one go, so let us tell you our favorites.
Our personal choice is the JSOT DX-19, as they are worth every penny. The lights are bright, the body is durable, and the installation is pretty solid when using the correct insert. Also, the Sunface Solar Deck Lights are quite impressive if you are looking for multiple color modes and high solar conversion rates.
But that’s just what we think. Let us know which of these stood for you, and we will see you next time!
Soda water may be just carbon dioxide mixed in water, but it sure has taken the fancy of the world in a big way.
Whether you call it sparkling water, seltzer, or soda water, these bubbles of gas can convert plain water into a fun beverage. And getting a soda maker at home can help you ditch the frequent store trips and make bubbly water whenever you want it.
Till even a decade ago, soda makers were not that much in vogue. But today, there are a vast number of options available on the market. To help you select from among those, here’s our list of the six best options that are making all the right noise. Along with these product details, we’ve also included a handy buyer’s guide to aid the selection process.
If you’re looking for a suitable soda maker that doesn’t skimp on quality as well as style, then the sleek black Fizzi One Touch Soda Maker from SodaStream is your best bet. One of the most reputed soda makers of all time, this product is fast, easy, and simple to operate. Plus, the design is a sure eye-catcher.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
Looks apart, the simple operation of this electric-powered device is what caught our eye. With a single touch of a button, you can get sparkling water of three different carbonation levels. This ensures that anyone can get the right amount of fizz in their drink.
Its power needs are relatively low, so you don’t have to worry about high utility bills. At the same time, it comes with a 60L cylinder of CO2, so there’s no need to spend extra on it at the start. Since each cylinder can carbonate an equivalent volume of water, you can expect it to last for quite some time.
We also like how the machine comes with a 1L carbonating bottle that’s entirely BPA-free. The bottle itself has a premium look and can be reused. And in case you require additional bottles, you can easily purchase them separately.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only gripe we have with this model is that it doesn’t work on battery power and must be plugged in for an operation. This means you can’t take it on road trips and outdoor adventures for a quick drink. But that’s no reason to give this one a miss.
Up next, we’ve got the AARKE Carbonator III, which is ideal for modern kitchens. The Swedish design of this device and the stainless steel and copper construction make it suitable for long-term use without worry. And if copper doesn’t seem right for you, it’s also available in a range of other colors and metal options.
Seamless Operation: Enjoy the convenience of cordless and...
Elegant Design: Elevate your countertop with the Carbonator...
Why Did We Like It?
Arguably one of the slimmest and most portable soda makers globally, the AARKE Carbonator III is robust and straightforward to use. Just plug in the carbonator cylinder, turn the handle, and you’re done! It’s a no-frills solution to getting hassle-free soda water.
What’s more, the lever even takes care to release any pent-up carbonation. This way, you can avoid messing up your kitchen. Just unscrew the included carbonating bottle, and you can enjoy bubbly water with your favorite drinks.
Coming to the carbonating bottle, comes with a stainless steel cap and is compatible with most standard 60L CO2 cylinders. Plus, it’s entirely BPA-free, which means you don’t have to worry about any harmful pollutants.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite so many features, we were a bit disappointed to learn that this product doesn’t come with a carbonation cylinder. As a result, you’ll have to spend extra on it; but considering that the product itself does not require electricity, the cost is offset.
One of the reasons why many people stay away from buying soda makers is the need to replace CO2 cylinders. Well, the Sparkel Beverage System uses a unique technology that eliminates the need for the carbonation cylinder. At the same time, it comes with a range of nifty features that make it one of our top picks.
WELCOME TO THE FUTURE OF SPARKLING WATER - Spärkel is the...
NEW & IMPROVED: Spärkel’s new systems are now 33% FASTER,...
Why Did We Like It?
Just the mention of a soda maker without the CO2 cylinder was enough to get us hooked. Add to that the fact that you can use this device to carbonate everything from water and tea to juices, cocktails, and wines, and you’ve got a soda maker to reckon with. It can even work to extract flavors from fruits and herbs added to the carbonating bottle.
How does this machine make soda water without carbon dioxide cylinders? Well, it comes with packets containing powdered citric acid and baking soda, which, when mixed, produce the CO2 required for carbonation. Each packet is measured to produce enough CO2 for carbonating one bottle.
You can select from among five carbonation levels, and the machine illuminates the bottle during the process. A musical chime lets you know when carbonation is done. It also comes with a 25.4-ounce bottle and ten carbonators to help you begin. Additional carbonators and bottles can be bought separately.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There’s really very little we could find fault with this unit, apart from the fact that it comes with just a one-year warranty. Also, you can only use Sparkel carbonators with the product; otherwise, the warranty becomes void immediately.
Are you trying to ditch the plastic and opt for glass instead? Then the SodaStream Aqua Fizz is the soda maker you should go with. This stylish, black device comes with two glass carafes that have an elegant design; plus, using the device is just a matter of pushing a button, so there are no worries there.
Make fresh sparkling water at the push of a button
Includes: sparkling water maker, 60L Co2 cylinder, and 2...
Why Did We Like It?
Affordable yet stylish, the Aqua Fizz uses a regular 60L CO2 cylinder that can be used to make soda water. And since it doesn’t require a power source to work, you can take it on road-trips or for tailgating wherever you want.
The device uses a single button that works manually, so you’ll have to put in a bit of trial-and-error before you end up with the exact amount of carbonation. This might pose a bit of a problem initially, but there’s nothing easier to operate once you get the hang of it.
Perhaps the most striking part of this device is the two glass carafes that come with it. Each carafe holds 20 ounces of water and has a ribbed design that’s good enough to end up at any dinner party table. Overall, a value-for-money device, if there ever was one.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only problem we faced with this device came from the carafes themselves. The device is made in such a way that you can only carbonate water using the carafes. So, in case any of those get damaged, you’ll have to buy new ones.
Affordable and available in four attractive colors, the DrinkMate Soda Maker can carbonate any beverage. So, if you’re looking to spice up that flat beer or add a bit of sparkle to your party cocktails, this is the product to go with. Plus, it doesn’t even need electricity to work, which is a big positive in our opinion.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
The highlight of this device is that, unlike most soda makers that can only carbonate water, this one can work with any beverage. At the same time, the compact, electricity-free design means you can take it anywhere you need to.
The carbonation bottle that comes with the unit has clear markings for the fill line and indicators for high and low foam levels. This means you can see the amount of carbonation you’re producing.
It’s available in four color options and includes a 10L carbonation cylinder to get things started. The device is compatible with other 60L carbonation cylinders, even those from competing brands. What’s more, you can send back any empty cylinder to get discounts on new ones.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There’s nothing we have against this product, considering the excellent features it offers. However, we would have liked it if the unit came with a full-sized carbonation cylinder like other comparable brands.
Pros
Lightweight and attractive design
Compatible with all carbonation cylinders
Doesn’t need electricity to operate
Can carbonate any beverage
Cons
Doesn’t come with a full-sized carbonation cylinder included
If traditional soda siphons are more up your alley, then you’ll love this iSi Soda Siphon. The design is a blend of the classic soda siphons used by bartenders with modern soda-making technology. On top of that, the stainless steel design is undoubtedly eye-catching and durable.
CONTEMPORARY DESIGN meets modern technology; the iSi Soda...
EASY TO USE: fill the siphon directly from the tap with...
Why Did We Like It?
First off: the retro design that’s reminiscent of the soda siphons of old. Crafted from high-quality stainless steel along with a durable plastic head, it includes all essential add-ons such as a measuring tube, charger holder, and removal key. At the same time, the made-in-Austria technology promises long-term operation.
Using the unit is simple: just fill the bottle with water, screw on the cap, and carbonate with the required soda charger... that’s it! You’ve got enough sparkling water to brighten up your day. What’s more, the appealing looks make it suitable for showing off at cocktail parties and bars.
The measuring tube included with the package helps you add just the right amount of liquid and avoid spillage. It also comes with a pressure control valve that protects the unit from getting over-pressurized, so safety is not a factor that you’d need to worry about.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although the device itself is pretty affordable, you need to buy the carbonation cartridges separately. This ultimately raises the overall cost of using the unit in the long term. At the same time, the multi-step process for making soda water might seem to be a hassle for some users.
Pros
Doesn’t need electricity to work
Easy operation
Durable stainless steel build
Comes with the required accessories
Cons
Carbon cartridges must be bought separately
Soda Maker Buyer’s Guide
And that’s our list of the best soda makers of the year right there...but wait! Don’t hurry off to get the model you liked best, because we’re only halfway through the woods. Buying a soda maker for your home isn’t as easy a task as it appears.
There are quite a number of factors that you must consider before taking a plunge and buying the soda maker of your choice. To help you with that, here’s a quick buyer’s guide that we’ve prepared. Going through it will help you make a better decision.
Power Requirements
The first aspect to consider when looking for a soda maker is whether it needs a power source. These devices usually come in two variants: manual and electric. The electric variants require a power source or batteries to work.
The choice of whether to go for an electric or battery-powered model depends on your usage requirements. While cordless models are best for road trips and camping, a corded model will serve you well for domestic use.
Operation Type
We’ve already mentioned that soda makers come in two types: manual and electric. Apart from power source and portability, the presence (or absence) of a power source determines whether your machine can operate automatically or not.
Electric models are usually automatic and have different settings for different fizz levels. In contrast, manual models use a single-button operation, and you have to use a trial-and-error method to settle on the necessary level of carbonation.
Beverage Choice
The type of beverage you’re looking to carbonate also plays a crucial role in the choice. Most soda makers can only carbonate water, though you can add fruits, herbs, and other flavoring agents later.
But if you’re looking to carbonate other drinks such as tea, juice, or alcoholic beverages, then go with a model that works with all kinds of drinks. Such units can bring the flavor back into drinks that have gone flat.
Keep in mind that you should never try to carbonate other drinks in a machine that’s meant only for water. This might damage the device, as well as void any warranty it might have. So, exercise due caution when using the machine.
Carbonation Method
When it comes to soda makers, a large variety of them uses CO2 cylinders for carbonation purposes. These cylinders have a fixed volume, usually 60L, and need replacing once they’ve depleted.
Other variants use powdered carbonation agents for this purpose. In either case, make sure the unit you buy has a carbonation cylinder/agent thrown in the package. This way, you can save the cost of buying one from the get-go.
Bottle Type And Size
In general, soda makers come with glass or plastic bottles that can fit into the device to carbonate liquids. If you’re getting a unit that includes a plastic bottle, make sure it’s BPA-free and doesn’t contain any harmful toxins.
For those looking to avoid plastic altogether, it’s best to go with models that include glass bottles or carafes. Just note that models that have glass bottles tend to be a bit more costly than ones with plastic bottles.
Along with the bottle material, the size of the bottle and unit also matters. Usually, countertop units that require a power source can work with larger carbonation tanks. Smaller models, on the other hand, are ideal for carbonation on the go.
Verdict
And that’s all we have to share with you today! We hope you had a great time going through the reviews and buyers’ guide. By now, you should have a clear idea regarding which model to invest in.
If you’re still on the fence, let’s make the task a bit easier by nudging you toward the right ones. In our opinion, if you’re looking for an electric-powered model that doesn’t skimp on style as well as functionality, then look no further than the SodaStream Fizzi One Touch Soda Maker.
When the first snow falls in winter, children and adults anticipate enough snow to make snowmen in their garden, back and front yards. And although Christmas is already gone, the white presence will still linger for a few more months. The classical snowman is never gone once winter comes, and while others cannot enjoy having snow, this does not dampen the eagerness of having a snowman at home. There are lovely snowman decorations that can make any home more welcoming and warm on cold days.Take a look at these cheerful snowman decorations that can make any home winter ready.
1. light up snowman wreath for a warm welcome
Having a plain door gives the opportunity for a lovely snowman wreath made from different materials. This first snowman wreath features the famous outline, hat, and scarf of a snowman and is made of materials that are either recycled or gathered from the backyard. This snowman decoration has a rustic look but maintains its wintry appeal.
Snowman decorations need not be bought at a very high price. Repurposing items at home to fit the season or change the look of the room can be a great cheap alternative. This easy but smart way of repurposing an old lamp into this joyful snowman brings the cheer that the season deserves.
3. rustic snowman table decoration
Console tables are perfect for displaying decorations for the season. This snowman table decoration surely fits a console table and will be an attractive piece inside the home. The rustic look on the snowman makes the home more welcoming and warm.
4. welcoming guests with a smiling snowman
Doors can be decorated with many things and a snowman door decoration can be as tiny or as huge as possible. This snowman decoration gives emphasis on both the snowman and the door. The plain white door becomes the perfect background for the huge snowman face.
Snowman table decorations would, most often than not, have red and green, but this table setup depicts a more wintry wonderland theme. The blue and white softens the black table, making it look more refreshing despite the dark hue. The candle holders and snowflake table runner also create a stunning look for the whole setup.
Pallet wood is a great material for arts and crafts. It is also a great canvas which can be used to make an unique painting, just like this snowman on a pallet. The snowman pallet decoration is perfect inside or outside the home, it will draw the attention of your neighbors and friends for sure.
While many stick to decorating walls and tables, the ceiling is also an open space that will look amazing with decorations. These hanging snowman garlands are perfect for the children's or teen's room. The colorful snowflakes are a perfect match for the white snowman and the combination of colors pops out effortlessly from the gray wall.
Bowls are used for decorations and the snowman theme appears here yet again. Unlike the usual snowman decoration though this design of a snowman made out of bowls has a touch of steampunk and is stunning even without the common materials used for the traditional snowman.
9. fun snowman decoration from common household items
DIY snowman decorations are fun to make and can be personalized. This DIY sock snowman is easy to make and can get kids interested in making one themselves. The crafts can be placed on corners of a room, under the tree or on windows.
Decorating a home with snowmen can be quite easy with a little creativity. This yarn snowman is not only easy to make, it will also look cute on any corner of the room. The simple materials look beautiful when combined together.
Re-purposing items at home is easy and can become very decorative. This snowman candle holder idea captures the fun and is pretty at the same time. It can become a lovely centerpiece for the dining table or a perfect addition to the kitchen decorations.
Snowman decorations need not be too fancy,even the simplest idea can look equally beautiful. These easy to make paper snowman luminaries can be a perfect addition to a simple table decoration especially for homes with small spaces. The different faces of snowmen add fun to the decorations, too.
The snowman's hat has always been part of the whole appeal of the beloved winter icon. The black top hat adorned with a red bow is always present where the snowman is. Tossing a few more elements and details, this snowman hat decoration will be perfect for the dinner table or the coffee table.
Fancy materials for wreaths are not always the best way to recreate a snowman, sometimes it only takes a few balls of yarn and creativity. This yarn snowman wreath is as festive as any other snowman decorations with its different colors. The effect of the color wheel is more visible because of the white yarn, making the wreath stand out from the dark-colored door. It is cute, modern and looks definitely fun.
Decorating the corners of the home can become quite tricky, especially if there seems little room for such. These snowman decors made with bold colors make the corner more noticeable and become more attractive with the smiling faces of these snowmen.
Traditional white linen used for a snowman can be boring and typical. Using burlap instead creates a different texture for the snowman without compromising the whole winter appeal of the character.
When was the last you you decided to build a snowman? Feel free to share your snowmen projects in the comment section below.
Hey there! I know you are all struggling to find extra storage space in your home so in this article I'm going to give you a hand and show you some tips. I decided to focus on the bathroom, since we have hundreds of small things in a small room, and we should place them in order and make the area look neat and clean, clutter-free. The Smart Bathroom Storage Ideas That Will Impress You are suitable for both small and big bathrooms.
Regardless of the size of the bathroom, we`re all desperate for storage tips that won't make the bathroom look overcrowded. So, what are you waiting for!? Happy scrolling!
When you are in a hurry in the morning, you need everything to be within reach so the example above idea might resonate with you a great deal !
When we consider bathroom storage designs, we should have in mind cabinets, shelves, racks, boxes, baskets, whatever storage option we can use. There is no universal answer.
The corner space in every room is most of the time left unused so placing some triangular shelves in the corner could help, they can serve be used to both store and display items !
Wire baskets are great for storage and they simply look phenomenal whilst they emphasize the feeling of space, something that you will surely appreciate in your bathroom !
Hopefully, you have found the ideas presented above inspiring, useful, and practical! We would love to hear what smart bathroom storage ideas you`re using today in the comment section below!
If you are looking for a small vac which will not eat up space but will work efficiently, this is a guide to go with!
Wet vacs have become the need of the day in present times and you may be wondering how to make a choice! If you are confused about finding the perfect one, we are here with a list of the top 6 smallest wet dry vacs for home and workshops.
After going through tons of reviews and queries of people, we found out that there was confusion relating to the usage and wattage. Since they are a smaller version of the standard vacs, their functionality is a little different.
Here, we have made it simpler for you to understand. Read on to find out more!
Smallest Wet Dry Vac For Home and Workshop
Vacuum cleaner washing appliance icons set. Flat illustration of 16 vacuum cleaner washing appliance vector icons for web
This is a small-sized beast when it comes to cleaning. Be it blowing off leaves from the front porch or cleaning debris; it worked really well as a blower and vacuum cleaner. Serving two purposes, this is one of the most lightweight vacs in the market, which managed to impress us.
Weighing only 7 pounds, we could carry this device around easily and use it for debris and dirt anywhere. Be it wet or dry dirt, this machine is programmed to clean anything. It also comes with a handle which gave us the ease of holding it up while we cleaned the house.
Coming to machine storage, we could easily store the hose, accessories, and attachments in the vac’s body itself which benefitted us a lot. Additionally, the accessories which consisted of nozzle and crevice tools helped us clear off wood dust and debris from corners and from behind furniture.
It also comes with a 10 feet long power cord, which is long enough and makes it easier for us to connect it to the electric point and move around freely.
Adding to the features, there is a built-in air and noise diffuser, which brings down the sound level considerably. Now you can clean your house without waking up anybody.
What could have been better?
This is almost a perfect shop vacuum, and we found no faults in its usage. Just a word of caution, make sure you never overload the device. Overloading will immediately lead to the machine stopping working. We were trying to clean up cement debris when this happened to us, and thus we want to warn you from before.
Worried about storage space in your house? What if you could mount your vac up on the wall and use it? The Shop-vac 1.5 Gallon enables you to do just that. If you want to free up space in your house or clean wall corners and ceilings, this vac is precisely what will fit your needs.
COMPACT POWER: This wet/dry vacuum offers the power of a...
ACCESSORIES INCLUDED: This wet/dry vac includes 1.25"...
Why did we like it?
The best thing we liked about this model is that we did not need to pull it all around with us. Instead, the machine could be mounted onto a wall, and the extensions provided along with a 7 feet long hose could be used to reach the corners of your room.
Additionally, the package included one crevice tool, one dual floor nozzle for the floor area, which was carpeted, one round brush, and one gulper nozzle. The multi-functionality of this vac impressed us a great deal. Like the previous model, this device came with ample storage space, and we could easily store extensions inside the body of the vac.
To add to the features, this model came with an 18 feet long power cord, which gave us yet more space to move the vac or mount it. All in all, this vac did not leave us much to complain about.
What could have been better?
A problem we faced with this device was when we tried cleaning water post a torrential downpour. There was a considerable amount of water that had to be taken in by the vac, and we noticed the liquid tank capacity was not sufficient. We had to empty it and complete the task in parts.
If budget is a concern or if you do not want to spend a fortune on a mini vac, this option will fulfill all your needs while not burning a hole in your pocket! Packed with a lot of power and a 2.5-gallon tank, we could not believe our luck looking at the price tag.
This one was very similar to the first option we suggested but came at a lower price point. With a very stylish body and a foldable handle that, when not in use, can be tucked beside the machine, this is one of the most compact devices we have seen.
Paired with an 8 feet cord, which could be twisted around the machine for easy organization, we found it to be very compact.
We were able to use this shop vacuum out of the box as no setup was required. It is pretty easy to handle, so much so that we let our kid clean his mess while playing. He is able to maneuver the machine to clean up water spills or dirt left from shoe marks in the house quite easily.
This one, too, comes with an auto shut-off button to prevent any sort of overflow along with a noise diffuser, which are features we could not expect at the price the device came in.
What could have been better?
We would not consider this tiny glitch as a problem, but the power cord is not too long, and thus we found it challenging to move about too much from the power source. It is a very efficient device when it comes to cleaning a small space, but a more substantial area may not be a plausible option.
If you do not have many electric points to attach the plug to or if most of your charging points in the workshop are taken up, this device is very much needed. DEWALT has come up with this master machine, which can run on batteries as well as via a cord.
Plenty of Storage - 2-gallon tank capacity provides enough...
Why did we like this?
Our workshop is in the outhouse, and it has only one charging point, which is usually used to power appliances. This device appeared as a boon for us as we could clean the place without having to switch off any running appliances.
Also, the batteries are reliable and last for a considerable amount of time. You do not need to worry about changing the battery too frequently.
With its dimensions being 17.2” x 12.3” x 13.1,” we can easily categorize the device as compact. The small size and compact design made it very similar to the previous devices in this list and gave us a similar amount of functionality.
Like most vacs, this one also comes with additional benefits like an extension wand, a carpet attachment, a crevice tool, and a wide nozzle tool, making it very simple for us to reach and clean the absolutely hidden corners of the room.
What could have been better?
We were excited to have ordered this vac but were very surprised to see the battery or the power cord did not come with the machine. We had to order it separately, thus leading to increased expenses. This is not too problematic now that you already know of it and can order the batteries and cord together.
We required a machine that could clean up wooden debris and wood dust because we often work with wood in our workshop, and the dirt is everywhere. The Porter-Cable PCC795B helped us do this very efficiently. It worked like a wizard and cleaned up the debris in a matter of a minute.
The cordless shop vac has a powerful suction for quick...
The PORTER-CABLE vacuum has a portable 2-gallon tank with...
Why did we like it?
With one of the most powerful suction pumps, this machine cleaned up debris in a jiffy. Also powered with a 4 APM power battery, this device runs cordless for 24-28 minutes efficiently without having to replace the battery. Similar to the previous shop vacuum, we really liked this feature and believed it to be a great addition to our workspace.
With a 7 feet long soft hose, we were quickly able to reach otherwise unapproachable corners of the space as the hose being was more flexible than normal hard ones. Also, we were not always afraid of snags that may occur.
We also appreciated that the vac not only cleaned dry and wet wastes but could also be used as a blower, thus making it useful to clean up the front porch or backyard. You need not worry about fallen leaves anymore as this machine will be able to blow them off your porch.
What could have been better?
We faced some minor glitches with the suction pump as sometimes our machine would slow down leading to the consequent slowing down of the pump. This had occurred once or twice with us over four months, not a giant problem, but you can talk to customer service beforehand.
We would praise this shop vac solely for its power-efficient capacity. It runs the longest among all the devices listed here on an 18V LXT Lithium-Ion 5. 0Ah battery. If you are not keen on recharging the battery often, but you still want to go with a cordless version, this is a great option to choose.
Powerful BL Brushless motor delivers 57 CFM and 27 inches...
Filter cleaning system is designed to maintain optimum...
Why did we like it?
One feature which makes this device stand out is HEPA filtration, which is known to catch up to 99.9% of particles leading to immaculate air quality. This is a great feature we enjoyed, especially when there are kids and pets in the house.
To add to it, we could run the vac for 60 long minutes on one battery, and this is almost double of what the DEWALT model was offering. Also, equipped with a built-in battery level indicator, this machine allowed us to understand how much charge is left in the battery. Now, we did not have to wait for the battery to stop working; preparations could be done beforehand.
Additionally, this vac comes with a dual suction mode, which one could adjust according to the purpose for which it is needed. We could select between high and low for the perfect amount of suction speed required, we also appreciated the fine dust filter that comes with the shop vac.
What could have been better?
Though this device comes with an additional feature of HEPA filtration, it does not provide too many extension arms. We could not clean carpets at home with this device as the required tool was not provided. Other than this, the machine was no short of perfect.
Pros
HEPA filtration bettering air quality
Dual suction mode
Long battery life
Cons
Additional extensions not provided
Smallest Wet Dry Vac Buyer’s Guide
Now that you know about the six smallest wet-dry vacs in the market today, half of your work is done. But you still need to know the basics that one should keep in mind before buying a vac. We will provide an informative list dealing with the possible queries you might have while choosing a cleaner.
Since these are smaller in size, the vacs would not be as strong as their bigger cousins, so you need to keep a note of the suction capacity of the product and motor.
Motor
As we already mentioned, do not expect the vac to be as powerful as the big ones but ask for details about wattage and horsepower. The more horsepower it has, the better it is. But costs may go up with increased wattage, and according to us, 2 to 3 horsepower is good enough to go.
Power Cord
This might seem like a common thing to keep in mind, but in the long run, this happens to be crucial. A long power cord will ensure that you can move the device easily, and there is less risk of tripping over.
Battery
Make a note of the number of power points you have in your workshop or home. If you do not have too many, select a vac that is battery-operated. This will save you the hassle of a power cord altogether while giving you the same functionality.
Accessories
Some of the essential accessories you are probably going to require are an extension wand, a crevice tool, and a detail brush. Make sure it is coming with the package. If not, buy them separately and then calculate the costs. Most vacs come with this basic set.
Also, look at how the accessories are to be stored as most machines will have onboard storage, which is beneficial. You would not want to keep the extensions separately as it leads to taking up more storage space.
Verdict
Vacs are needed in our daily lives for constant spills and mishaps. For a workshop, it is unavoidable as debris is almost always flying in the air and lying on the ground.
With a small vac, you could save a lot of storage space and even choose to mount the device on a wall, so that it doesn’t take up floor space at all. Adding to this, now you have a comprehensive and informative list to fall back on while deciding your favorite.
And, before we end this guide, we would like to tell you that the Vacmaster is our budget option because the shop vac gives us the most while not burning a hole in our pockets. Makita XCV11Z is the best option if you are looking for a shop vac that will last for a long time on a single charge.
Let us know in the comments below if you are satisfied with the verdict. Happy shopping!
Small pool volleyball nets should be made of trustworthy material to ensure safe play. They are most likely to be non-corrosive and non-sagging. So, besides our favorite pick W.F&STAUB Sport Professional Volleyball Net, we will be reviewing some more top-notch options on the market.
Pool parties are always special, considering the fun they involve, and every pool party is incomplete without a game of volleyball. So, if you are planning one such party and wish to buy the best pool volleyball nets, then go for it.
However, make sure you compare the features of each net available in the market. They should be worth the price, after all. So, to make your search easier, we have listed down the best nets for you to check out.
🏐️PROFESSIONAL VOLLEYBALL NET: Made of high quality...
🏐️DURABLE VOLLEYBALL NET: There is a 46 feet aircraft...
What we like
Uses high-quality aircraft steel cable
Good customer service
Ideal size for competitive volley games
Can be used at any place, such as a schoolyard, or beach
Does not corrode
What we don't like
No additional poles provided
This brand's high-quality net with its own net bag, which should help you and your gang have fun at the pool. The nets are made of aircraft steel cables to ensure they never interrupt the play.
Compared to other volleyball nets in this price range, this net offers superior quality. It is fixed with strong, rigid ropes that are provided at each of its four corners.
Such a construction guarantees that this net can be used in any weather conditions and that it can be utilized for professional games. Also, the high tenacity resistance power of the net will allow you to use it for a long time.
That is not all; the net is also very easy to use. The stitches are strong, and the net size is quite suitable (32 ft x 3 feet) for all. To keep the stitches from becoming loose, the edges of the nets are double-layered with canvas.
Size: Universal size (32 feet by 3 feet) | Material: Polyethylene | Portability: can be used easily on indoor and outdoor grounds
This is the most inexpensive variant that comes with sufficient features. PVC and polyester are the materials used in the making of this net. It also comes in an ideal size of 32 feet by 3 feet.
To preserve the stability of the net, the steel wires are only installed at the top of the net. Metal grommets are placed at each corner of the net to ensure sturdiness. Also, note that no dowel rod pockets or dowel rods are provided to retain the shape of the net (while the game is being played).
Furthermore, steel wires are used to make the ropes that are provided to attach the net to the poles. Every border has double-layer sewing to extend the long lifespan of the net.
Additionally, this net can be easily packaged and kept in the brand's own reusable and transportable bag. To prevent the net from easily shredding, the square mesh is made of PVC material. Lastly, one can even play badminton by using this volleyball net.
Size: Universal size (32 feet by 3 feet) | Material: Polyester and PVC. Metal grommets at every corner | Portability: easily portable
Double-layered canvas is used on the top and bottom
What we don't like
Poles are not provided to tie the net
This is the perfect choice if you're looking for the best sturdy volleyball net that can be used in pools and other outside locations. This net is the strongest of all the nets since it is made of six-ply polyethylene mesh. At the top and bottom of the net, there is a double layer of canvas for better sturdiness.
High-quality nylon ropes are used at all four ends to fit the nets at the poles. 3mm knotless rip-resistant nylon netting is given to ensure its long-lasting use.
Moving on, to keep the net in top condition until the very last day, it makes use of a top cable with high strength and reinforced side tape. Because this net is available in a universal size (32 feet by 3 feet), it can also be used in different volleyball competitions.
One can add this net to their swimming pool volleyball set because the buckle and other components are corrosion-proof. Additionally, this net can be used in any climate and at any location, including a swimming pool, garden, or schoolyard.
To increase the durability of the multi-layered canvas, double stitching is also added to the net. Plus, customers of this brand receive a 60-day warranty on their nets. And the best part is that there won't be a sturdiness issue because the net isn't overly heavy.
On top of it, the net height can be changed to suit an individual's requirements. Additionally, a bag is offered to keep the net in.
Size: Universal size (32 feet by 3 feet) | Material: Polyethylene | Portability: used in schoolyard, backyard, and swimming pool
One of our top choices is the CYEELVES portable volleyball net which is known to last long. The high-quality polyester used to make these hefty volleyball nets have strong tensile resistance, ensuring that the net will always be stable.
Also, the fabrics used at the top and bottom of the netting are double-stitched for better resistance power. On top of it, the net is made of steel wire and PVC network wires, making it very sturdy. The borders of this net are completely made-up of canvas to enhance the look and quality of the net.
Furthermore, to add to its durability, metal buckles have been attached to each of the four corners. The dimensions of the net are 32 feet by 3 feet, with a 4-inch square mesh. And to maintain the shape of the net, side pockets are placed at the corners.
Another essential fact about this brand is its efficient customer service. If the customer is not satisfied with the product, they can ask for a refund within 45 days.
Moving on to the usage, Cyeelves volleyball nets can be used in any outdoor space, including schoolyards, gardens, backyards, swimming pools, and beaches.
In addition, one Cyeelves volleyball net and one high-quality volleyball net bag are included with the item. You can also play badminton with this net.
Size: Universal size (32 feet by 3 feet) | Material: PVC and steel | Portability: Can be used at any outdoor location
Durable Volleyball Net: Polyethylene,Made with high tenacity...
Regulation Size of The Pro Net: 32 ft Long x 3 ft High.4.7...
What we like
Good-quality polyester
Comes with five years of warranty
Steel wires and double sewing on canvas for better stability
Contains metal buckles
Best for beaches and swimming pools
What we don't like
Extremely light net
This net is made from high-quality polyethylene that offers exceptional tensile resistance. To make this net solid and powerful, steel wires are employed at the top and bottom.
So, it can be utilized for both training and leisurely sporting activities. The participants can also easily change the height to suit their individual needs.
Plus, the corner of the net has a metal grommet to secure it to the poles appropriately. The ropes attached to the grommet are made up of nylon to fix the net perfectly at the poles. And no matter if the location is indoors or outdoors, this net can be used everywhere.
Moving on to the measurement, this pack includes a regular-sized net (32 feet by 3 feet). Thick polyester is used to make the square mesh. This net also includes a portable backpack that will keep it secure.
That is not all; every canvas that is positioned at the border has been double-stitched. It can be used by persons of any age who want to enjoy playing volleyball.
Finally, the brand delivers excellent customer service. From the perspective of the customer, the five-year warranty that comes with the net is excellent.
Size: Universal size (32 feet by 3 feet) | Material: Polyester and metal | Portability: Used indoors and outdoors
Things To Remember While Buying Small Pool Volleyball Net
You can also look up DIY pool volleyball net ideas in case you want to make one at home. But before doing so, it is always recommended that you check some of the essential features of a pool volleyball net so as to ensure a great pool experience. We have discussed them right here to help you out.
1. Durability
You will want the pool volleyball net to last for a long time if you are going to add it to the pool toys in the house. For that, the mesh needs to be made of heavy-duty steel. Also, kids have a tendency to break things, and the net can easily get damaged if they are not made of durable materials.
Another thing to watch out for in the case of volleyball equipment is the warranty period. If the warranty period is longer than two years, you can rest assured that the net will be replaced if it does not prove to be durable. However, you can call up customer care to better understand the process.
2. Weather-Resistance
Your kids may come up with all sorts of ideas, and that could include playing in the rain. While they may love it, the net should also be able to bear all kinds of weather conditions.
3. Portability
Since this is a small net, it should be easy to move it around. Also, kids may want to take it on vacations to place it in pools in the hotels, so make a choice accordingly. If you are just getting it for the backyard pool and do not plan to move it around often, then a heavy net also works.
Small Pool Volleyball Net FAQs ?
How high should a pool volleyball net be?
It is best if the pool volleyball net is at least 2.5-3 feet high. This will ensure that kids and adults both can play in the pool. Also, this measurement is applicable for pools that have a depth of 3.5-4 feet. This gives a total height of seven feet once the net is in place.
However, if kids are going to play with it, it is best to keep the net a little lower for them to be able to throw the balls in the right way.
Top Small Pool Volleyball Net Verdict
Before you order a pool volleyball net, ensure that it comes with a user manual. This should make it easy for you to install the net in place. And check if you can secure it properly. If you face any problems while securing it, contact customer care immediately.
Since kids are going to play with it, you will need to secure it well. Moving on to our top choices, the W.F&STAUB Sports Professional Volleyball Net is our favorite because of its high quality.
On the other hand, the ATINUS Portable Net is an affordable option for those on a tight budget.
That’s all for today. Have fun in the pool!
Wondering how difficult it could be to find a patio table? Well, there are a lot of considerations one has to keep in mind.
Our understanding came when we were on the hunt to find that perfect table for our space. A lot of considerations found their way in as we surfed through thousands of reviews. There were details we never thought were vital until we actually began to use the products.
So to make life a little easier for our readers, here is a list of the ten best options for patio tables. We hope you find the one that fits your needs.
Listed below are the 5 best small patio tables with umbrella holes from our list:
PHI VILLA 32 in Cast Aluminum Patio Table. The PHI VILLA's table is a sturdy choice for both indoor and outdoor use, made of cast aluminum and showcasing weatherproof and rustproof properties, with a single shortfall being its non-foldability.
PHI VILLA 37" Outdoor Patio Table. This PHI VILLA patio table offers a large, 37-inch broad surface, ideal for accommodating multiple dishes. Despite being heavy and non-foldable, its bowed legs save space and it's easy to assemble.
LOKATSE HOME Patio Umbrella Side Table. The Lokatse Home table enhances aesthetics with its rhombic-shaped grid design, offering style, comfort, and rust resistance. One of its main pros is the large table space, while a slight con is the slightly complicated access to the table's bottom space.
VINGLI Outdoor Dining Table, 31.5" Round Patio. The Vingli Dining table stands out with its classy glass top and 5mm scratch-proof surface, which can hold up to 160 lbs. It is, however, slightly heavy, which may affect portability.
Giantex Patio Rattan Wicker Umbrella Side Table. The Giantex Patio table prioritizes the environment with its eco-friendly make from PE rattan material. It is lightweight and features a rust-free top and frame, but the assembly process can be a bit challenging.
Each table has been carefully selected based on its design, durability, size, and customer reviews. So, if you're ready to transform your outdoor space into a comfortable and shaded retreat, here's the list of the 6 best small patio tables with umbrella holes that will elevate your outdoor experience.
1. PHI VILLA 32 in Cast Aluminum Patio Table - Best for Weather Resistance
Are you looking for a patio table that you could use indoors as well as outdoors? This one was our go-to choice when we had the same requirements. Made of cast aluminum, this table was a very sturdy choice to make and was easily able to take ample weight.
We found PHI VILLA’s patio table to be an excellent choice for keeping outdoors as the surface is weatherproof and rustproof. There were instances when we had left the table outside in the rain for over two days, and at the end of it, the table was spotless with no sign of rust.
Additionally, this patio table is intricately designed, and we were delighted with the artistic expression that it exuded. The unique edged designs and minimalist legs made it a treat for the eyes. And on top of that, the tabletop looks rather lovely with its intricate carving and frosted surface.
In case you are planning to place the table inside, it would match beautifully with teak or dark-colored furniture. In an outdoor setting, you could match it with dark-colored grills or gates.
With a dimension of 32*32*29 inches, this table had enough space for a pile of books and a flower vase. It is also very sturdy, and we have used it as a leg rest too.
We thought this was a very sturdy option to select, but if you are looking at portability or moving and storing this table, it may be a problem as this table isn't foldable. This is one feature that we thought could have been added to the otherwise perfect patio table.
2. PHI VILLA 37" Outdoor Patio Table - Best Large Square Table
If you are looking for a metal square table, the Phi Villa patio table is a great choice to make. With an area of 37 inches, this table is broad and can be used to keep four dishes. We had a kid party at our place, and this table worked wonders as four kids could be seated at one table.
The simple and elegant feel of this table stole our hearts. Imagine sitting outdoors on a warm summer afternoon under an umbrella with this table holding a glass of juice and the book you are currently reading. This table exactly gave us that level of comfort.
The metal frame is e-coated and needs no special maintenance. It is rustproof and weather-resistant, too, which makes it a good option for outdoors. We especially loved the smooth metal finish and how it added an extra touch of perfection to our patio.
This table comes with bowed legs, which enables it to save space, and you could easily keep something underneath without any issues. Additionally, it was effortless to assemble, and we did it ourselves without any outside help.
Also, the umbrella hole is 1.57 inches, which fits almost every umbrella available in the market quite snugly.
This item exactly gave us what it promised, and we were completely satisfied. The only issue we found in this is the same as the issue we pointed out with the first model. The table is heavy and not foldable, thus making it difficult to store if needed.
What We Like
37 inches table area
Bowed legs save space
E-coated metal frame
Rust and weather-resistant
What We Don't Like
Not foldable
Material: Aluminum frame, Glass top | Shape: Square | Size: 37 x 37 x 28" | Weight Cap.: 150 lbs | Hole Size: 1.57"
3. LOKATSE HOME Patio Umbrella Side Table - Best Aesthetic Appeal
If you are looking for a table that will enhance the aesthetics of your patio, garden, or pool area, the Lokatse Home Patio table is an excellent choice to make. With a rhombic-shaped grid design, this table looks very different from the beginning three products and will surely leave your guests stunned.
We were looking for style and comfort together, and this gave a combination of both. With a sturdy steel frame, this product is rust-resistant. We placed it near our pool, and it often faces splashes of water when the kids come out of the pool. It has been months now, and we have not seen any rust on the product.
Additionally, it is large enough for four people to share the space. The hard surface is easily cleanable, and you do not need to be worried about occasional spills. Also marks left behind by mugs and plates can be wiped off easily and will not permanently stain the table.
Another feature we will talk about is the empty space below the table. There is a compartment between the grills that could be used to keep magazines in case you need to empty the table suddenly.
Since this table came with space below it, it could be used more efficiently if easy access was provided. A slit on top between the grills and the tabletop offers the only access currently, which is a bit of a hindrance to reach. Otherwise, we have no complaints about the product.
What We Like
Large table space
Rust-resistant
Stylish and has intricately designed grills
What We Don't Like
No easy access to the bottom space
Material: Steel frame, Glass top | Shape: Square | Size: 21.8 x 21.8 x 18.5" | Weight Cap.: 50 lbs | Hole Size: 1.57"
4. VINGLI Outdoor Dining Table, 31.5" Round Patio
If you want to add a classy touch to your patio, balcony, or backyard, the Vingli Dining table gives you the option of a patio table with a glass top. The glass makes the table look very attractive and adds to the minimal decor around it. Place chairs and add an umbrella, and you have the perfect sun-downer to enjoy.
Glass is always a preference when it comes to beautifying your backyard, and this is the reason why we chose the product. The glass used is tempered and 5 mm thick, which could easily hold up to 160 lbs, which is a lot. We had placed heavy casseroles on the tabletop without worrying about it breaking down.
Additionally, it has a tabletop space of 31.5 inches, which would suffice for four people comfortably. This table also comes with rubber gaskets below the table frame to prevent scratches.
To add to all these wonderful features, the glass table is designed to impress. We got this table before a party in our backyard, and we kept a white center mat on it with a flower vase. Tea and snacks could easily fit in with this setting, and our guests loved the look and feel of it.
We loved the glass surface and the extra touch it added to our decor, but we should tell you beforehand that the patio table is pretty heavy and not something you would want to move around often. If you're going to keep it in one place, then go for it without a second thought.
What We Like
5mm scratch-proof glass surface
31.5 inches of table space
Non-slip table legs
What We Don't Like
Relatively Heavy
Material: Steel frame, Glass top | Shape: Square | Size: 31.5 x 31.5 x 28.3" | Weight Cap.: 110 lbs | Hole Size: 1.8"
5. Giantex Patio Rattan Wicker Umbrella Side Table
If the environment concerns you a lot and you want to choose an eco-friendly product, the Giantex Patio Rattan Wicker Umbrella Side Table is something you can look at. Made with PE rattan material, this table will cater to all your needs without being a problem for the environment.
The best part about using rattan is that it is designed to be UV-resistant as well as water-resistant. We did not need to worry about it becoming brittle or coarse.
Also, white rattan is used for the sides, and this table comes with a steel frame and a metal tabletop. Here again, the metal is rust-free and provides a sturdy surface to place any kind of food and beverages.
Moving over to the table in general, unlike the previous model, this table is lightweight, and though one cannot fold it, it can easily be moved from place to place. Also, the square shape of the table enables four people to sit on four sides even though it has a smaller table space of 21.5 inches.
Coming to the umbrella hole is wide enough to hold any umbrella without the fear of it falling off or bending over.
It is a beautiful table to look at, but assembling it took us an ample amount of time. Though instructions are given, it is a little bit of a complicated process, and it would be great if you could get a professional to help. Once the setup is complete, you need not worry about anything else.
What We Like
Use of eco-friendly material
Lightweight
Rust-free metal top and frame
What We Don't Like
Difficult to assemble
Material: Steel frame, PE rattan wicker | Shape: Square | Size: 22 x 22 x 18.5" | Weight Cap.: 110 lbs | Hole Size: 1.6"
6. Flash Furniture 35.25" Round White Indoor-Outdoor Steel Patio Table
If you are looking to brighten up your patio space, this is the product to go with. The Flash Furniture 35.25" Round White Indoor-Outdoor Steel Patio Table has a very quaint look to it and comes with a rainflower printed top, which makes it all the more alluring.
If a patio table to keep outside your cafe or restaurant is on your mind, this pretty product will impress you. It is versatile and can be used to beautify any place you keep it.
Made with steel, you do not have to worry about the table breaking or catching rust as it is rust-resistant. We would still recommend you not to leave it outside during the rainy season to be on the safer side.
Moreover, if you are not looking to spend a lot on a table, this is a budget option to make. The price is comparatively lower than most of the products listed here, whereas it is one of the prettiest out of all of them.
To add to the features, the umbrella hole is wide enough to hold any type of umbrella, and the table is sturdy enough to not fall from the weight.
Though the product itself was satisfying, we faced a little issue with one of the legs. It would not touch the ground, and we had to place a 1-inch wooden block below to adjust it. We could have asked for a replacement, but we did not want to go through the lengthy process of waiting for a new one.
What is the Best Small Patio Table with an Umbrella Hole?
The table below provides a comparison of the Small Patio Table with Umbrella Hole specification, focusing on key attributes such as material, shape, size, weight capacity, and hole size.
Buying Guide For The Best Small Patio Tables With Umbrella Hole
Now that you are well aware of the different types of patio tables available take the next step and read through the guide where we have listed down the details which you should note down before proceeding. It may seem like an easy task, but buying the wrong table could cause a lot of problems later on.
Sizing
Measure the amount of space you have on your patio or balcony. You need to have an estimation of the empty space available before you decide on a product. This is crucial because if you buy one too big, then it would overpower the area and would become a hindrance for people to move around it. A smaller table will clearly not serve the purpose.
One rule we recommend living by is to allow 18 to 24 inches per place setting and 6 to 12 inches between the settings if you are buying more than one table. Also, remember to consider the amount of space needed by the chairs you will want to place around the table. Only considering the size of the table may be risky.
Usage
It is crucial to decide why you need a patio table. Determining the usage will help you determine the type of table you need. If you want a table to keep a lot of things or if you are looking at organizing dinners outdoors, you should opt for a table with a larger space. If aesthetics is on your mind, a glass table or a white one would add an extra touch to your area. A smaller table will be perfect for those who want one for personal use or those who mostly work from home and want a cozy corner outdoors.
Look and feel
Tables are available in many kinds of materials beginning from glass, and metal to resin. It is also essential to see the surroundings and make a decision based on what will match best. If your patio has white furniture, go for a white table to complement it, a black metal one will look like a misfit.
If you are into dark furniture, go with a darker shade of a light-colored table with dark-colored chairs. Mix and match with colors and opt for one that fits right in.
Safety
If you have kids or pets in the house, it is best not to go for a glass table as there are chances of it breaking or cracking. Also, do not opt for a table with sharp edges as kids might get hurt. A circular metal or resin product might be an excellent option to consider.
Can I use any umbrella with a small patio table with an umbrella hole?
Small patio tables with umbrella holes are designed to accommodate standard-sized patio umbrellas. Most tables feature a hole with a diameter that fits common umbrella sizes. However, it is still essential to check the dimensions of the umbrella hole and compare them to the size of your umbrella before making a purchase. Ensure that the umbrella pole fits securely in the hole to provide stability and support.
What materials are small patio tables with umbrella holes made of?
Small patio tables with umbrella holes are available in various materials, each offering its own set of advantages. Common materials include aluminum, steel, wood, wicker, and plastic. Aluminum and steel tables are durable and weather-resistant, while wood tables offer a natural aesthetic. Wicker tables provide a classic and stylish look, while plastic tables are lightweight and easy to clean. Choose a material that suits your preferences, desired level of maintenance, and the overall style of your outdoor space.
Can I use a small patio table with an umbrella hole indoors?
Small patio tables with umbrella holes are specifically designed for outdoor use. While you can use them indoors if you prefer, they are typically designed with weather-resistant materials that may not be ideal for indoor settings. Consider the design, style, and functionality of the table to ensure it complements your indoor space if you choose to use it indoors.
How do I choose the right size of small patio table with an umbrella hole?
When choosing the right size of a small patio table with an umbrella hole, consider the available space on your patio or outdoor area. Measure the area where you plan to place the table and ensure that there is enough room for both the table and the open umbrella. Additionally, consider the number of people you expect to accommodate and their seating requirements. Opt for a table size that allows comfortable seating and movement around the table when the umbrella is in place.
It is a tough choice to make as all of these products have their own sets of pros and cons. But overall, the Giantex Patio Rattan Wicker Umbrella Side Tableis our choice if you are looking for an eco-friendly product. Thinking about the environment is a significant thing to do today, and even for patio tables, we have an eco-friendly item listed.
Finally, we have come to the end of this guide. By now, you have a fair idea as to how to go about choosing and buying a patio table. We recommend you to look at the prices too before you decide as the price varies a lot from product to product.
That being our last suggestion, it is time to hit the shopping website and make a purchase. We hope you select something which fits all your needs.
Living in a small house is a growing rage among people from all walks of life, quite a few countries are having a big love affair with cabins.
The cabin lifestyle used to be a symbol of the quiet and secluded areas but these days owning a cabin has become an aspirational goal for those looking to reconnect with nature and wanting to lead a minimalist life as cabins are also a cheaper alternative to the traditional houses, and it's a good option for travelers, and students living on a tight budget.
Whatever the reason, cabin kits are being made at record speed, as the demand keeps escalating rapidly. When you’re moving to a tiny house, you have to focus on your priorities as it will help you to set realistic goals, you should weight out the different pros and cons to avoid any unpleasant surprises down the road.
We often hoard things because we have more than sufficient space and storage. But, when you lack that luxury, then the focus is only on the essentials. And that can be very rewarding.
Now that you're sold on the idea of cabins, let's check out our top choices for cabin kits.
When you start living in a cabin, it doesn’t mean that you’re giving a farewell to the conveniences that the city life brings to you. In this tiny home, you’ll get a drool-worthy kitchen, a bedroom, bathroom, washer/dryer, living area, and a loft that can be used as an additional sleeping space.
There is a covered porch for the outdoor space, and the panoramic windows in this cabin will make you fall in love with nature once again. It has been built to withstand some extreme weather conditions, from snowstorms to heatwaves.
If you are looking out to purchase a tiny cabin in Maryland, then you can check out the different models by Hobbitat. This tiny home builder usually constructs its cabin with reclaimed wood, and they conform to the state’s building codes. There are various models which can be used year-round without any damage during the adverse weather conditions it starts with a price range of $85,000.
These hobbit styled cabins are small, cozy, energy-efficient and eco-friendly homes. It comes with a unique personality as they have been incorporated with repurposed and reclaimed shingles, rafters, doors, and windows. This building company uses affordable construction material, which is recycled compounds, and they create some thoughtfully-designed cabins.
This one-room cabin has an open floor plan, with high ceilings, a porch, and a small loft. You can build this house to use it for full-time living, a children’s playhouse, or a guesthouse. All the cabin kits by Jamaica Cottage Shop are available in various stages of the construction process, which includes just the DIY kit, the frames, and a fully assembled home.
The assembly of this cabin kit is pretty simple as each piece of lumber is color-coded and numbered. You don’t need any particular building experience to set-up this cabin. It does come with roofing material, but you have to get the insulation and wiring work done separately.
If you’re sticking to a particular budget, then Arched Cabins has the right prefab tiny houses for you. These cabins can be built very quickly by just two people with little or no experience about constructing small dwellings.
It comes in a variety of sizes but, if you want to consider full-time living, then these cabins have space for a bathroom and kitchen on an area ranging from 130 to 1200 square feet. You don't have the option to build these cabins on wheels, so we advise you to either make your foundation or get a concrete block. It also doesn’t offer you with electricity and plumbing upgrades.
For a 20-inch cabin, it will cost around $5,200, which includes all the material that are required to complete the exteriors of this tiny house.
5. Artisan Tiny House- Curved House Kit
This is a unique tiny house which is set on wheels. It gives a gypsy vibe that is preferred by a small community of people. It has a retro look that is made by Artisan Tiny House. You also get the option to customize the design, and there are various sizes of cabins available that come with or without a loft.
Even though the curved roof is a unique feature of this cabin, but this model does not have a simple assembly process. This building company has Structural Insulated Panels (SIPs) in their cabin kits, which are an affordable, eco-friendly, and lightweight alternative to other frame materials. It comes with proper insulation, but you can upgrade to a thicker one if that makes your home more comfortable.
If you have specific tiny house requirements, then the services provided by Shelter-Kit will be perfect for you. Each kit can be customized according to your specifications, and you can design it for a 1-story, 1 ½ - story, or a 2-story home. This company claims that you don’t need any power tools to assemble this model, which is an added advantage.
The size options at Shelter-Kit for a cabin usually starts at 875 square feet. But you can customize it according to your preferences, and you can even add more rooms to your home later. Several possible upgrades or additions are available so you can live in the house of your dreams economically.
You’ll find that most of the companies usually offer cabin kits with a standard design, but with Tiny Heirloom, you have the option to select from different models. The price tag differs according to the size of the cabin; for instance, the basic 18 feet cabin on wheels will cost you around $18,000. There are several blueprint options to choose from, such as a loft, a trailer, and roofing.
Tiny Heirloom also gives you an option to select a simple and affordable exterior package which includes door, windows, and a stained or primed siding. This DIY frame is known to be one of the most reasonable cabin kits which are available in the market today.
This is a 144-square-foot model with a price tag of $4,999. It has an easy assembly, and you’ll take about a day to build this tiny house. Each of the parts in this cabin kit has been cut with precision, and it’s made with durable MDF which is not just waterproof but also termite and rust-resistant.
You can snap all the pieces together due to its patented interlocking system, which makes the assembly process completely tool-free. But, you have to ensure that you place this cabin on a solid foundation that needs to be built separately. You can get paintable waterproof roofing and an extension kit if you want to enlarge the cabin separately.
You have the option to buy a cabin kit from your local hardware store if you live somewhere around 84 Lumber. This retailer focuses on home improvement and has recently launched a series of cabins on wheels, which you can either buy move-in ready or build yourself.
There are four models with size ranging from 153 - 205 square feet, and for the move-in ready homes, the prices start about $50,000. If you’re sticking to a particular budget, then there is the ‘semi-DIY package’ and ‘build your own package’ starting at $6,884. These packages have different services, but you’ll get a trailer for towing, technical support, and building plans for both.
10. Allwood Kit- Cabin Lillevilla Escape
This is a simple tiny house and the best deal that you can get under $5,000. It’s around 113 square feet, and the kit does not have insulation, wiring, or a bathroom included. This set consists of pre-cut wooden planks which will take you around 3-4 days to assemble. You also need to sand and stain the woods before nailing the planks together.
There is no compromise made on the quality of the wood craftsmanship that is being delivered. You can use this cabin either for full-time living or as a guest house. If you want to add wall insulation, then you can do it separately. But, for this tiny space, sub-flooring and thermals panels are enough when it’s placed between the roofing material and ceiling boards.
Tiny Innovations has made some stunning smartly-designed homes for couples, individuals, and families alike. You can customize the design of these homes according to your preferences. There are also different sizes available for these tiny houses so you can select the one which suits your needs. The companies website also gives you the option for a virtual walkthrough of the available models.
There is a team of excellent engineers and designers who can support you to build the home of your dreams within a small budget. You can maximize the small space efficiently if you have a great plan that can be implemented. This home will add fuel to your wanderlust, and it ensures sustainable living. Your house by Tiny Innovations will be a standout for its exceptional design.
This prefabricated cabin has a flair for the wilderness, and it is perfect when you’re looking for a getaway from the busy urban life. It occupies a space of 230 square feet and looks best in the woods where most of the homes look much above the ordinary. In addition to recreational use, you can also use this as a living space by customizing the interiors.
There are two windows, and a front door which offers proper ventilation and lighting to this small house. You’ll not face any problem with erosion even during the monsoons as the roof of this house is made of metal. The home also comes with a small front porch which is covered with wooden railings that offers wind and animal protection.
The extended roof helps to protect from rain and the scorching sun. You can also adjust the space inside the house to accommodate a kitchen comfortably.
13. Allwood Sunray
This cabin is adequately ventilated and well-lit you can use it either as residential or recreational space. It offers around 200 square feet of living space, which preserves the goodness of living in a tiny house and gives you a comfortable living experience. If you’re living in the countryside, then the design of this house will blend in perfectly with the surroundings.
It has a tilted roofing and a light brown wood finish on the exteriors. The house has a long porch with wide windows and doors, which gives this home a post-colonial vibe. Moving inside, you have enough space for a kitchen, living room, and a bedroom. The interior is divided into two areas, so you have the freedom to design the space according to your needs.
You also have the option to add flower boxes, and window shutter with extra windows. The hardware material comes along with this package, but you might need to get the insulation done separately if you live in a cold area. The house will take about 2-3 days to assemble, and the kit includes everything that you’ll require to build this house.
14. Allwood Solvalla
This tiny house has a unique design with an extended front porch area and a straight roof. The modern architecture and great design make this house perfect to be built in an urban area. It covers a total area of 172 square feet while the interiors are about 86 square feet. The flooring and house walls are made of Nordic Spruce, which has high resistance to extreme weather conditions.
At the front of the house, you have six windows and a patio that is covered by an overwhelming roof of this tiny house. You can dedicate a small space in the house for a bathroom, while the kitchen is placed outside just next to a side window. The kit consists of all the materials that will be required to build the house, from flooring to walls to roof.
If you can decipher the instructions correctly, then you will not face any challenge to set up the house. For insulation purposes, you can use either styrofoam or spray foam, as it’s not included in the package.
15. Allwood Sommerby
This is a beautiful and decent size tiny house which covers around 174 square feet, and it’s suitable for a simple garden house. There is an extended roof that covers the wide patio, where you can place a small tea table and a few chairs. It is made of high-quality Nordic Spruce wood and wall planks that have WindBlock feature that protect against strong winds.
Moving inside, there is a spacious living room with windows on both sides of the house, and there is enough space to place a big couch. You can also add other furnishings to this house, while the kitchen is bigger than the other cabin kits. This house can be built as a recreational, office, or living space.
This is an affordable and thoughtfully designed home which reflects cabin life at its best. It is a compact and rustic model that can be used as a perfect hideaway beside the lake or the mountains. It has an adorable front porch where you can either hang a swing or place a small breakfast table.
SLIED1103
There is an open living room with a beautiful fireplace, windows along three walls, and set of french doors that you can open to the screened back porch. The dining room is the warmest and most cozy place for you to rest at the end of the day while having your meal or reading a book. There is a rear bedroom along with a full bath, and you also have a second bedroom upstairs with a private bathroom.
In this 973 square feet house, you’ll get everything that you wanted in your vacation home. It’s perfect for a family of 3-4 members.
This modular cabin by WheelHaus is around 400 square feet, and it’s built on a trailer with a base price of $ 89,500. You can use this cabin as a recreational vehicle that can be placed anywhere in mobile homes and RV’s are allowed. The best feature of this cabin is it’s exterior which is made of large trapezoidal windows, impressively tall ceilings, and has a reclaimed snow fencing.
Most of the customers usually appreciate the design of the washroom as it comes with floor-to-ceiling tiles and European-style glass shower. This cabin is also wired for the internet, and it’s spacious enough for around 3-4 members. In this model, you’ll be getting an unmatched opportunity for relaxation and entertainment with a sliding glass entryway and a fully covered entry deck.
MUJI is a premier Japanese company who is known for manufacturing affordable and simple products ranging from clothing to furniture. This global retailer has delved into the small cabin business. The first model made by them is the MUJI Hut, which is a little less than a 100-square-feet and has stunning wood paneling that covers floor-to-ceiling.
The base price of this product is $28,000, and you can keep it near the ocean, the mountains, or even in your garden, and it will blend perfectly with its surroundings. The simple design of this model makes everything relatively easier, while the raft foundation helps to guard the flooring against the ground moisture.
This cabin is perfect for around 3-4 people to relax comfortably as the high shed roof, and the front porch makes the cabin quite spacious.
19. Lakeview Log Cabin
There are plenty of available lakefront cabins, but not every model has enough space like this one. You can invite friends your over for a small get together as there is enough room for around 3-4 people. It’s a 200-square-foot cabin with large windows and doors that will provide you with sufficient lighting during the day. This model is made of Nordic spruce that is known for its high resistance to extreme weather conditions.
It will take you around 30-40 hours to assemble this entire product with just a few standard tools. You need to purchase the roofing shingles separately as it will help to protect your home and make the roofing more sturdy. This is a perfect one-bedroom home, and its energy-efficient design makes it stand out from the rest.
Final Words
Many people have been showing interest in adopting a simple lifestyle, and that’s a great initiative for a better future.
The DIY tiny house kits are efficient, cost-effective, and environmentally friendly, which makes it an excellent investment for you. With some extensive research, you’ll be able to select a perfect kit that fits into your budget and lifestyle needs.
Get your Halloween spirits ready and start practicing how to draw a skull. Let's get freaky and test your drawing skills with the different skull drawing ideas.
Today, we've listed 45 different skull drawing ideas for you! Even beginner artists will be able to follow along!
What are you waiting for? Get your pen and paper ready, and let's start this spooky journey.
45 Skull Drawing Ideas You Should Try
There are many different creative ways to draw a skull. It's a fun project to do with kids, regardless of the season.
We've listed some reference materials you can use to teach your kids to learn how to draw a skull.
If you're tired of drawing the front view, why not attempt to draw the sides? Explore the different sides of the skull and draw it from a different angle!
Doing this can test your skills and your familiarity with the skull.
One of the quintessential decorations for Halloween is a skull and cobweb. The two always come hand in hand, which makes them a good idea to draw together.
This easy skull drawing is perfect for everyone, regardless of age. Grab your ink pen and paper, and start drawing.
Challenge your creativity and draw a melting skull. This is challenging because you have to learn how to make curved lines.
The skull should look like it's dripping. Don't worry because you don't have to perfect this on your first try. Just make sure you've got your eraser ready for when you need to do some cleanup.
The Terminator is one of the most epic movie franchises we've seen. A great way for an artist to show worship for this movie is to draw a robot-inspired skull.
It's a unique and clever idea that we're sure many fans will pick up on.
A skull with a crown top sounds like something straight out of a fantasy novel. Explore this genre and find different ways to make your king skull the center of attention.
You can be as eccentric as you want with the crown!
If you've seen the movie Scream, you know how creepy the long-faced skull looks. It's so easy to draw, a beginner artist can get it on their first try!
Pay homage to this timeless movie and start drawing.
If you're a professional artist, drawing a skull could be as easy as reading. Put your skills to the test and draw a skull on top of another one — or on top of a pile of bones.
There are different elements to it that you need to master.
Some people would prefer looking at skeletons to clowns given a chance to answer. There's something about clowns that sometimes gives you the complete opposite of funny.
Combine the two, and you've probably drawn someone's nightmares.
Children are always so intrigued with dinosaurs, and they can only hope to see one in real life. The closest to the real thing they'll ever see is its skeletons preserved in museums.
Teach your children how to draw a dinosaur skull with the help of tutorials! It's a great way for them to learn about this prehistoric creature.
Deers look cute, but we can't say the same when looking at them as a skull. Its looks are enough to even creep us out.
This easy skull drawing is perfect because of its symmetry. But if you want to level up your skills, you can try different ways to transform this easy skull drawing.
In keeping with the Halloween spirit, consider drawing a bird's head. It's a simple drawing that can spook children during the season.
What Types of Pencils Can You Use When Drawing Skulls?
There's a variety of pencils out there you can use to create drawings and sketches.
Gone are the days when we could rely on just any pencil, and even some of the best mechanical pencils out there.
What should you use for your skull drawing ideas? Keep reading to find out about this list.
Graphite Pencils
A graphite pencil is good all-around, and perfect for drawing, sketching, and writing.
The lead is usually embraced by a wood material, something we gnawed on during our toddler years.
They're easy to use, and you only have to sharpen them to keep the lead nice and pointy. Make sure to pair it with a good eraser when you want a clean slate on your page.
Solid Graphite Pencils
If you're serious about drawing and sketching, you need to grab yourself a solid graphite.
This type of pencil is made specifically for the artist who loves drawing. You can enhance your drawing skills with this one, and beginners can master their craft.
Liquid Graphite Pencils
Think of a liquid graphite pencil as your regular pencil, but you have to use liquid instead. Using liquid graphite is one of the coolest ways to feed your creative obsession.
Using it can get tricky, but you'll see amazing results once you get the hang of it.
You have to act fast when you use liquid graphite because once it dries, you can no longer erase it.
Charcoal Pencils
The beauty of using a charcoal pencil is you can add a lot of style and depth to your creations. They're perfect for creating smudging effects that make your art come to life.
There are also a lot of tricks you can do with it. Even beginner artists will have a lot of fun testing them out.
Carbon Pencils
Besides drawing and sketching, this pencil is perfect for shading, smudging, and blending.
It's perfect for all artists, regardless of their drawing ability. We highly recommend watching a tutorial to help you make the most of it.
Skull Drawing Ideas
We often get a lot of questions about drawing and drawing ideas. We’ve answered some of them here, which we’re sure you’ll find useful:
How Much Practice Do I Need to Master the Art of Drawing?
There’s a saying that goes, “practice makes perfect,” which is fitting for mastering drawing.
It will help if you keep practicing your drawing skills until you’ve finally become comfortable with your work.
Don’t feel pressured to perfect your drawing on your first try. With more practice, the better your skill will be compared to when you first started.
Practicing a few hours daily is the best way to sharpen your skills.
Can I Use Drawing Tablets to Practice Drawing?
Many children and adults today prefer using a drawing tablet because it’s a lot more convenient to use. Regardless of your budget, there’s a drawing tablet for you.
The iPad is the best drawing device to get your creative juices flowing. It’s compatible with some of the best drawing applications in the AppStore you need to check out now!
Once you’re done with your art, you can post it immediately online and share it with your friends on Instagram or even Facebook!
What Other Drawing Ideas Can I Draw Besides the Skull?
In keeping with the Halloween spirit, level your skill and learn how to draw a skeleton hand. We're not going to lie, getting the intricacies down might be challenging at first.
Later on, you can piece this together with your skull drawings to make a complete skeleton.
You can watch a tutorial on how to draw a spooky boney hand that can take you through the whole process!
But the more your skills progress, the more demanding the task becomes. You become more particular with getting all the intricacies in the right place.
Make sure to check out tips and step-by-step guides on how to draw hair.
Another awesome spooky Halloween drawing idea is a ghost. They're easy to draw, and you can make them look cute.
Beginner artists will be able to draw this one easily and will hardly need a step-by-step guide.
Skull Drawing Ideas Conclusion
Are you ready to test out your skills? With all the different skull drawing ideas we've named in this list, you're all set for your creative journey.
You can also check out other drawing ideas that can inspire you. Just practice until you finally perfect your craft!
We hope you've found your favorite skull drawing idea from this list.
If you have been searching for a miter saw, then you might have come across different variants.
Due to the sheer number of choices, most beginners have difficulty choosing the correct power tools. The first hurdle is usually the name of these variants.
Moreover, even professionals are sometimes confused about which miter saw would add value to their workshops. Also, the differences might be hard to understand for someone who isn't used to the jargon related to power tools.
Hence, to make things a bit easier, we have come up with this guide about the two common miter saws available on the market. We’re sure it will come in handy to compare the variations and help you get a clear idea.
So, without further delay, let's learn about the saws!
Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw
Rather than immediately jumping into the comparison, let's take some time to understand the bevel miter saw. As a woodworker, you will need to understand the basic principles to make your choice easier.
What Is A Bevel?
The word “bevel” in woodworking stands for a sloping cut made into wood. In this cut, the blade goes through the thickness of the wood plank. It's usually done at a 45-degree angle, but it can differ according to the model of the saw.
This cut is usually needed to create small pieces. Also, bevel cuts are significant for creating aesthetic-looking pieces, like a doorstop. Moreover, this is also important to smooth the edges to prevent injuries.
However, other than this style of cut, the word “bevel” also represents mobility in a miter saw. A single bevel miter saw can cut the wood in only one direction. In comparison, the double bevel miter saw can cut the plank in both directions.
Other Cuts That Miter Saws Can Make
Rather than just creating bevels, miter saws are great for creating different types of angled cuts. The most common cut made with a miter saw is usually the cross-cut, where a plank is divided with a 90 degrees cut.
Also, the miter saw enables you to create the “miter” cut. This is an angled cut usually at 45 degrees, but the angle stopper can help change it. In this case, the blade goes through the width of the plank to divide the pieces.
Here, we would like to add that the only major cut that the miter saw cannot perform is the rip cut. The cut is made along the length of a plank in it, so it can't be done with a miter saw.
Now, it's time to learn about each saw variant individually. The single bevel miter saw is a must-have power tool suggested for all beginner woodworkers. It helps you to get the most aesthetically pleasing angled cuts without needing to do much.
If we start from the basics, it is one of the most inexpensive bevel miter saws found on the market. Yes, this statement may change according to the model, but still, it's a reasonably priced item.
Even though other saws, such as the table saw, may help you perform rip cuts and cross-cuts, they aren't meant to create angled cuts. A single bevel miter saw helps to cut the wood both by its width and thickness.
The "single" in this saw stand for its limited ability to move in only one direction. Hence, you would need to flip the wood plank to get an angular cut in the opposite direction.
How Does A Single Bevel Miter Saw Work?
We wouldn't go in-depth about how the saw works. But, we will give you a preliminary understanding of how this fabulous tool makes your job easier.
The usual single-bevel miter saw looks like any other standard miter saw. There is a handle on the top of this machine that allows you to maneuver it during cutting.
Like all other power tools, it derives power either from electricity or batteries. So, when you are ready to cut the plank, grab the handle and push the trigger. This would get the blade whirling, bringing it down at a 90 degrees angle to create a cross-cut.
However, the same saw creates angled cuts if you push the handle towards its bevel or miter movement. You can decide on the angles from the angle stopper.
Want a bit more insight? Check out the different parts shared by both miter saws.
Seldom would you be able to make a difference between the single or the double bevel miter saw at first glance? A slight variation is seen in the size, as the double bevel miter can be a bit heavier.
When it comes to the main divergence, it is in the ability to "pivot." You can move the double, or dual bevel miter saw in both directions compared to the singular models.
The single versions usually move in the left direction, whereas the double can move towards both the left and right. This provides you with the advantage of producing bevel cuts in both directions without rotating the plank.
Professional woodworkers often find turning the plank tedious, especially during a deadline. Hence, a double bevel miter does help to ease the process. However, there is no job that it can do that can't be done with a single variant.
How Does A Double Bevel Miter Saw Work?
When it comes to utilizing a double bevel miter saw, it's just like the single variant. The only difference lies in leading the handle in the right direction. With this saw, you can make the bevel cuts without rotating the plank.
All that is required is to place the plank on the working area and bring down the blade at the desired angle. As you go to work without further rotation, keep the kerf in mind while dividing the plank.
The word "kerf" stands for the amount of wood that is turned into sawdust. It usually depends on the thickness of the blade.
Moreover, the moveable handle of miter saws usually has a mechanism to lock it in place. Always remember to read the user manual for a particular saw before you start to use it.
Common Parts Of Bevel Miter Saws
Even though we are comparing the two saws, they are actually quite similar to each other. Except for the pivoting capacity present in the double-bevel miter saw, equal parts and mechanisms are present in both variants. Hence, let us have a look at the standard features that make up these helpful power tools.
Sharp Blade
One of the foremost things to check in a miter saw is the blade. In both single and double saws, the typical blade size is around 10-12 inches. However, 8-inch blades are also available.
The blade size determines the capacity of a saw. So, a bigger blade will be able to cut through a bigger plank. Before getting a miter saw, make sure to check the width of any commonly used plank.
Another essential feature of the blade is the teeth. If it has more of them, you will probably end up getting a smoother and faster cut. However, some newer models also come with blades with wide apart teeth that are used to cut with woodgrain.
Powerful Motor
The saw gets its power through the motor, so it should have enough juice for you to cut the wood smoothly. A staggering or slow motor may give uneven cuts which look bad.
Most miter saw motors fall within the range of 15 amps, which is enough power to make accurate cuts. Another determinant of good saws is the rotation speed. This is usually stated through a number like 5,000 RPM. More rotations ensure a faster speed of cutting.
In general, the speed of miter saws is around 3,000 to 3,800 RPM. A higher speed availability also provides the option to use the miter saw for materials other than wood.
Sturdy Table And Miter Scale
As a power tool, the miter saw strives to provide you with precision. Even though you can move miter saws around, it's best to place them on a stable elevated surface. Moreover, the saw comes attached to a surface or table that allows proper steering of the machine.
This table might be a tad larger in the case of double bevel miter saws, as it requires more space to cut the plank. Also, the scale to properly align the plank is usually on the table. There is also an angle stop selector that allows the options for cutting the plank.
Handle And Trigger
To cut a wood plank, you will need to lower the blade by operating the handle present on this miter saw. This also contains the trigger that gets the blade moving. Also, the handle usually has gripping to make holding it easier.
You will need to push the trigger and then carefully lower the handle to cut the plank. In miter saws, locks are also present to help you create different types of cuts.
The handle also allows you to cut at an angle. While the movement is restricted to one side in single-bevel miter saws, the dual models let you maneuver it in both directions. Moreover, in sliding miter saws, the handle allows you to bring forth the blade and then cut from back to front.
Safety Features
Safety is a crucial aspect of all power tools, and it isn't different in miter saws. Several layers of safety are added to these saws, including a blade guard, handle locks, trigger, and brakes.
There is a plastic guard placed in front of the blade. When you push down the handle, this guard rises to expose the blade to proceed with the cut. Moreover, this ensures that your hand and fingers remain safe while the blade is in motion.
Additionally, the trigger is added to provide more control to the user. Earlier saws used to come with on and off switches, but those were quite hard to control. The presence of a trigger lets you start and stop the blade as per your liking. Also, this allows for making delicate cuts on wood.
Most miter saws also come with emergency brakes to stop in a few seconds if there is a need. Even though this might not be available in each miter saw, we suggest you get one with it.
Advantages Of A Single Bevel Miter Saw
When choosing a suitable power tool, it's vital to look at the plus points. So, let's have a look at the best aspects of single-bevel miter saws.
Lightweight And Compact
Even though we wouldn't call a single bevel miter saw the most portable power saw, it's still better than other options. Most models have a compact body that allows you to transfer it from one place to another.
Moreover, this tool does take up little to no space in your workshop. You can easily keep it in a corner without paying much heed to it. Also, some contractors even like to carry it on their outdoor jobs.
Simple To Use
Beginner woodworkers often fret about working with saws. Yes, you will still need to take accurate measurements, but using the single bevel miter saw is much simpler.
Understanding how the saw works takes only a few minutes, and after that, you are good to go. Seldom do these variants have an elaborate mechanism, as it doesn't require anything fancy.
However, the simplicity of this machine makes it the perfect initiation tool for DIY enthusiasts and beginners. Unlike other power saws that may have several steps, operating the single bevel miter saw is relatively simple. Also, a lot of information is available on the internet to help you use the tool in an effective way.
Versatility
Don't think that you are going to get anything less with this power saw. It's able to do almost everything that the other miter saws are also meant to do. You may need a bit more time to get used to rotating the wooden planks, but learning to use the machine is easy.
Moreover, this power saw is perfect for those looking for a reasonably versatile tool as a beginner. Even many professionals swear by using single-bevel miter saws because of their uncomplicated nature.
Affordability
Let's be honest; no one wants to go broke after buying their first power tool. Hence, this variant of miter saws is suitable for taking baby steps towards growing in woodworking. It may not give you the fastest operation, but affordability makes up the gap.
Moreover, it's also an excellent option for those woodworking enthusiasts who are infrequent with their projects. Hence, you don't really need to spend a lot on a fancy power saw if you are going to use it once a month.
Disadvantages Of A Single Bevel Miter Saw
As a fairly basic power saw, the single bevel miter saw does have some drawbacks. Here are some of them to help you choose the right saw for your work.
Takes Up More Time
With the single bevel, miter saw, you can cut angles in only one direction. Hence, you will need to reload the plank into the machine to produce a cut in the opposite direction. This will take away some of the precious time you might have spent finishing the project.
Even though this might not seem like a big deal for a beginner, it's indeed a pain point for professionals. However, people who have been using these saws for a long time will have picked up some ways to speed up the process.
Lesser Uniformity
One of the most vital points in favor of double-bevel miter saws is uniformity. Because of the need to constantly flip the plank, some amount of uniformity is lost in the process. Unlike the advanced variant, you aren't able to perform the cuts in one go.
Moreover, you will need to practice a lot before you get to a professional level of accuracy. On the brighter side, it can be a good opportunity for beginners to learn the skills of doing the most with a simple tool.
Not Great For Fancy Cuts
There will be times when you need to add aesthetic cuts to make a project look better. This is primarily done with the help of different trims. However, the reduced capability of this variant will be a hindrance to creating those.
We have seen that cutting and installing crown molding is time-consuming and inconvenient while using a single bevel miter saw. Also, making matching cuts takes a lot of patience with this tool.
Unsuitable For Long Planks
Do you plan on working with long wood planks? Then, you may want to skip on getting a single bevel miter saw as it isn't equipped to work with very long pieces.
Moreover, long pieces require a lot of table space which is missing in these saws. Always make sure to check the specifications of a power saw before placing it to avoid incompatibilities.
Single Bevel Miter Saw: Pros
Versatility
Easy to operate
Lightweight and portable
Good for beginners
Affordable
Single Bevel Miter Saw: Cons
Time-consuming
Need to flip the piece
Incompatible with long planks
Less uniform
Advantages Of A Double Bevel Miter Saw
If you are a professional looking forward to investing in a brand-new power saw, these points will help you understand if the double bevel miter saw is the correct choice. So, let's have a look at its advantages.
Work Faster
The foremost feature that stands out in the case of a double-bevel miter saw is its ability to work faster. There is no need to flip the plank to get the proper cuts. So, professionals who need to finish multiple projects at a time will find it extremely helpful.
All one needs to do is pivot the angle in the right direction to get a better cut. This helps in reducing the time necessary to finish a single project. Moreover, it's great for professional workshops where multiple tools are required.
Enhanced Precision And Accuracy
As there is no need to flip the work, this saw invariably produces much cleaner and uniform cuts. The handle can pivot towards either left or right depending on the cut being made.
Apart from speeding up the whole process, this high precision and accuracy also let you work with smaller details. This is why many professionals go for a double bevel miter saw as they progress in their careers.
If you are looking forward to setting up a woodworking workshop, especially in home improvement, then this is an item you must include.
No Need For Flipping
Even though flipping wood planks may seem like a common thing, the extra chore can often be bothersome. Other than adding boredom to work, flipping can actually mess up calculations. Hence, if you don't like spending an eternity on one project, a double-bevel miter saw might be your best choice.
Lets You Work In Small Or Large Projects
The greater size of the double bevel miter saw allows you to include larger wood planks compared to the other variant. Moreover, the ability to pivot the handle in both directions lets you work with larger pieces.
This doesn't mean that you cannot work with small pieces. Besides, this is actually the perfect tool for intricate woodwork like handcrafted trims.
Adds Professional Versatility
This point is especially for those woodworkers who want to take their projects to the next level. Along with making the work easier, a double-bevel miter saw can also help you learn new skills.
These often include the latest features to make the power saws useful for regular use of the machines. As the popularity of handmade items rises, having your double bevel miter saw lets you pick up the fancier cuts.
Moreover, these saws may also come with combination blades that enable you to cut materials other than wood. Also, the added benefit of compound cuts and laser guides is available in the latest models.
Disadvantages Of A Double Bevel Miter Saw
As no tool can be without its flaws, here are some drawbacks that we observed about double bevel miter saws:
Expensive
After laying your eyes on a double-bevel miter saw you might not want to let it go. However, it does come with an added price point which is justified by its quality. But, this might make it an unreasonable purchase for amateur woodworkers.
Hence, we do like to suggest this variant of saws, especially to professionals who will get the most use out of it. Also, more benefits are added to the machine because of the price hike from the standard variants.
Heavier And Requires More Space
Unlike the single bevel variants, these are probably best when placed in a workshop. The table is larger because of the ability to pivot in both directions. Also, the machine does gain some extra weight from the added mechanisms, which provides its ability to pivot. So, you may not be able to move around this power saw as the single bevel variants.
Double Bevel Miter Saw: Pros
Saves time
No need to flip the plank
Good for working with larger wood pieces
Highly accurate and precise
Add versatility to cuts
Double Bevel Miter Saw: Cons
Relatively expensive
Heavier
Similarities Between Single And Double Bevel Miter Saws
It's time to talk about some of the similarities seen in both products. This will actually help you to choose any one of them without compromising on similar aspects. As we mentioned before, there are many similarities shared by the two saws as they are mostly the same product.
However, at times, people forget to look at the similarities and instead gravitate toward the differences. Having a better picture of the common aspects is especially important for beginners and DIY enthusiasts. These points can genuinely help them save a bit of money if they aren't ready to invest in something big.
Hence, let's have a look at the identical aspects of the saws.
Cuts Made With The Saw
We would like to begin with the fact that both saws can make similar cuts. Using a single or double bevel miter saw, you can get cross-cuts, bevels, and miter cuts. Both are equally helpful for creating the precise angular cuts that you may need for different projects.
Hence, if you are specifically looking for a saw to create angular cuts, you can choose either. Moreover, most miter saws come with the usual angle capacity of 45 degrees. However, it might be a bit more in the case of double saws.
So, rather than looking at variants, you may also look for different models of the same saw to get better features.
Technique Of Usage
One of the crucial things about using power saws is to master the skill to use them. Even though the double bevel miter saw may have a bit more learning curve, you will essentially use a similar technique in both of them.
Other than some minute design aspects that differ between manufacturers, these saws need to be operated with a handle on the top. Both variants are also available in sliding or compound options if you are keen on getting them.
Hence, if you are a professional, there won't be a need to learn something entirely new to use either of them.
Can't Perform Rips
If you are looking for a tool that might help in ripping a plank, both of these options will disappoint you. Rather than working lengthwise, the miter saw is meant to cut by the width of a plank. This is also a reason for these being useful for making precise and clean bevel cuts.
Other options like a circular saw, or a table saw might be better options for ripping wood. Those options are also preferred for working with large pieces of wood, unlike miter saws.
Blade Size
A common aspect seen in both variants is the size of the blades. The standard options include a 10 or 12-inch blade, but 8-inch blades are also available. So, even though the double bevel miter may accommodate a longer piece of wood, it will still take a similar width.
Moreover, the blades are pretty alike, and you may even find the same ones being used in the tools produced by a single manufacturer. Hence, someone who already owns a miter saw will find it much easier to get a new one.
Differences Between Single And Double Bevel Miter Saws
Moving on, we would like to draw your attention to the differences present in the variants. Till now, we have discussed various aspects of these incredible power tools to give you a brief idea about each. Over here, we will chalk out the contrast present between the two products.
So, without any delay, let us find out what makes the two distinct.
Speed
Professional woodworkers need to have speed so that they can finish projects on the stipulated timeline. Even though they can get the work done with a single bevel saw, it may take them considerably more time.
However, using a double or dual bevel saw for the same project may save a lot of time. This is primarily due to the ease of use presented with the double bevel saw, as there is no need to flip the wood.
Also, manufacturers may even add a slightly powerful motor in the double bevel options to juice up the blades.
Precision And Accuracy
Even after being close contenders, the double bevel miter saw takes away the cake regarding precision and accuracy. As a person doesn't need to flip or rotate a plank, the cuts come out much smoother and even. Professionals love this quality as it helps them to do flawless projects.
With that being said, we would also add the point that beginners don't need to go the extra mile to get the double bevel variant. A single bevel option works just as well and performs almost the same tasks as the other one.
Usage
In the earlier section, while discussing the similarities, we talked about how it's similar. Here, we would like to point out the slight difference present in the double-bevel variant.
As this saw can pivot in both directions, you may need to spend some time getting used to the motion. However, this won't take much time if you are akin to using a miter saw.
Also, as the double bevel variant tends to be a tad heavier, you may need to get used to lifting it or using it in a stationary spot.
Compared to it, using the single bevel version is as easy as it can get. All you need to do is read the manual and watch some videos to get started on the saw.
Cost
A glaring difference seen between the variants is the cost. This is why the costlier option, which is the double-bevel miter saw, is usually recommended for professionals.
The single-bevel version is a little less versatile than the former option, so it costs much less. However, manufacturers may charge a higher price by adding features like a laser guide or some extra angle stops.
Hence, it's always good to compare separate models before purchasing a piece.
Portability
When it comes to portability, the single bevel miter saw stands out as the lighter variant. Hence, many professionals like to have both saws to use when the need arises.
Also, it is easier to carry a single bevel miter saw to a job site as a lighter option. In comparison, the larger size and the heavier weight of the double-bevel version may make it impossible to do so.
Therefore, woodworkers who work regularly may need access to both power saws to make their job easier.
Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw FAQ
Is this your first time learning in-depth about miter saws? Here are some helpful answers to common queries that people have about single-bevel vs. double-bevel miter saws.
Is A Miter Saw Worth It?
Yes, a miter saw is definitely worth your investment. It lets you make angled cuts which are crucial to finish different woodworking projects. Moreover, the miter saw can also perform bevel cuts that you cannot manage with a circular or table saw.
Can You Use A Miter Saw On A Regular Table?
To answer it simply, yes, you can use the miter saw on a regular table. However, it is always crucial to find a table that has enough stability to hold the miter saw in place. If you happen to have a double bevel miter saw that's heavier, you may want to place it on a fixed spot.
Can A 12-inch Miter Saw Blade Cut A 4x6 Board?
When a miter saw has larger blades, it suggests the width that it can handle. So, the 12-inch blade will cut the 4x6 board quite quickly. Moreover, the 12-inch blade will also cut 2x8 and 2x6 boards. Check out the guide of a miter saw before buying it to ensure that it supports a specific wood size.
Do I Need A Double Bevel Miter Saw?
If you are an amateur at woodworking, we will suggest you not to buy a double bevel miter saw. The reason being that it isn't starkly different from the single variant. It only makes cutting angles a tad easier.
However, you may get the same results with a single bevel miter saw with a bit of practice. But, if you are a professional who is thinking of upgrading to a better model, then you can invest in it.
Are Sliding Miter Saws Better?
We wouldn't categorize a sliding miter saw as a better saw. Instead, it is much easier to use and can provide cleaner cuts. However, it also costs a bit more compared to the usual models. If you have a reasonable budget, then a sliding miter saw might be an excellent first choice to make woodworking simpler.
Who Should Get The Single Bevel Miter Saw?
We would like to recommend the single bevel miter saw for beginners and amateur woodworkers. With this simple power saw, you will get perfect angular cuts to give your projects a professional look.
Initially, you may have to pick up the skill of proper measurement and rotating the plank with perfection. However, we are sure that you will be able to grasp it quickly. And, in the future, when you spend on a double bevel variant, using it will become much more manageable.
Moreover, we would also like to recommend the single variant to professionals who work on job sites. Keep it for the days when you need to carry a saw to avoid lugging the heavy double-bevel variant.
Who Should Get The Double Bevel Miter Saw?
We would like to recommend the double bevel miter saw to professionals and serious woodworkers. If you have been looking to make precise angular cuts, it will give you the perfect results.
Having a double bevel saw is a must for workshops as it hurries up the work process by cutting down the time you spend on each project. Also, if you have used a miter saw before, learning to use the variant won't take much time.
Moreover, it also helps to create great-looking handmade products with some of the best finishes. If you are into making bevel cuts, then look no further than the double bevel miter saw.
Verdict
We are coming to the end of comparing two great power tools that have managed to make woodworking a breeze. However, it's time to point out that there can never be a clear winner while comparing the two variants.
On having a closer look, we found positives and negatives for both of them. Hence, the choice will rely on the expectations and requirements of the user.
Moreover, you should keep your woodworking skills in mind before purchasing either the single-bevel variant or the double-bevel variant. If you are still curious, you can just visit a store to check out some of the top models.
With that, we would like to say goodbye. Don't forget to let us know if you have any queries regarding single-bevel vs. double-bevel miter saws.
Embarking on a home decor journey, this guide unveils 33 affordable DIY nightstand ideas, each marrying practicality with creative flair. It begins with transforming a basic table with a wooden top, a nod to elegance in simplicity, and progresses to up-cycling wooden beams into stunning nightstands, celebrating the beauty of reclaimed materials. The guide seamlessly integrates practical solutions, like building a nightstand full of drawers for those needing extra storage, with innovative twists, such as repurposing an IKEA Expedit shelf into a stylish bedside piece. Wooden crates, often underrated, are reimagined vertically to add rustic charm, while an old door finds new life as an eye-catching nightstand backdrop. Contemporary tastes are catered to with a floating nightstand adorned in teal accents, and salvaged wood takes on a new role in tailored designs. Each idea, from nightstands shaped around unique pieces of wood to those combining plywood with hairpin legs, is infused with simplicity and functionality. Greenery enters the scene with wooden crates on hairpin legs, while color and pattern find their way into minimalist designs. The guide also embraces industrial aesthetics with wood and pipe combinations, alongside rustic vibes from dual wooden box nightstands. For those with a penchant for customization, there's inspiration in revamping antique pieces, personalizing with stenciling, or opting for bold black and white stripes. Light-hearted designs include using a small IKEA ladder or building a mid-century piece, and for a touch of glamour, coral and gold nightstands make an appearance. The guide concludes with ingenious uses of pallet wood, suitcase side tables, and the understated charm of cinder-block nightstands, ensuring there's an idea for every taste and style.
1. Transform a simple table with a wooden top
Pallets can offer you the wood needed for the craft, a spectacular way to revamp an old side-table or a mass produced one that you can buy with little costs but you don`t actually fancy. The wooden texture bring coziness and warmth and in airy interiors, Scandinavian decor this is definitely a recipe for success.
2. Up-cycle wooden beams into epic diy wooden nightstands
The process itself is relatively simple if you are experienced with power tools yet the result is extraordinary rewardful, enough to invite a friend to help with the project, an exemplary nightstand will be born and a memorable experience between friends, forged.
A simple item can greatly enhance the storage in your home and the chest-like solution above is no exception. This shape can take any color, receive any finish you desire that might help you integrate it seamlessly into your decor.
4. Use an Expedit IKEA shelf as an epic nightstand
A popular IKEA choice that can be transformed through the items planted in it. Combine silver and gold accents with warm textures like wood and paper on a white or black background piece.
6. Up-cycle a door into an epic background for your nightstand
via polkapics.net
7. Floating diy nightstand with teal color accents
A pretty brilliant craft with a complete tutorial that one ought to consider for a modern vibe in the household, the look is exemplary, the colors can be changed to match any design line and the floating nightstand emphasizing the feeling of space, by freeing floor space.
via paris-lareunion.blogspot.ro
8. Tailor a diy nightstand with salvaged wood
The craft uses salvaged wood in a simple rectangular shape with inexpensive legs to form a modern nightstand.
9. Nightstand shaped around a brilliant piece of wood
If you are to find the right piece of wood in the recycling yard it is your responsibility to put it to good use, to bring that legendary texture forward. A simple open-shelve nightstand might be the answer.
via Pinterest
10. Plywood and hairpin legs nightstand
The hairpin legs known to be a blessing to most crafts as their look emphasizes the feeling of space a great deal, combine that with plywood in light tones and the airy ambiance will give the craft wings. Simple yet brilliant, very much appreciated in design.
The simplest diy nightstand in our guide probably, the craft presents two wooden boxes in a great shape on top of each other, coziness and warmth in a simple package.
Powerful colors can be bold enough to change a setting. Pick up an old nightstand from the flea market and rebuild it with color; side-tables can be transformed with ease as well.
Invite a new vibe in your decor; create custom stencils to feature the pattern of your choosing and match with bold colors. You are to tailor your own future, start with a furniture piece.
Two crate are enough to shape a nightstand. You can color them, leave them bare or create that withered look, a look very much appreciated by the DIY community.
Very simple, inexpensive and versatile, you can customize it a great deal it goes without saying that multi-purpose furniture pieces are a very good addition to any home.
An experienced diy enthusiast that knows his power tools can create the craft with absolutely no costs and the result is extraordinary. Having crafter-friends might be considered a great asset from this point of view.
Three cinder-blocks properly cleaned can aid your decor in minutes. The storage, shelving options are built in and the exposed concrete can look interesting. Simple and efficient way to intervene in your decor.
Source Unknown
The nightstand is very important even though it is often overlooked, one should ensure that this item resides in the bedroom as it can be "built" with absolutely no costs. Shape your home beautifully, forge the epic nightstand that will literally be by your side for hours and hours.
What do you think?
We would love to hear your opinion on the subject in the comment section below.
Basketball is a very popular theme for either a children’s room or for that man-cave sanctuary. The good news is that it doesn't cost much to create this environment and many of the products are available online for minimal cost. Some wall art, a few items of memorabilia, and of course that wall-hoop is all it takes to turn a hum-drum room into a fun, sport’s themed environment.
Inspiring Basketball Themed Bedroom
Start with the art
The first thing that attracts the eye when walking into a room is the wall art and there’s a range of prints and framed art available on the market. The brightly-colored ball itself will be one of the main features but there are plenty of vintage prints available, which look great when hung above a bed. The larger prints will make an impact but use a little imagination and consider hanging team vests along one wall and consider items such as basketball-shaped clocks. Using a stencil to print team names directly onto a blank wall can also be very effective and you can buy large 2D team figures to hang on the walls.
Create your court
If you’re someone who likes to take it one step further then why not create your own indoor basketball mini-court? If your room already has varnished or hardwood floors then you’re ahead of the game and all that’s required is some floor markings and a hoop attached to the wall. Of course, this isn’t going to be a full-sized court but more likely just a corner of the room where you can throw a few slam-dunks. Paint the walls in your team colors and stencil up a few inspirational Michael Jordan quotes onto the court area.
Team memorabilia
Collecting sports memorabilia is a fascinating past-time and vintage finds can look great on walls or shelves. Check out those auction websites for framed prints, autographed posters, and even ‘signed by the team’ vests and balls. If you can get your hands on some authentic items then this will make a great display when collected together and will definitely impress visitors. Look out for game tickets that can be framed and search out those vintage magazines that can be fanned out on table tops.
You should be able to pick these things up easily at your nearest superstore or, if you’re a British reader, in your local Tesco. Don’t forget those themed bedspreads, pillowcases, the best in-ground basketball hoop you can find, and even rugs with court designs.
Get creative and experiment a lot with your ideas until you finally achieve that perfect look.
Considering Acoustics for Your Indoor Court
In creating a basketball-themed bedroom, one important aspect often overlooked is the acoustic properties of the room. Particularly in a residential setting, soundproofing becomes a necessary consideration to prevent noise disturbances to other members of the household or neighbors. One can achieve this through various methods. For instance, introducing sound barriers or absorbent materials, like foam panels or heavy curtains, can significantly reduce the noise generated in the room. Additionally, opting for sound-absorbent flooring materials instead of hard surfaces can dampen the sound of bouncing basketballs. Considering these measures not only ensures a serene household environment but also enhances the overall comfort and usability of the basketball-themed bedroom. For more in-depth guidance on how to soundproof your room, there are dedicated resources available that detail proven methods for reducing noise in your home.
What do you think? We would love to hear your opinion on Basketball Themed Bedrooms in the comment section below.
A garden is a place in which we find refugee at the end of a long day, we soothe our nerves, and we find peace nestled between greenery; as the snow slowly starts to melt and the gardening activities start to occupy our minds we too start searching diy projects that can change our garden for the better. A selection of crafts that beautifully recycles items into cheap diy garden art flower yard projects has been curated to creatively showcase the immense possibilities brought forward by recycling and up-cycling.
Any item that we discard can be recycled and the vast majority can be up-cycled as well, you can repurpose them creatively thus saving a great amount of energy from hitting the landfill. Cast a glance below and surge inspiration.
Low Budget DIY Garden Art Flower Yard Projects To Do
One could use old plates in a painting session with friends and family only to proudly prepare them for an artistic installation. The plates ought to become flowers in a beautiful recycled field of color on your fence, shed or garage. The craft can become a really educative group lesson for children on recycling and up-cycling.
The individual able to work with metal could use old kitchen utensils to shape graphic flowers; the possibilities are limitless as any piece can change the dynamic of the composition greatly.
Tin cans can be opened up and creatively painted to create beautiful flower compositions; they can become great planters too in no less than 30 seconds.
The garden hoses are now inactive and it will be time till your first crop will need heavy watering but for the time being, one could get creative and arrange the hoses into flower installations that foretell the coming of spring.
Use simple bottle caps to create simple garden art with the little ones. A glue gun, paint, and bamboo skewers are all you might need to get these crafts ready for a colorful spring.
Recycling glass items into complex flower installation requires the enthusiast in you but the results can be quite impressive; always take all the safety precautions when working with glass.
Every now and then wheel protection falls off and every now and then three others happen to hit the landfill as a result. Bring your contribution and attempt to recycle or up-cycle them.
Chicken wire carefully tailored to assemble a bulb that receives color can stun the pedestrian and upon scaling the installation simply becomes extraordinary.
The low-budget DIY garden art flower projects below might be considered unusual but they`re definitely graphic. What do you think? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
Have you been searching for a good-quality air purifier that would improve your room air quality like a pro?
In all probability, you might have come across the SilverOnyx air purifier while searching online, as it has garnered lots of positive reviews lately. But, are you totally sure that it’s the best option for you?
Well, getting the answer to that question is important before deciding to buy it. And that requires considering a lot of factors, including its features, advantages, and disadvantages.
However, we can confidently say that you’ll be impressed with the user-friendly features on offer once you’ve used this air purifier. That’s because we have used it extensively for quite a few months.
So, based on our experience, we’ve documented this review to help you form a clearer idea about the essential facets of the product.
Air Purifiers for Home: Our powerful 5-in-1 filtration, HEPA...
Incredible for Large Rooms: Breathe easier with this...
Most of you might have heard of SilverOnyx as it is a quite popular brand across the country for its range of superb electronic devices. But as far as air purifiers are concerned, this is the first model that the brand has brought forth in the market.
In case you are wondering whether it would perform as effectively as some of its competitors, we can assure you that it does well to uphold the reputation of the brand. So, let’s find out how.
Filtering System
Filtering is undoubtedly the most crucial factor in deciding the performance of air purifiers. Now, since the SilverOnyx air purifier comes at a very budget-friendly rate, you might doubt the quality and efficiency of the integrated air filters. But let us tell you that the filters offer more than what the price point suggests!
A five-stage cleaning system takes its performance to a different level altogether. On that note, let’s have a look at how this system works.
Pre-Filter- At the onset, a mesh pre-filter helps capture the larger particles such as pet dander and hair. This part is attached to the primary HEPA filter.
HEPA Filter- The super-efficient H13 True HEPA filter in this unit eliminates up to 99.97% dust, and allergens sized up to 0.3 microns. It comes with 60% more surface area than some more flat varieties used in models of the same weight. As a result, the cleaning capacity of the SilverOnyx air purifier is enhanced to a great extent.
Activated Carbon Filter- This layer effectively neutralizes any smoke and odor indoors.
UV-C Light Filter- Contaminants such as germs and mold are destroyed with the help of this filter. This is achieved by the UV-C photocatalyst and bulb.
These four filters are the basic types that you’ll find in most air purifiers. Long story short, the combined power of these ‘Fabulous 4’ makes the SilverOnyx air purifier really powerful. Apart from that, it comes with an ionizer (5th stage), which destroys airborne allergens detrimental to health and can be switched on or off as required.
Size And Design
When it comes to electronic appliances, both performance, and design draw a lot of attention. And you would surely agree that it’s difficult to get the best of both worlds.
However, you’re in for a surprise here as well. This air purifier comes in a more popular cylindrical shape, which is different from the typical tower-shaped models.
It has quite a sleek construction, which makes for an attractive appearance and also convenient handling of the unit. Moreover, it’s safe to use around children since the shape renders a strong footprint for an air purifier.
Furthermore, it’s height is shorter than many other cylindrical models, which makes it a reasonably-sized air purifier for bedrooms. Simply put it on a side table, and you’re good to go!
Another great feature we observed was that the air intake grill is positioned under the power switch while the outlet grill is at the top. As such, it uses the concept of “bottom-to-top” airflow, which is the best way to circulate indoor air with a cylindrical design.
On a side note, here’s a small tip to ensure the purifier functions properly. You should always keep the top and side outlet grill unblocked to ensure 360-degree air distribution. Avoid putting the purifier against the wall, as it will restrict proper airflow, thereby reducing its efficiency.
Fan Speed
Filters may be the most crucial for air purifiers, but they are incomplete without a fan. That’s because a fan forces air at high speeds into the filter to effectively remove the contaminants from the incoming airflow.
Generally, purifiers come with 2 or 3 adjustable fan speeds to suit your needs. This SilverOnyx purifier, however, is a step ahead in this regard too, since it comes with 5 fan speeds.
Thus, you get more flexibility to choose the ideal setting according to the air quality and room size. For instance, if the air is polluted by litter smell or dust, you can increase the speed to the top-most level for a quicker action.
Quieter Performance
A noisy air purifier is a nuisance to any room, but that’s not a concern if you have this SilverOnyx air purifier at home. Despite having five different fan speeds, we found that it generates significantly less noise than many other models.
In fact, while using the product, we decided to measure the noise level on a typical day. And it was a mere 25 decibel, which is exactly that of a whisper-like sound. Almost too great to be true, we’d say!
Power Consumption
This unit ranks high in terms of energy efficiency as well. You’ll be happy to hear that the maximum power consumption that it records is a mere 24watts. What does the trick is the low-voltage DC and brushless DC motor of this air purifier. This feature becomes beneficial in the long run when you need to use it for more than 8 hours without racking up the electric bill.
Advanced Features
On top of the benefits we’ve talked about till now, this purifier offers quite a few more, thanks to the availability of some superior-grade features. So, let’s quickly dive into them:
a) Auto-Mode- This feature can be of great help if you’re not sure about the best fan speed. It uses an integrated sensor that determines the air quality to set the ideal fan speed automatically. This is an effective way to regulate the overall power consumption while ensuring good air quality.
b) Timer- You also get to schedule the time when your air purifier has to be turned off. The working time can be adjusted anywhere between 30 minutes and 24 hours.
b) Sleep Mode- Activating this mode dims the light above the control panel instantly. Such a feature can be found only in a select few models.
c) Indicator For Filter Replacement- This is yet another rare feature, lighting up on time to alert you that a filter replacement is due.
Customer Service
While maintaining top-notch quality in all its products, SilverOnyx also takes care of customer satisfaction quite well.
This is one of the primary reasons for which we would highly recommend this brand. Interestingly, it offers the much sought-after free shipping facility, unlike lots of other reputed brands.
Besides, the customer helpline is much more effective with its prompt response to almost any query. And a 30-day return policy is also offered in case you are not satisfied with the product.
Maintenance
We were glad to find that unlike several other models, this unit didn’t need much maintenance. Sure cleaning the filters is necessary, but you can simply rinse them lightly or clean with a vacuum.
Filter replacements are a major concern for most people. But in the case of the SilverOnyx purifier, some of the long-lasting filters don’t require the usual 2-time replacement per year.
What Could've Been Better?
Although this SilverOnyx unit is among the most high-performing air purifiers available currently, it does have some minor disadvantages. But from our experience, we can assure you that these won’t make much difference in its efficiency.
Firstly, it takes a bit longer to purify the air in very large rooms. For a surface area of 500 sq ft., the unit may take around 7 or 8 hours to effectively eliminate up to 99% airborne particles, due to a slightly lower CADR value. The CADR (Clean Air Delivery Rate) is a measure of the rate at which an air purifier can remove a specific contaminant from the air.
Apart from this, we found the warranty of 1 year to be a bit disappointing. In comparison, other models like the Levoit LV-H132 allow you to extend the warranty period by an additional one year.
Pros
Impressive 5-stage filtration process
Comes with smart sensor
Produces less sound
Attractive design
Timer function
Cons
Takes longer to work in larger rooms
Short warranty period
SilverOnyx Air Purifier Buyer’s Guide
The air quality in your room will directly affect your health and well-being. So, if you decide to go for an air purifier, you should choose the one that does its job really well.
As such, considering some key features becomes important, as is keeping in mind your needs. Hence, in this section, we’ve listed some essential points that you should look for before buying a suitable air purifier.
Types
Different categories of air purifiers tackle air pollution using various methods, which vary according to their power source. As such, you can choose between the kinds that are available as per your preferences.
One such type is a mechanical purifier, which comes with a web of fibers to trap particles. On the other hand, electronic models like the SilverOnyx purifier use ionizers and electrostatic precipitators to charge and filter them. Another well-known type is the activated carbon method to adsorb molecules that produce bad odors.
Air Purifying Capacity
Not all electronic purifiers use the same technology, which is why their air-purifying capacity is different. In this regard, the filtering system becomes significant. So, make sure you check the information on the number and types of filters while going through the details of a product.
Notably, the SilverOnyx purifier offers a superior filtering system that consistently works to remove the majority of harmful particles from the air.
Apart from this, checking the fan speed adjustability is also important. This will allow you to regulate its functioning as per your needs. For regions with higher pollution rates, greater adjustability is a must.
Noise Level
The level of noise produced by purifiers is another key factor to take into account. In particular situations (for example, if you are using it in a baby’s room or a bedroom), a quiet operation even at high fan speeds will be more suitable.
Noise from purifiers originates from the filtering system working continuously. However, in good-quality models such as the Silveronyx purifier, it is almost inaudible. This is because they incorporate sound-dampening mechanisms, thereby enhancing the utility of the product.
Note that inferior air purifiers might produce a steady humming noise similar to that produced by an AC unit. So, do remember to go through the information on the noise level while considering any unit.
CADR Rating
Choosing a model with a standard CDR rating is important to ensure that it can efficiently work in average-sized rooms. This rating is a way to estimate the coverage of an air purifier.
As we mentioned earlier, the SilverOnyx purifier comes with a slightly lower CADR count but is sufficient to maintain the air quality in average-sized rooms. Do keep in mind that a CADR count of below 80 implies the purifier might not be ideal for even medium-sized rooms.
Design And Portability
By design, we are not just referring to the external design and look of the purifier here, but also to an intrinsic aspect. The purifier should have the controls positioned conveniently and should have an overall compact design.
But the position of the inlet and outlet grills is also important since it determines the direction of air circulation. Keep in mind that a “bottom-to-top” airflow through the purifier enables a more efficient performance.
In addition to this, portability is a significant factor to consider when buying air purifiers. Small and lightweight models can be kept on a shelf or desk and can also be moved easily from one room to another. Hence, it might be better to go for a smaller size.
As for the larger models, they are usually much heavier, making them more suitable for use in a single room. However, some larger purifiers do come with casters to facilitate partial portability.
To make an efficient choice, consider the size and number of the rooms you’ll be using the air purifier in.
Extra Features
Purifiers that come with additional features on top of the regular controls are always better since they provide more flexibility and convenience. These include indicators for filter replacement, timers, and auto modes. Some even come with a remote to enhance user convenience further.
So, if you are not faced with a tight budget, going for a purifier that offers additional features and is priced just slightly higher is beneficial.
As we have discussed earlier, the SilverOnyx does come with quite a few additional features, making it a great choice if the flexibility of use is a primary lookout for you.
Impurities That Purifiers Deal With
Air purifiers eliminate various substances from the air, contrary to the common belief that they only act on dust particles. The air we breathe consists of pollens, smoke, and other various harmful allergens, which are acted upon by good-quality air purifiers.
Thus, they render your home safe from the risk of most airborne diseases. The risk of such diseases is greater in certain regions across the country, so it becomes all the more essential to go for a super-efficient air purifier.
Brands like SilverOnyx provide the protection that you desire, as their air purifiers come with sound filtering systems.
SilverOnyx Air Purifier Review
Are Air Purifiers Safe For Small Children?
Yes, most modern air purifiers are designed to ensure the safety of kids. The use of good-quality filters enhances safety, so the ones like this SilverOnyx model consists of a HEPA filter are a step ahead of others.
As we discussed earlier, the safety of use around kids depends on the design too, as it should make a strong footprint. The SilverOnyx qualifies as a great one in that regard.
Do All Air Purifiers Remove Odors?
Well, this largely varies from one model to another, as not all purifiers have efficient odor-removing filters. Those like SilverOnyx incorporate activated carbon filters. Hence, they successfully remove most types of odors from the air.
Do All Air Purifiers Remove Pet Hair?
This would depend on the availability of a pre-filter in the purifier, which is capable of removing larger particles like pet hair and dander. The SilverOnyx does come with that feature, so you don’t need to worry about this if you go for it.
Are Air Purifiers Effective On Viruses?
Viruses causing airborne diseases cling to dust particles or droplets easily and air purifiers can capture such substances, thereby eliminating these viruses effectively. The common types of air-born diseases include influenza, common cold, and respiratory ailments such as asthma.
Can Air Purifiers Cool Down A Room?
Air purifiers can’t alter the temperature of a room directly. However, they come with fans that blow or circulate the air, so the procedure of moving air would make a room cooler. Note that a purifier with a higher airflow can blow out more air, which may reduce the air temperature slightly.
How Long Should I Use An Air Purifier?
If you didn’t know this till now, purifiers are designed to be used 24/7. Those with smart-sensors can adjust the speed of the fan automatically, so you can run them all day long without worrying about power consumption.
SilverOnyx Air Purifier Verdict
So, here was our guide on all the essentials regarding the SilverOnyx air purifier. We hope you’ll find it helpful.
In our opinion, this product is a must-buy for those in search of a convenient and truly effective air purifier. The low noise level and power consumption only add to its usefulness. And the best part is that you get all these benefits at a quite budget-friendly price.
So, go ahead and try out the SilverOnyx air purifier. And when you do, let us know in the comments section about your experience- we’ll be glad to know about it all!
One of the most critical aspects of a healthy lifestyle is having a home which has good vibes and helps you combat stress. Even though a lot of your health issues are not in your control, the necessary maintenance of a healthy lifestyle is very much up to you. Himalayan Salt Lamps could prove to be a valued addition to your home, as décor as well as for a couple of claimed health benefits it imparts. However, it is very crucial to identify the real ones from the fake. If you need help, we have curated a list of the best lamps made out of Himalayan salt!
According to a lot of proven reviews, the salt lamp essentially gives off a dim glow and is also great as a décor. The health benefits it imparts ranges from combating stress, better sleep, the source of negative ions, purification of air, fighting respiratory diseases, reduction of electromagnetic radiation, a better immune response of the body and so on.
So, when do you get to know that the lamp you purchased is helping you?
10 Signs to identify the originality of your Himalayan Salt Lamp
HIMALAYAN FIREBOWL WITH SALT CRYSTAL BALLS: Spantik's...
DIMMABLE HOME DÉCOR: Spantik's Himalayan Salt Lamp is...
Fake Glow
Being a lamp, it is apparently supposed to be a source of light but is also important to understand that it only gives a dim glow and not a very bright light. If you see that your lamp is imparting a very bright and luminescent light, the lamp is possibly fake. The glow should not be bright orange or pink, or even white. Instead, it should be a mixture of soft orange and pink. It is more pleasing to the eye than any other LED light in your house.
Heat-emitting light
It is important to make sure that the bulb which is used for the lamp is heat emitting, with proper wattage. Regular LED lights which give a bright glow do not work for these lamps and for the lamp to work effectively in negative ion release and moisture purification, the heat is crucial. If your lamp is not heating, it is time to reconsider your buy.
Sweat-free lamp
One of the vital features of a Himalayan Salt Lamp is that it absorbs moisture from its surroundings and purifies the air. This helps in sieving the impurities from the air, and the lamp thus needs to be cleaned occasionally. If your salt lamp is real, it will sweat, which means it would release moisture. This process is called hygroscopy. The air which is essential has moisture, and this is then cleaned and released again. Hence, if the lamp is not sweating, it is surely not real. Use a dry cloth after using the lamp for a while to check if it is damp, if it is, the lamp is undoubtedly real.
Unbreakable
Salt can never be unbreakable, it is fragile, and it is supposed to crumble under pressure. If you accidentally happen to drop your lamp or cause any damage to it, and the lamp shows no sign of breaking- it is a bad sign. These lamps tend to chip off since they are so fragile. Hence it may also get damaged while being delivered to you. Make sure that you keep a check on it and also how it holds up to stress.
White Lamps
The usual Himalayan Pink Salt lamps are orange-pink. They are not exactly cheap, but they are a little cheaper than the white crystals. They are not only rare to find, but they are also way more expensive than the pink variants. If you happen to purchase a white lamp at a cheaper price than that of the pink, it is a definite fake.
Poor return policy
Now we all know by now that the lamp is made out of salt and is fragile, so the seller is also aware of this fact. Any lamp which is sold with no return policy or with stringent return policies has a chance of being fake. Knowing its fragile nature, sellers usually have a good guarantee period with the lamp and are flexible with their return rules.
Origination
True to its name, the Himalayan Salt is mined from parts of the mountains. To be specific, the mines of Khewra, in Pakistan. It is in the western section of the Himalayas. Any lamp which says otherwise is a definitive fake and will not impart any of the benefits of the lamp to you or your home.
No health benefits
You have owned the lamp for a considerable amount of time. You live by it, turn it on every evening when you get back from home and turn it off in the morning. You don't feel any difference with or without its presence. The chances of you being cheated are high in this case! For you to know if the lamp is real, you should be able to feel the benefits of the lamp, like lowered stress, easier breathing, better sleep, better lifestyle and positive energy around you.
Size
The lamp you just purchased is tiny and does not seem to be making any effect on you or your home. First and foremost, you have to check that the room is not too big. You cannot expect a small lamp to purify the air of a large room. Usually smaller size lamps show way lesser benefits than the larger ones, and if the large and strangely heavy salt lamp is still not giving you any health benefits, it is fake! Also, large lamps will never provide an even flow of light, so keep that in mind too.
Price
The Himalayan salt is mined in dangerous situations, and the mineral being very fragile is also hard to handle. Keeping all such facts in mind, the price of the salt lamp cannot be so low. Also, just because your salt lamp is very expensive, does not mean that it could not be a fake. Even very pricey lamps can be fake. Hence, before making any purchase, it is important to check the price, features, specifications and most importantly customer reviews. Customers usually come forward and review products correctly, and if the product is a fake, they will say it first!
These are just some of the ways how one could differentiate between a real Himalayan Salt Lamp from a fake. There are various other ways one could figure it out, and only thorough comparison and research help to understand products better.
One of the vital components of your home is the gutter, which is also one of the most neglected.
While you may invest heavily in other aspects of your home, we suggest you don't compromise with the gutters. In that regard, one of the top products for you to try out is the Shur Flo Gutter, which comes with a state-of-the-art design.
But considering the many top-notch units available, you might be confused if Shur Flo is the right choice. To help you, we've narrowed down our argument into individual sections to highlight the critical components and ensure that you can make an informed decision.
We talk about various aspects from its durability to its patented filtration system, all of which contribute to its exceptional performance. Moreover, it's suitable for different climates and situations to offer much-needed reliability.
So, let's not waste any more time and get down to the details.
Shur Flo Gutter Review
Why Buy This Product?
Let's begin with the good points and what essential facets make the Shur Flo Gutter stand out. There are several critical features that we've highlighted below to provide a clear idea of the model.
Patented Perf-Flow Filtration System
We start with the most crucial aspect of the product: the patented perf-flow filtration system. Like most gutters, it prevents the system from clogging, but it tops other brands when it comes to efficiency. We loved the exceptional performance you’re guaranteed to get, thanks to the innovative design.
The designers have added a panel system for the gutter to ensure that it covers the entry point while maintaining the structure at ground level. The panels also have an X-wave pattern to enhance ventilation, thanks to the numerous tiny holes lining the body.
For those of you who are worried, let us tell you that it's incredibly useful to stop twigs, leaves, snow, and other objects from falling in. As a result, the gutter is well protected, and even if you can't clean it up, the ventilation system allows water to seep through unhindered.
You'll notice that rainwater gets a clear passage irrespective of what's on the surface. Moreover, there's another benefit of the perforated holes, allowing air to blow in from above and below. It helps to blow away the debris and keeps the structure clean, making it low maintenance.
Sturdy Construction
For the gutter to produce fantastic output, it's natural that it must last a long time. Likewise, the Shur Flo Gutter comes in a high-tempered aluminum construction to withstand natural elements and deliver a power-packed performance. It protects against stuff that may fall into the gutter along with the objects flowing through it.
The last thing you need is for the structure to burst, and in that regard, the durable nature complements the other functions. Moreover, you get to choose the width of your unit – 5-inch or 6-inch – while the machine screws ensure that it stays in place irrespective of unpredictable weather conditions.
You can choose the color as well, which plays a vital part in making the unit rust-resistant. Therefore, it's the perfect product to have if you experience frequent rainy or snowy conditions.
What we particularly liked is the attention to detail, which allows the gutter to control heavy run-off. It redirects the debris-laden water away from your home, permitting you to keep your house nice and dry.
People who live close to nature or find themselves surrounded by trees will love all it offers, given its incredible load-bearing capacity. However, despite having a sturdy build, it's not difficult to move around, which comes in handy during installation.
So, let's discuss that next.
Easy Installation
Straight off the bat, a tool must have all the components to ensure that you get through the installation without any hassle. Similarly, the Shur Flo Gutter is the ideal unit for first-timers or DIY professionals, and you won't need to spend additional money to call for help.
The only caveat is that it takes considerable time, but with a little patience, you can get it done. Furthermore, it comes with three different versions to cater to most types of situations. If you're worried about the clearance or causing damage to your roof shingles, try the step-down version.
It's ideal for gutters that need speed-screw or quick-screw hangers, and you can install the panels over the hangers for sufficient clearance. Moreover, it comes with relevant instructions, which detail the steps in an uncomplicated manner, thereby making it highly convenient.
We recommend that you don't rush but instead focus on being thorough. One way to check whether you've followed the procedure correctly is to see if it forms a snug fit with the roofline. Besides, even if you've got a gutter, the Shur Flo model can be effectively attached without damaging the existing structure.
Affordable
Next, we come to the price, and you'll be pleased to know it's a highly affordable unit that falls within most budgets. Bearing in mind the incredible features, the manufacturers have done well to keep it within reasonable limits, leading to its popularity.
You can purchase the guards in individual pieces measuring 4 feet, making it ideal for cutting it down to size. Consequently, it's customizable, and you won't have to make any further expenditures. We suggest you buy in bundles of 50, which proves highly convenient and lowers the cost.
It's important to remember that you may have to purchase from private dealers, meaning the cost might vary. However, the average price is around $1 per linear foot, so keep that in mind when making your purchase. Moreover, all the components, such as coloring screws and hangers, are included with the unit to reduce overall expenditure.
Warranty
Finally, you get an extended warranty spanning 20 to 25 years, which covers the entire lifespan of the model. It highlights the exceptional quality on offer, and the company quickly solves any problem related to performance, durability, or rusting.
Interestingly, even if you change your property, the warranty is transferable, meaning the new owners will reap the rewards. There's no cause for concern, and it is the excellent reliability that has endeared the Shur Flo Gutter to users.
For all that's good, there are a few downsides to the unit. Firstly, the design of the Step-down model keeps the roof shingles intact, but it also leads to a lot of debris gathering.
While most leaves and twigs can be blown away, some materials may get stuck under the ridges. It's not a significant issue, but you'll need to spend a little longer than usual to get it cleaned. Secondly, the designers have made the mistake of not including additional screws, which is an inconvenience.
You need to be very careful lest you lose one, meaning the installation will be incomplete. Therefore, you'll have to go out and purchase a similar type of screw, which isn't easy. Meanwhile, the soft side of the guard needs to be trimmed to match the front edge of the product.
What We Like
Patented Perf-Flow Filtration System for easy cleaning
Affordable option complemented by the excellent warranty
X-wave panel design with high-tempered aluminum construction
You get to choose from numerous colors
It can handle most weather conditions
What We Don't Like
There are no extra screws
The soft side of the gutter guard doesn't match the front edge
Shur Flo Gutter Buyer's Guide
Before you venture into the market, we would like to give you a couple of pointers to help you pick the right unit. The Shur Flo Gutter has many components that could make it difficult for you to distinguish between it and other top products.
We are here to discuss the essential aspects of the model apart from the advantages based on which we have formulated our list. A piece of knowledge about these functions will place you in good stead and help you make an informed choice.
Durability
Your tool must be durable to handle the wear and tear of daily use. As a gutter guard, it will have to deal with all types of tasks, from blocking debris to guaranteeing smooth water flow. It shouldn't be any surprise that only quality materials must be used for construction to ensure it doesn't break down.
Buying any merchandise is an investment, and so you cannot afford to spend time or money ever so often on a new one. You must enjoy both the product and the components that come with it for a long time.
In that regard, the manufacturers cannot afford to make any compromises. So, just having a steel or metal construction is not enough. It must be rust-resistant as well to deliver faultless output.
Ease of Use
The Shur Flo Gutter comes in various sizes to handle an array of tasks, but that shouldn't mean the designers have to compromise with user-friendliness. The primary objective of the unit is to reduce your workload, and therefore you must be able to employ it effectively to get the best results.
All the components and functions must be understandable, almost at a glance. You should know what each part does rather than pondering over how to get it right. Plus, the installation process and the disassembly must be written clearly to ensure that it is uncomplicated.
There is no point in having a plethora of functions if the users find it challenging to use. Rather any good model must keep the basics right and then add the necessary features to deliver a better performance.
Environment
The area in which you live plays a vital role in determining the model you choose to purchase. In that regard, the Shur Flo Gutter stands out because of its versatile nature and ability to handle various conditions.
While choosing a gutter, you mustn't focus on the drainage but preferably on the debris that the channel will have to deal with. If it can handle the objects falling into the drainpipe, it'll automatically provide a much more efficient drainage system.
You need to look for an all-around unit that first and foremost stops stuff from falling in. However, on the off chance that some debris does manage to get through, it must withstand the extra weight and provide a safe passage.
It should be able to provide a secure exit point so that your home remains dry. As a result, the perforated design of the Shur Flo Gutter comes in handy, leading to a positive response.
Conclusions
We've reached the end of our guide, and hopefully, you've got a better idea regarding the Shur Flo Gutter.
To clear any lingering doubts about the performance, we've decided to assist you a bit more before signing off. Please remember to scan the area around your house to get a better idea of the prevalent conditions.
Next, compare the different situations you're likely to encounter and check whether the gutter has the features to take care of the issues. As long as you do that. you won't be disappointed.
Storing shoes in a shoe rack is one of the most common practices many follow.
But what makes the shoe storage bench so versatile? This functional piece of furniture works both as a seat and convenient storage for your favorite footwear. And while they’re most commonly found in garages or entryways, you can conveniently place one in your bedroom as well.
Keeping your shoes organized ensures that your hallways or entryways don’t look like a mess, and it is the perfect spot to protect and store shoes to maintain their quality. Besides, you wouldn’t have to scramble to look for your shoes in a hurry.
But there are various options on the market, so we wanted to help find the perfect storage bench for your needs. That’s why we have reviewed the top 6 models in the following sections. So, let’s begin!
【SPACIOUS STORAGE】This shoe bench features 2 wide...
【VERSATILE】You can also use this entryway bench as a...
This natural bamboo shoe rack does a lot more than just store shoes. It can work as a versatile piece of furniture, perfect for any room in your living space. You can also use this 2-tier benchtop as a seat or to display items.
Why Did We Like It?
If you’re looking for something compact to occupy your narrow entryway, hallways, or doorways, then this can be the ideal storage bench. Measuring 70 x 28 x 45 cm, this shoe organizer can hold up shoes while accommodating items like your handbags, plants, and other accessories.
You receive an accessory bag, instructions, and the contents to assemble your bamboo storage bench. And the installation is pretty easy, so it shouldn’t take more than an hour if you follow the provided instructions correctly.
The 100% natural bamboo plank comes with stripe patterns on it. This makes it more durable, as it maximizes the stability of the shoe rack. Moreover, it’s designed to have smooth edges, and the sunken screws prevent snagging. This means you can place it anywhere in the house.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It may be helpful to know that due to the size of the racks, we couldn’t store more than 3-4 pairs of shoes. But then again, it’s meant for storage in compact corners of the house. Other than that, there was a creaking sound every time we sat on it, although we didn’t notice any cracks or damage.
[4-in-1 Hall Tree] Combining a hanging rod, a shoe bench, a...
[Practical Hanging Rod] The sturdy and stable top bar of...
A functional piece of furniture is an essential part of small living spaces. And this coat rack with a bench top gives you the best of both worlds without taking up too much space. It’s a 2-in-1 solution that gives your home a unique decorative look with adequate storage.
Why Did We Like It?
This unit contains a shoe bench, shoe rack, hanging hooks in one, and an anti-tip kit to ensure a safe home. And to ensure installation doesn’t take up too much of our time, the instructions are easy to follow, and the parts are numbered.
The shoe storage bench top has a sturdy rustic brown shelf and a strong steel frame that makes it highly durable. Besides, each hook has a load capacity of 66 lbs, while the engineered wood shelf has a load capacity of 176 lbs.
This is a practical piece of furniture to have in a small house, thanks to the dual utility on offer. And it can accommodate your shoes along with items like coats, scarves, and gym bags. The bench top comes in handy when you need to put on your accessories, especially in a hurry.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Some of the areas to screw in on the bench were set a little too deep. And because of this, we couldn’t tighten the bench, making it slightly unstable to sit on. Aside from that, a couple of metal parts had chipped portions of paint on them.
Sturdy, durable and built to last - Heavy-duty bench top is...
Shoe bench and storage - Each shoe rack shelf accommodates...
A shoe storage bench doesn’t have to be the most extravagant accessory in your house. And while this bamboo shoe rack bench is a little on the minimalist side, its 2-in-1 design gives you the perfect blend of accessibility and style.
Why Did We Like It?
Honestly, we weren’t sure whether assembling this unit would be easy. But thankfully, the package came with all the required tools and parts to put it together, and the instructions are just as easy to follow. It took us a little under an hour, which is reasonably quick.
The 100% bamboo benchtop has a smooth finish, is sturdy, and is long-lasting. It is also water-resistant and can be wiped down with a damp cloth after every use. Hence, you can place this benchtop in your bathroom, patio, bedroom, entryway, and practically anywhere.
When we found out this 3-tier shoe rack bench could hold up to 300 lbs easily, we were skeptical. But it has been able to hold the weight incredibly well. And there hasn’t been any creaking either, which usually is the norm with bamboo products.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The unit is pretty compact and slightly smaller than we had expected. While that isn’t a big issue, it would’ve been nicer if the bottom rack was a bit higher because all we could fit were flip-flops under there.
【COMPARTMENT DESIGN MEETS OPEN STORAGE】This shoe bench...
【EVERYTHING IN ORDER】End entryway messes with this shoe...
Finding the perfect shoe storage bench for a small space may not seem as easy, but this cubby shoe storage bench is the perfect combination of style and convenience. The structure and design add a touch of chic to your living space. And you get all of this at a great price!
Why Did We Like It?
A shoe storage rack would often sport same-sized cubbies ideal for someone who owns flip-flops, sneakers, or flat sandals. But that wouldn’t be able to store boots or high heels. With this shoe storage bench, not only do you have more space to store shoes, the shelves are adjustable. That means you can move them around to create extra storage for your shoes.
This shoe storage rack is constructed of particleboard, making it sturdy enough to sit two adults. And the cushioned top elevates the comfort factor and offers great support.
If you’re looking for a functional, compact piece of furniture, then this shoe storage bench would make a great addition to your living space. You can display this in the entryway or your hallway and can store as many as 10 shoes in one go, regardless of the kind.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The product looks and functions the way it’s supposed to, but that’s about it. The shelves have scratches on them and chip easily, even though it isn’t adjusted as much. And they look and feel brittle too, almost like they might break at any point.
Dimension -40" L x 12" W x 18" H; Load capacity: 198 lbs
Space Saving & Large Capacity - Each storage mesh shelf...
This Rolanstar shoe rack bench gives your house a rich, rustic vibe. It may be a large-capacity shoe storage bench, but it works incredibly well for small spaces too. On top of that, the solid wood has a smooth finish, elevating the aesthetics even further.
Why Did We Like It?
One of the things we have to compromise with when it comes to small living spaces is getting a storage unit that either doesn’t fit well enough or function enough. But this solid wood shoe rack bench serves both of these purposes. It is compact enough to fit small entryways or hallways but large enough to store your shoes comfortably.
Since you might end up placing this in the corner of your entryway, it comes with 5 corner protectors. It’s also accompanied by all the tools and instructions you’d need to assemble this shoe rack bench.
Furthermore, this shoe rack bench is constructed of solid wood and has a durable metal frame. The wood is water-resistant, easy to clean, and has a smooth finish, giving your room the perfect rustic look while maximizing its stability on different types of floors.
Why Didn’t We Like It?
Even though this unit is easy to install, we struggled with it for a bit due to the screw holes being slightly smaller. While we did manage to get them pushed in, it wasn’t deep enough, making the bench slightly unstable.
Organize Your Entryway: The shoe rack for entryway is a...
Space-Saving Shoe Rack: A combination of a shoe rack and...
Without a shoe rack, you tend to have a messier hallway or entryway because of your shoes. And it doesn’t matter if they’re scattered or placed neatly. But it will still feel messy. But with this 3-Tier bamboo shoe rack bench, you get to keep your shoes protected and the floors clean.
Why Did We Like It?
If you’re looking for a compact shoe rack bench that is aesthetically pleasing but does the job well, then this 3-tier bamboo shoe rack bench is the perfect product for you. It is made out of 100% natural bamboo, and is eco-friendly and water-resistant, making it the ideal product to use outside your bathroom, your bedroom, or the obvious place being the entryway.
This shoe storage bench is perfectly functional and helps save space by offering 3 racks to store your shoes, sit on, or display your pictures, plants, toiletries, and more. You might even have enough space under the last rack to store your flip-flops easily.
It is just as easy to assemble this simple shoe storage bench. You receive illustrated instructions, along with all the required parts and tools. And if you follow the instructions correctly, installation shouldn’t take you more than a few minutes.
Why Didn’t We Like It?
Even after being handed the required tools to assemble this shoe rack with ease, there were still a few hardships. The wood had a few scratches on it, and some panels didn’t even have screw holes on them. We had to push them a little harder to get the screws in, making the bench unstable.
Pros
Compact yet large capacity
Multi-purpose use
Easy to install
Space-efficient design
Cons
Screw holes were missing
Shoe Rack Bench Buying Guide
Shoe rack benches offer the dual function of storing your shoes while also allowing you to either display other items or use the top as a seat. And while this feels like it is reason enough to purchase a storage bench, there are various factors to consider before making that decision. So, we listed down a few for you.
1. Storage Capacity
No two-shoe rack benches are the same. While some shoe racks can hold only 8 pairs of shoes, others can hold anywhere close to 20-30. The bigger racks would make sense if you had as many shoes or were a collector. But purchasing a big rack for 10 pairs of shoes isn’t the most practical thing for you.
So, take your time and look into a shoe rack that’s more practical and convenient based on the number of shoes you own.
2. Shoe Rack Bench Material
Just like with their storage capacities, the materials used to construct them differ too. It ranges over a bunch of materials like wood, metal, fabrics, and more. If you’re looking for a portable, durable shoe rack, then fabric shoe racks are the ideal product and come at a great price too.
However, they trap dust a lot easier compared to other materials, so you will spend a lot more time regularly cleaning these shoe racks up. Similarly, while you wouldn’t have to clean as regularly with wood or metal-based shoe rack benches, they do happen to be on the pricey side.
3. Easy Installation
Many often opt to make DIY shoe racks due to them being cost-effective and creative. However, if they don’t work out the way they should, then things can be frustrating. So, to avoid this from happening, it is essential to look for racks that are easy to assemble or construct. While you don’t have to do it yourself, hiring someone else just adds up more to the cost.
Best Shoe Rack Bench Final Words
It is essential to have functional furniture around your house, even if you DIY it! Along with being aesthetically pleasing, they should also conveniently do the task it was meant to do. Shoe rack benches are simplistic, 2-in-1 functional pieces of furniture that allow you to easily save space in your home.
And we have a few favorites that make a perfect shoe organizer based on the points we’ve made above. Our first choice would be SONGMICS sturdy shoe rack bench because of its multi-purpose uses. The coat rack bench from VASAGLE comes next due to the 2-in-1 function of a shoe and a coat rack. And lastly, the bamboo shoe rack bench from Homemaid because it is water-resistant and durable.
We’re aware of the various options on the market depending on the few factors that we earlier mentioned. So, if you’re looking for the ideal shoe storage bench, then we hope this list helps narrow it down for you.
No one wants to deal with a pile of shoes every time they’re looking for something to wear!
Shoes aren’t only a necessity, but they also always make the perfect accessories to pair with all of your outfits. And just like your clothing has an allotted space to be stored neatly, all of the shoesshould have one too.
Regardless of the occasion, we wear shoes more often than most of our clothes. So keeping them out in the open to collect dust or just leaving them scattered around isn’t the best for your footwear.
Not only does this affect the quality of your shoes, but it also clutters the wardrobe or space in the house, making it look messy. Hence, we have curated a list of the best shoe cabinets that will come to your recuse.
Shoe racks tend to make a small space look a lot more compact, which is why many opt for leaving their shoes out in the open. But why do that when you can instead look into a small chic fold-down doors shoe storage cabinet?
It gives the cabinet an illusion of being slimmer and is perfect for narrow hallways and compact spaces. Hence, you can store footwear in style and wouldn’t have to worry about a bulky structure taking up all your space.
If you’re looking for a cabinet that not only has enough room but also looks good storing all of your shoes, then something like this will be ideal. You can neatly store them, without taking any extra space.
Additionally, you can customize it by using decals or paint over it. This way, it won’t look like a shoe storage space per se and would blend with your furniture well.
Wall Shoe Cabinet
A lot of shoe cabinets tend to take up even more space in your houses and end up looking bulky and awkward. But what if you could mount it on a wall? Aside from providing enough space to store shoes, it will free more floor space to either occupy or leave it as is.
A shoe rack often doesn’t do more than storing your shoe collection, which leaves many wary of investing in one. However, this shoe cabinet comes with a shelf space that allows you to store little knick-knacks - a plant, a bowl for keys, and more. It allows you to use up the extra space on shoe storage without having it look bland and empty.
A shoe storage is a lot more than just the perfect place to store your shoes. What if there’s some extra space to store the rest of your accessories? Storing sneakers and a pair of socks in the same space with this shoe cabinet makes it a lot more convenient.
The drawers can hold anything from keys, socks, and other accessories to pair with your shoes, preventing panic and scrambling around to look for them if you’re in a hurry. And the space-efficient design ensures that it makes the room look and feel a lot bigger.
It is always the hardest to accommodate large pieces of furniture like shoe cabinets in hallways, an entryway, or vertical spaces. They’re either too wide or not tall enough. But with a shoe storage rack closet, your room receives a massive boost.
Moreover, it can store more than just your shoes. For instance, converting it into a coat rack will make for the perfect accessory to keep in the hallway or entryway.
If you want to opt for something more accessible that can easily fit in the closet, then this shoe storage cabinet would be ideal. Regardless of whether you live in a small or spacious living space, optimizing and organizing your room will be easier with this shoe cabinet. You can even have some fun with it and match the aesthetic of your cabinet with the rest of the room.
Shoe racks with cabinet doors tend to add a lot more to your living spaces aesthetically. They also help keep the materials of the shoes dust-proof, ensuring that they stay in pristine condition for prolonged periods.
Besides, you can customize these shoe cabinets to match the rest of your furniture to avoid making it look too small or lived-in.
Shoe Storage Bench
Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be boring or stick out from the rest of the furniture. If you’re looking for something that stores shoes while adding something to the interior, this product would be ideal for you.
This chic bench shoe cabinet features a large space to store shoes and keep them out of the way. It would be perfect for the entryway allowing your guests to use the bench whenever they visit.
If you’re looking for something simple yet versatile, this cabinet with cubicles would be perfect. It is easy to clean and would fit perfectly well in the entryways or hallways. Aside from being easy to clean, it can double up as a piece of furniture.
It protects your shoes from dust and any other factors that could affect their quality. Plus, the air circulation on offer will prevent the formation of mold.
Narrow Shoe Rack
Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be placed in the entryway. You can place them next to the closet in the bedroom to make mornings more convenient. However, no one wants a bulky storage cabinet taking up even more space in their sleeping quarters. It would make the room feel smaller.
But a narrow shoe rack would be able to accommodate all your shoes without taking up too much space in the room. You can also make the best use of the open shelf on the left by storing miscellaneous accessories, while the shelves on the right store all the shoes.
Shoe cabinets don’t always have to be bulky, over the top, or have multiple compartments. Sometimes, simple A-Line shoe rack styles can do wonders, especially if you don’t have a large shoe collection. This shoe storage is low maintenance but also adds a touch of rustic charm to your room. And all of this can be done without having to compromise on quality or space.
Shoe Storage Cabinets With Doors
If you have a large shoe collection and have been collecting dust and boxes over the years, it’s time for a change. This shoe storage with cabinet doors neatly stores your shoes and keeps them looking and feeling fresh. Easy, convenient, and neat. That is what you can expect with cabinets like this.
Most racks tend to be very simplistic, rustic and give your room a contemporary vibe. But it doesn’t always have to be the same thing over and over. This shoe cabinet with a cane front is perfect for giving that vertical space in your home some much-needed sprucing up.
The pull-down doors are easy to operate, and they can easily store shoes while oozing some retro charm.
Why Should You Own A Shoe Cabinet?
It doesn’t matter if you have 20 shoes or 4, but keeping them unorganized would invariably result in a messy doorway.
Daily-wear shoes need proper air-circulation, while all of your shoes need to be kept away from dust and any other factors that would ruin their quality. And to further elaborate our point, we have listed a few more reasons you should own a shoe storage cabinet.
1. Keeping Your Shoes In Prime Condition
Certain shoes need to be stored in a specific way to ensure that they remain in good condition.
Moreover, no one would want to leave their fancy dress shoes out in the open, especially when they’re likely to step on them accidentally and damage them. Shoes go through a lot during the day, especially if you’ve got them wet. So, leaving them in a cluttered closet or a damp, cold corner can lead to odors and mold.
It may seem like getting a shoe closet would be an unnecessary expense, especially if you don’t have as many shoes. But this one-time investment will ensure that regardless of how many pairs you have, they will still look and feel new.
2. You Know Where To Look
Have you ever wanted to find a specific pair for an event, meeting, or just a casual meetup with friends? You might think having your shoes laid out would be convenient, but it isn’t the best thing to do.
If you live in a small space and are concerned about shoe cabinets taking up all of it, a shoe rack in the coat closet would be the perfect solution. Not only will it stay hidden away from your view, but it will also help neatly stack your shoes. As a result, you won’t have to conduct raids all over the place when it’s time to step out.
3. Your Floor Won’t Look Like A Mess
A busy house can make it nearly impossible to keep your floors clean, and shoes tend to bring in more dirt from activities that involve mud and more. Besides, they make your carpets prone to dirt, which can be a health hazard for anyone that suffers from allergies.
However, the right shoe cabinet will solve these problems and make your hallway or other spaces look less cramped up. This way, your shoes can avoid taking more space on the floor and will always be neatly stacked, regardless of how big the collection is.
Things To Consider
While it may be convenient to let your sneakers, slippers, and heels pile up next to the front door, doing this will only further damage them. Piling your slippers up can make the straps give away a lot quicker. The heels could get damaged due to being stored incorrectly or have scuff marks due to another shoe being on or around it.
Apart from this, there is dust, mold, and other factors that could affect the shelf life of your shoes. But by investing in a good, sturdy shoe cabinet, shoe rack, or more, avoiding this gets a lot easier. So, what’s the difference?
A shoe rack is more open and convenient, while a shoe cabinet is a closed shelf that helps with keeping them dust-proof and more. Since picking the ideal shoe rack can be a difficult decision, seeing how there are so many options on the market, we’ve curated this concise list to help narrow down your choices.
How Much Space Do You Have?
There are various factors to consider before investing in a shoe storage cabinet for you. However, one of the most important criteria would be to check the dimensions and availability of the space you’re looking to place it in.
If you’re looking to place it in the hallways or entryways, you’d most likely opt for a small, narrow shoe cabinet. However, if you’re looking to place it in the bedroom, it could be compact or large and spacious with added features like drawers or shelves.
This would partially depend on how many shoes you have as well. If it’s a shoe collection consisting of sneakers, heels, flats, and more, opting for a small, compact shoe rack wouldn’t be ideal.
Lifestyle And Storage Requirement
Another essential factor would be the kind of shoes you own. If you often wear heels and boots, the shoe cabinet would need to have wider or larger racks, but if you’re just a sneakers and flats person, getting away with a compact shoe storage cabinet is easier.
You also need to assess where to place the shoe rack as well. It needs to be accessible and shouldn’t result in wasting as much time looking for the right pair. And if you’re on a tight budget or just don’t want to invest in a shoe cabinet, DIY is the way to go. By constructing an easy shoe rack using materials from around the house.
Aesthetic And Functionality
Just because you’re looking for a functional piece of furniture, it doesn’t mean that the shoe cabinet shouldn’t look as good as it functions. And look for something that not only accommodates the different types of shoes you own but should also save space and be high on functionality.
So, if you have tall boots, opting for storage units with hooks or even a shoe storage cabinet with a bench would be preferable. If they double up as a bench and store all the shoes easily, they will fit in with the rest of the furniture.
Features And Styles
It is essential to consider your lifestyle, personal style, space availability, and more while looking for the ideal shoe rack. A smaller house would accommodate compact shoe storage cabinets with drawers that store shoes and the rest of the accessories. However, if you wear boots or sneakers, a shoe cabinet with a seat could be the best bet.
Shoe cabinets are supposed to make it easy to store shoes while maintaining their quality. However, having a few features like drawers, glass doors, shelves, and more will add a little more charm to your living space.
Final Words
Regardless of how many shoes you have, a shoe cabinet should help protect and display your footwear without having to worry about any damage. Adding an aesthetically pleasing shoe storage cabinet to your living space helps elevate the look of the room.
But if you’re someone who merely collects sneakers, heels, or boots, a shoe cabinet is the most convenient and safest way to showcase your entire collection. And all of this can be done without having to stack on boxes. It would, otherwise, only continue collecting dust without showing off any of your shoes.
If you’re looking to invest in a shoe cabinet, we hope this list narrows down the options and helps find the best shoe cabinet for you!
When it comes to cleaning your home, not a lot of tools can compare to the effectiveness of the steam mop. A steam mop utilizes the power of hot water in the form of steam to help you break apart dirt and grease, allowing you to clean it all up with a lot more ease than with a regular mop.
There are many steam mop manufacturers out there who claim to provide products of the highest standards. Bissell is a well-known brand when it comes to steam mops. Considered to be the top dog, it came out with the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop Model 1940 as one of the best products it has ever produced.
The innovative Shark brand is a relatively new entry to the industry, but one that is definitely capable of taking on Bissell. Their Shark Steam Pocket Mop Model S3501 is a product touted to be their top product yet.
If you are considering buying the best steam mop for yourself, the choice is going to be between these two. Both of them heat up the water pretty fast; they boast long power cords, a large reservoir of water, and a swiveling floor head. The question is: which one will suit yours needs the best?
Luckily, you will not have to spend money on both to test which one is right for you. We have used and reviewed both of these products so that you can get the information you need to make the best decision. We have also included an additional guide that will tell you all the factors you need to consider when you are buying a steam mop.
Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940 | A Steam Mop Comparison
Clean and sanitize sealed hard floors without the use of...
Power through tough, sticky messes with the flip down easy...
Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop has a large capacity tank that allows you to detach it from the unit to fill it up. Its handle is ergonomically designed for better handling and comfort during use. The floor head on this steam mop features an integrated scrubbing brush. The standard and scrub microfiber pads are both pretty easy to secure to the mop head and remove when you need to clean them up. The steam mop also gives you the option of using three different levels of steam.
SUPER-HEATED STEAM: The Shark Steam Pocket Mop turns...
QUICK & EFFORTLESS: Get on-demand steam ready in just 30...
Shark S3501 Steam Pocket Mop also has a swiveling head. It is a lot lighter on the back side, which makes it easier to handle in hands during use. The reservoir on this steam mop is also quite large and integrated into the steam mop. The container has viewing windows that allow you to check the water level. The microfiber pads have areas that capture particles instead of spreading them around the floor.
Let’s see how these two compare with each other in various aspects as we used them.
Reservoir Comparison
Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940
Whether you are looking for a slight bit of steam for gentle cleaning of a wooden surface or a powerful burst of steam to get the grime off ofthe kitchen floor, the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop has you covered. There are three different steam power settings on this mop that you can control using a digital control panel near the handle of the steam mop.
The reservoir holding all the water in the PowerFresh is a removable unit. This means you no longer need to worry about being careful while filling the steam mop’s reservoir. All you have to do is detach it and refill it with ease. A capacity of 16 ounces means that you will not have to bother refilling the reservoir frequently. You can get through your work quite fast.
Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501
If you are facing a big cleaning job but you do not have a lot of time for it, the Shark Steam Mop has you covered. In a matter of 30 seconds, the steam mop will heat up the water within the reservoir to bring it up to steam that you can use to clean up the mess in little to no time.
The main body of the Shark Steam Pocket Mop has a window that allows you to see how much water remains in the reservoir. You will know when to refill it when the water level has started to run low. Adding more water is a matter of laying the mop flat out and filling it up using a measuring cup. At a 15-ounce capacity, you will not need to worry about a lot of refills stopping the progress of your work.
Resolution
When it comes to the time taken for heating water, both the Shark and Bissell steam mops stand at the same level. Bissell PowerFresh can hold an ounce of water more than the Shark S3501 and it allows you to adjust the steam output based on the application you need it for.
The refilling process for both of them is different. The Shark has a built-in reservoir that takes slightly more time to fill up as compared to the Bissell, which has a refillable and detachable water tank.
Bissell PowerFresh has a swiveling floor head that allows you to weave in between a lot of different areas with relative ease. You can move it the furniture in your home without bumping into them and the long power cord allows you to get the kind of room you need to move around.
One thing in particular about Bissell PowerFresh that we really liked was the fact that it has an ergonomically-designed handle. The problem with straight handles is that they can tire out your hand and even cause you to lose your grip. While the Bissell is not as lightweight as the Shark model, it will not be too heavy for you to handle.
Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501
One of the winning qualities of the Shark Steam Pocket Mop is the fact that it is light. This makes maneuvering the mop around quite easy for anyone. The floor head on this steam mop is also able to swivel, which means getting to all the difficult areas is a lot easier while cleaning a home. The power cord is a substantial 20 feet long that allows you more than enough freedom to move around without the need to change electrical outlets.
It is important to understand that 4.9 pounds of weight are an industry-leading feature. The circular handle on the Shark Steam Pocket Mop has a very soft grip that combines with the lightweight to make it very easy for you to maneuver it.
Resolution
Both of these steam mop models offer you a lot of convenience with the swivel mop heads. Their power cords are around the same length (with the PowerFresh around 3 inches longer). Steam Pocket is a little over a pound lighter than PowerFresh. That being said, PowerFresh does boast an ergonomically-designed handle.
Floor Head Comparison
Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940[
The floor mop head is one of the best features of the Bissell PowerFresh. The scrub brush on it is built into the mop head, which allows you to flip it down whenever you need an extra bit of help to remove problematic grime and dirt. The floor head offers you two viewing windows that let you see whether the scrubbing has cleared out the dirt accumulated in the area you’re working on.
PowerFresh also comes with a microfiber scrub pad along with a soft one. This enables you to change out the mop pads based on the application you need it for. There is also a bit of room on both mop pads where you can insert fragrance disks. An integrated elastic band secures both the microfiber pads in place with a quick release action, which allows you to make the switch or take them out instantly.
The Shark Steam Pocket Mop features a rectangular mop floor head. With the straight-line design of the floor head and its ability to pivot on the joint, you can easily take care of the build-up dirt along the corners and edges, which are always left wanting with rounded floor heads. You will not have to make extra scrubbing efforts on those areas again.
Resolution
The Shark Steam Pocket Mop and the Bissell PowerFresh both have two microfiber pads, but PowerFresh is the one that gives you two options in terms of scrubbing power. The Steam Pocket’s scrubbing pads, on the other hand, are quilted. Bissell also allows you to see through to the floor using its floor-head windows and the attachment mechanism for its microfiber pads is faster to operate.
Both Steam Mops Offer You Great Value
As you can clearly see, both of these steam mop models offer you a lot of value. They heat up quickly to produce the steam you need for cleaning properly. Both of them have large reservoirs that can reduce the number of refills and have long power cords as well.
Steam Pocket Mop by Shark has an integrated reservoir while the Bissell has a detachable one, which you can remove to fill up. The Bissell PowerFresh offers a few more features than the Steam Pocket Mop like the three separate steam output settings and an integrated brush.
The Steam Pocket Mop has quilted microfiber pads, but the Bissell Steam Mop has two different types of pads that offer the option of using a scented disk as well. Choosing between the feature-rich Bissell PowerFresh and the streamlined Shark Steam Pocket Mop is a matter of personal preference.
Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940 Steam Mop Buying Guide
We have put together a concise steam mop buying guide. It highlights all the qualities that the best steam mops are supposed to have. This will help you make a better decision based on your needs and the qualities that both these models have.
Large Water Tank
The more water the steam mop can hold, the longer you can use it to clean without running out of steam. In that respect, both of these models happen to have substantial reservoirs with the PowerFresh just edging past the Steam Pocket by an ounce.
Easy Fill Design
A steam mop that is easier to refill is more convenient. An integrated reservoir means using a funnel or a measuring cup to refill the mop’s water tank. In this department, the Bissell PowerFresh one-ups the Shark Steam Pocket with its removable reservoir.
Variable Steam Control
Another area that the feature-laden Bissell PowerFresh takes away, is a steam mop that offers variable steam output options gives you better control in terms of the intensity you need for different cleaning applications for varying surfaces.
Easy Handling
Steam mops that are lightweight and have swiveling floor mop heads are ideal. Both of these models are light and they have excellent pivoting floor heads, but the Steam Pocket is a little over a pound lighter than the PowerFresh.
Long Power Cord
Power cords can vary from 16 to 30 feet for steam mops. The steam mop you should go for needs to have a long power cord. A longer power cord allows you the freedom to move around an area while you clean it without the need to change power outlets.
Both the Steam Pocket and PowerFresh offer pretty long power cords at around 20 feet with the PowerFresh featuring a 3-inch longer cord.
Built-in Power Switch
Steam mops that allow you to turn them on or off using a switch on the mop itself rather than relying on the outlet are much safer to handle. You can turn it on whenever you are ready to use it. Both of the models feature built-in power switches.
Fast Heating
Generally, steam mops can take up to quite a few minutes to heat up the water in the reservoir to bring it up to steam. You need to get a steam mop capable of quickly producing the steam you need to effectively clean around your house.
Both the Steam Pocket Mop and the PowerFresh can quickly heat up the water and make the steam ready for use within a matter of around 30 seconds.
Final Thoughts on Shark S3501 Vs Bissell 1940
Based on our experience of using the Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop 1940 and the Shark Steam Pocket Mop S3501, we feel that both of them are pretty capable machines, which offer a lot of solid value for someone who likes to keep busy cleaning the house.
There are some areas where the Bissell PowerFresh definitely overtakes the Shark Steam Pocket Mop, but the Steam Pocket Mop is lighter and pretty convenient to use. Choosing between the two is a matter of how you feel their qualities suit your needs.
We hope that the reviews, comparison, and buying guide will help you make the best possible decision for the best steam mop you can invest in for your home.
With this as an icebreaker, we are starting a series, that will guide and advice you in backyard landscaping design. After reading the last article , hopefully you will be able to use this in order to design your dream backyard using the information. An important item in backyard landscaping ideas and probably a must have is the fireplace…In this article we are going to see the different types, sizes, shapes and solutions for every situation and.
The awesomeness of fireplaces has made them a hugely desirable item. The great part about this is that the options are virtually endless. You can have basically anything you can imagine from a traditional design to a 100% custom one.
Exterior Fireplaces Meant to Enhance Your Living Quality
Traditional design
Recognizable arched shape and brick or stone finishing , this model will fit right in your rustic backyard.
Southwestern design
Most often than not finished in stucco, an outdoor southwestern style fireplace can be decorated with colored ceramic tiles. Also , for authenticity , the chimney structure would be a stair step one instead of a straight or slope one.
Modern design
Featuring clean-cut lines and industrial materials, this design looks great in the modern backyard garden setting. The best materials for it include stainless steel and/or concrete. The shapes fall into the rectangular, monolithic design category.
Mediterranean Design
Using a simple structure and colored ceramic tiles decorating the firebox are the defining features of the popular Mediterranean design originated in Morocco.
These are just a few examples of fireplaces that can transform your backyard into the little corner of heaven you always dreamt it could be. But you are in no way limited to popular tendencies. Adding a nice cozy fire , improves any moment, whether it`s scary story time, a special moment with your significant other, a relaxing read, or a drink with your friends. So having established that , let`s look into some other options of `firing things up `.
Portable Fire Pit
A portable fire pit gives you versatility. Because of the circular shape and portability, it`s ideal for when your friends come over and it`s a guaranteed cozy , homey atmosphere which everyone will enjoy. Here too you can choose from an entire array of stiles, shapes and whatnot. If you don`t like the hassle of making your own wood fire, some high end portable fire pit models come with a natural gas source, but nothing compares with a wood fire when enjoying some outdoor moments watching the sun slowly set in the summer evening. Mobility means that you can change the design of your backyard if you want to experiment, without having the constraint of the fixed fireplace, also if you decided to sell your house it can make it more appealing to a buyer that may not want a fire pit.
Built-In Fireplace
The epitome of outdoor home features, a built-in fireplace, preserves and matches the overall look of your outdoor home design and adding to your real estate value. A great enhancement to your patio , the built-in fireplace also provides additional comfort by being protected from wind which can turn your relaxing evening into a chaos of flying ash, smoke and ember. The choice in furniture for the fireplace-patio ensemble should be oriented towards low , deep comfy chairs, with soft cushions that maintain the homey relaxed atmosphere around the fireplace , placed around a coffee table. Bare metal should be avoided as it can get hot to an uncomfortable level due to high heat conductivity. Another great option for the seating arrangements is the usage of built-in seating. It can be designed as an extension of the fireplace and finished in accordance. Also the sky is the limit when it comes to layouts, style, shapes. The ideal dimension should be the same as above with low height and comfortable cushion, especially as the seats themselves would be made out of concrete , brick or stone, depending on the fireplace design. The height should be around 20 inches. Commonly known as seat walls, this seating arrangement is not a thing you should disregard when you decide what suits your case best.
We are continuing our Backyard Landscaping Ideas series with detailed and necessary information that will help you make the best and most suitable choice of the outdoor fireplace you always wanted. In this article of the Backyard Landscaping Ideas series we will go through placing, dimension, materials, finishing and more crucial points you need to go over when you decide to take your backyard to the next level.
Outdoor Fireplace Kit
Due to the fact that building a fireplace from scratch can be challenging, time consuming, and requires a certain level of masonry skill, a lot of manufacturers offer the option to buy a kit which contains all the tricky structural parts of the fireplace already prefabricated. This allows you to put together your fireplace on site easily.
The main components in the kit are the firebox and the chimney and it is crucial that they are manufactured with quality materials. Opposed to the classic brick and mortar which will degrade structurally in time due to cycles of contraction/expansion, composites like pumice and refractory cement radiate heat instead of absorbing it, which drastically improves durability.
A premium quality outdoor fireplace kit should incorporate a few important characteristics like : Interlocking joints which are important for structural durability, lightweight composite materials which improve durability and will be easy to put together also,a chimney manufactured out of refractory material with a proper throat design that guarantees it draws good, a good angle on the back wall to improve heat radiation.
Another advantage of the outdoor fireplace kit option is that all the kits in the market are properly tested and approved to standards similar to indoor units in order to ensure proper functionality.
Also , the variety of designs, sizes, shapes that you can find is practically limitless, and you can choose the one that suits your taste the best. One thing you have to do yourself though is have a foundation in place made to match the manufacturers specifications. This is of utmost importance especially if the model you chose has a larger height which makes it vulnerable high speed wind.
The finishing should be chosen in order to perfectly match the environment you picked.
Another option is to buy the fireplace fully finished and all you need to do is set in in place, anchor it and if desired connect it to a gas line. This option has a few disadvantages like the need of a crane or other type of heavy equipment do to increased weight, not finding a finishing that perfectly matches the surroundings, which is a must if you want your backyard landscaping ideas to come to life like you dreamed.
Outdoor fireplace design
When brainstorming with the family for backyard landscaping ideas , one thing should definitely not be underestimated. That is the location of your outdoor fireplace. The position you choose will have a great impact on the whole atmosphere that the scenery you create will induce to the observer. It will also establish how often will you use that outdoor fireplace. Keeping in mind that and outdoor fireplace becomes an important focal point in your backyard landscape should help you find an ideal position which will also not distract any attention from other focal points or zones that you consider of interest.
Ideal dimensions for an Outdoor fireplace patio
Due to the obvious fact that the functionality of a fireplace is concentrated at the front side, it can be located against any kind of wall, fence or corner whilst making sure it has the right amount of space in front of it to be enjoyed as it was meant to.
What does this mean in actual dimensions? Well, for a small fireplace you will be wanting about 12 by 12 foot (that is about 3.65 by 3.65 meters) while for a larger one you will need at least 18 by 18 foot (which amounts to 5.4 by 5.4 meters).
Local Construction Codes
This an aspect of utmost importance and it should not be overlooked, as it might cause a rebuild of your chimney due to wrong positioning or wrong dimensioning. Zoning regulation can and probably will include things such as minimum distance to an existing structure, property line etc. , height of the chimney and so on. The first thing you should do when and outdoor chimney appears on your backyard landscaping ideas list, should be contacting your local city planning office.
Privacy
Another thing you shouldn`t take lightly is privacy. Ideal for setting an intimate atmosphere, and outdoor fireplace should be placed away from prying eyes. Do your best to ensure that the front of your fireplace is out of sight while also taking into account that you shouldn`t block a potential view you might enjoy from your back windows like a beautiful lake scenery, a skyline or what have you.
Wind Direction
This can turn your calm relaxing atmosphere next to your outdoor fireplace into the hell on earth of backyard landscaping ideas. Predominant wind direction is a very important factor when deciding placing and orientation of your outdoor fireplace.
Make sure it will act like a wind breaker, which will create a sea of silence(well maybe a small lake) in front of it, allowing you to relax and have a good time.
A laser beam doesn’t damage the printed item and works like a knife to remove the surface material without stress. On the other hand, screen printing is more versatile and suitable for printing on various fabrics or even spherical surfaces.
To use the best screen printing machine for your business, you must determine the printing technique first. The two most popular options are screen printing and laser marking, which have several advantages based on the complexity of the printing job.
In today’s guide, I delve into the intricacies of both these methods and determine which technique is better.
Screen printing is a technique dating back thousands of years, whereby the design is printed on a screen by pushing the screen printing specialty inks through small holes. Also known as silk screen printing, it is a traditional screen printing process most suitable for single-color designs.
You can also use it for multicolor patterns to decorate the surface material, but the printing process takes place in several layers in such instances. But given its overall ease of use, the screen printing business has a large customer base in the apparel industry and comes in handy for printing on textiles by heating the ink.
But it’s not enough to know about the process, so I have listed the main screen printing equipment here -
Ink
Squeegee
Mesh
Marked surface material
Stencil
How Does Screen Printing Work?
Screen printing is easy to understand and involves soaking the mesh in ink while the squeegee is attached to the back of the mesh. As the ink flows over the mesh, the squeegee starts moving and presses the mesh against the surface material. This forces the ink through tiny perforations onto a stencil fixed in front of the mesh.
As the silk screening continues and the ink covers the surface, you will find that it replicates the stencil design. But why is it called silk screening? This is because the mesh used to create smooth gradients was once made from silk, but with time polyester has emerged as a better alternative.
I have also seen many screen printing machines use stainless steel and nylon meshes based on the type of application.
What Is Laser Marking?
Laser marking is a digital printing technique known as direct-to-garment printing that uses 4-6 colors to create detailed designs and multicolored patterns. The colors most commonly used for digital printing with a laser beam include -
Cyan
Red
Black
Yellow
Magenta
Green
Best of all, DTG printing doesn’t require complicated equipment and uses a black inkjet printer found in most commercial spaces. And just like screen print, DTG machines print multiple colors on promotional items like customized t-shirts or other garment styles.
But compared to screen printed items, DGT prints are more modern, having been developed some 20 years back. That said, while looking at screen printing machine types, I have realized that even DTG printing is pretty popular, with several high-quality laser printers having been manufactured recently.
Laser marking has become widely accepted, and some initial flaws have been ironed out. However, while screen printing is suitable for various purposes, laser marking is only used by the top companies, given the higher price of the technique.
So, why do organizations use it, then? This is because DTG printers don’t have the effort or setup cost of screen printing. All you need is to overcome the initial manufacturing cost and produce products in limited numbers for the first few months to break even until business booms.
Once you weather the storm, you can even supply on-demand orders with laser printers.
Key Differences In Screen Printing Vs Laser Printing
Before I discuss the advantages of screen printing and laser marking, here’s a summary of what makes each technique popular.
For screen printing, I found that -
It’s suitable for high-volume orders
It uses special screen printing inks
It’s best for single-color prints, such as logos or texts
Colors are more eye-catching on dark garments
Screen printing on a large surface area
Matches the exact colors of the design
Ideal for printing on synthetic fabrics and polyester
On the other hand, digital printing is better suited for -
Simple and smaller orders
Colors are more visible on 100% cotton fabrics
The print is soft and lightweight
Subtle elements and intricate skin tones
Many sizes and print locations
Smooth photographic elements and color gradients
Detailed designs
Multiple blends and colors
Let’s explore these points in further detail below…
1. Color Blending
For those who don’t know, color blending refers to the smoothness of the gradients and the ability to create more colors by mixing only a handful of shades. And this is where DTG prints stand out since the color dots are invisible to the naked eye, provided you use diffusion dither and print at 1200 dpi.
Moreover, a laser printer uses water-based ink, which is semi-transparent compared to plastisol, ensuring that the colors combine easily to create beautiful and smooth gradients. That’s why you can put the subtleties in design with DTG, like smoke fading into a shirt.
But screen printing uses plastisol inks and blends the colors through a technique known as a simulated process. However, color blending accuracy with this method is not as good as DTG, especially when printing tiny elements.
2. Vibrancy
While plastisol affects color blending, it comes in handy for traditional screen printing techniques, thanks to the presence of PVC particles within a plasticizing emulsion. Due to the opaque nature of this spraying ink, it creates a bright, white base for greater vibrancy, especially on dark clothing.
Plus, plastisol inks are available in multiple vibrant shades, which isn’t the case with the water-based inks involved in laser marking. I have noticed a decent base with such inks, but the final result isn’t as great, which gives screen printing the edge.
3. Details
If you want to create a detailed design, DTG printing is much better than screen printing. This is because a well-done DTG print consistently showcases fine lines, subtle elements, and fine textures throughout the surface.
On the other hand, screen printing doesn’t manage to hold the small details as well, and you will need to make some changes.
4. Color Matching
Matching colors is important when manufacturing orders for brands, for which screen printing is the clear favorite as it uses Pantones to duplicate most colors, including super-saturated colors. Moreover, since many brands have guidelines for using Pantones, DTG prints can seem completely out of place.
Screen printing matches the exact colors with ease, while laser marking uses process inks or gamuts which doesn’t guarantee that the most vibrant shades will match. Also, the opaque base means that the color on the shirt might leak through slightly, particularly on darker fabric.
5. Comfort
In terms of comfort, laser marking has a slight edge, given its ability to create soft and lightweight prints. This is especially important when designing dark shirts because the detailing and shades on such color garments are usually more.
Using too much color often affects the breathability and flexibility of the fabric, leading to sweat patches that laser marking helps avoid. You can also achieve similar results with screen printing by using a soft hand so that the ink comes out smoother for the shirt to be lightweight.
Another screen printing technique you can use is the distress effect which reduces the amount of ink covering the surface. But it doesn’t look right on all designs, so DTG is the better choice and is easier to use when comfort is your priority.
6. Durability
Durability is the ability of the print to retain its quality for a long time, something that laser marking cannot guarantee. In most cases, the color fades quickly from DTG printing, but that’s not the case with screen printing, provided you do it right.
The trick is to ensure that the ink is applied properly and heat pressed for curing to guarantee the plastisol doesn’t fade fast. So, if you have a t-shirt that has retained its color and design for several years, it’s probably been screen printed.
7. Consistency
When you receive an order for several t-shirts that need to look the same, trust DTG printing with your eyes closed. It’s possibly the best printing technique to generate multiple identical designs because the printer reads the digital file and replicates it directly onto the shirt.
In contrast, achieving the same consistency with screen printing is challenging since there are several factors at play, including -
Mesh type
Screen tension
Dot gain
Ink viscosity
Squeegee sharpness
Flash dry temperature
Registration
Pressure and angle
So, ensuring that all these factors are exactly right for every print is almost impossible, and that’s why there are more variations.
8. Versatility
The versatility of a printing process depends on the textile type, print locations, garment style, and placements. But screen printing is regarded as the more versatile option because its manual operation offers greater flexibility.
More importantly, DTG doesn’t work on all fabrics, locations, or product types, while screen printing works with most color garments, and there are fewer restrictions in terms of locations.
Screen Printing Vs Laser Printing Conclusion
Both screen printing and laser marking have their pros and cons, so which technique you use depends on the size of the order, garment type, design, and client’s requirements. As a rule, it would be best to use screen printing for bulk orders, given its greater flexibility and affordability than laser marking.
But when the design is important, and you need to bring out the small details on several products, laser marking is the better choice. My suggestion would be to at least use the best quality inks and let the design cure properly to achieve the desired results.
Tip
Many printing companies suggest you increase the text or image size to hide flaws in the small details when screen printing. And despite both techniques using halftones for the best results, setting laser marking prints at 1200 dpi makes the design elements more prominent.
Any door, be it in a commercial or residential place, is not complete without a door closer to make sure the door closes smoothly.
While a sliding door may not need such an attachment, any standard door that opens inwards or outwards is susceptible to slamming shut. This is where a reliable door closer comes in to help extend the lifespan of your door frames.
However, finding the best screen door closer can be challenging. After all, there are so many types of doors; aluminum, wood, and metal doors have many differences in construction and quality. To help narrow down your search for the perfect closer, we have gathered the best models on the market as well as a guide to aid you in making the most informed decision.
With that being said, let's get right into it!
Listed below are the Best Screen Door Closers:
Hampton Products: Hampton Products V150WH Door Closer stands out with a heavy-duty design, compatibility with thick doors, and easy installation. Its one key drawback is a rapid latching speed that could lead to abrupt closing.
Ideal Security: Ideal Security Pneumatic Storm and Screen Door Closer offers adjustable closing speeds and versatile installation options. A minor issue is a creaking noise it may produce while closing.
Greenstar Door Closer: Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer, with its unique touch 'n hold feature and smooth closing technology, offers convenience and safety. Limited wind resistance could lead to premature closing in high-wind areas.
National Hardware: The main strength of National Hardware's closer is a user-friendly top button that makes locking up easy. Being awkward as a top jamb is a drawback.
Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold: Strongly built for heavy-duty doors, this Greenstar closer excels in wind resistance and durability. Its hands-free operation is a plus, but the hold button is only available on one of the closers.
1. Hampton Products
The Hampton Products V150WH door closer has a heavy-duty pneumatic design to catch the door from slamming shut. It is compatible with a wood or metal door that swings outward. With the adjustable closing speed and easy installation, it is an excellent option for beginners and experts alike.
What makes the V150WH so great as a door closer is the durability it offers to protect the hinges and frame of the door. It is built for heavy doors, so the door's weight can be supported by the patented pneumatic system. What's more, it is compatible with Storm doors that are 3/4th of an inch to two inches in thickness.
Additionally, the door closer has an effective opening of 90 degrees for doors that open outward. This gives a set area that keeps the storm door from suddenly banging open, even in strong and high wind.
Whether it is wood or metal heavy-duty doors, attaching it to the door is a simple matter of screwing in the mounting brackets to the frame. The closing speed of the door closer can then be adjusted to close as slowly or quickly as you need.
One minor inconvenience that we found while testing out the V150WH was the sudden closing of the door towards the end of the closing motion. This made the frame suddenly slam shut, no matter how slowly the pneumatic system was adjusted.
What We Like
White finish
Heavy-duty door closer
Easy to install
Adjustable closing speed
What We Don't Like
Rapid latching speed
Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 15.75 x 1.81 x 3.75 inches | Weight: 1.08 pounds | Color: White | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes
2. Ideal Security
This pneumatic storm and screen door closer to Ideal Security has a tough yet flexible design that is perfect for any heavy door. It can be adjusted for having the right closing speed and can be used while replacing screens and door panels, which are a few of its user-friendly features.
Ideal Security has prioritized versatility in the installation of the SK1730B as it is possible to attach the jamb bracket on the top, middle, or bottom of the door. There is no loss of latching power no matter the location of installation, allowing the door closer to adjust to the design of any door.
Furthermore, this door closer is compatible with aluminum, steel, and wooden doors that are 1.25 to 2 inches thick. It is easy to say that no matter the door weight, the SK1730B is able to support the entire door.
Of course, being a pneumatic door closer, adjustment to the closing speed is possible via the end of the cylinder with an air screw. These adjustments also allow for changing out the screen doors or panels on a storm door for a seamless maintenance experience.
Although it may not be as big of an issue, we noticed that the parallel arm gave off quite a few creaks as compared to other standard-duty door closers. Thankfully, it is an easy fix by applying a few drops of lubricant to allow for smoother travel regardless of how many positions the door is opened at.
What We Like
Anti-rust construction
Adjustable closing speed
Smooth, sweep motion closing
Easy installation
What We Don't Like
Creaks when closing
Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 16 x 6 x 9 inches | Weight: 1.14 pounds | Color: Brown | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No
3. Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer
Sporting patented smooth closing technology; this Greenstar door closer has a touch 'n hold feature for ultimate convenience and safety. At the push of a button, the door closer will remain open, a valuable ability for any residential or commercial door closer. With an easy installation to boot, this Greenstar door closer is a solid choice for medium doors.
Obviously, the standout feature of this Greenstar automatic door closer is the touch 'n hold design. Being able to keep the door open at the push of a button makes moving in and out much easier, especially when your hands are full with groceries or other items. To get the screen door closer to resume its closing motion, simply open it a bit more, and it will slowly shut by itself.
Greenstar has made its own patented closing technology to make a smooth path that has reliable latching power when closed. Once released from the locked position, the parallel arm glides into the cylinder and seals shut.
Furthermore, this Greenstar closer is able to be installed where other parallel arm closers have been used. It has a straightforward installation, making it compatible with other brackets from various manufacturers.
While this Greenstar pneumatic door closer has a useful halting feature, this makes it vulnerable to high winds. These winds can compromise the structural integrity of the closer and prematurely close it, which should be taken into account if you live in a particularly windy area.
What We Like
Quiet operation
Straightforward installation
Easy replacement design
Smooth closing force
What We Don't Like
Poor wind resistance
Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 13.9 x 2.5 x 1.7 inches | Weight: 0.9 pounds | Color: Black | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes
4. National Hardware
Gone are the days of struggling against a closing screen door, thanks to this National Hardware door closer. A top button allows for the closer to lock up and keep the screen door opened at any position you need—definitely a handy feature for any lightweight doors that need an extra bit of support.
National Hardware has taken convenience and the user experience as the priority with their door closed. As far as screen door closers go, the ergonomic button is a rare but welcome feature. It is located on the top of the closet, making it easily accessible and comfortable to use.
Additionally, when released, the closer has a slow path, allowing the more delicate door frame of lightweight doors to be held intact for longer. This slower path is achieved by adjusting the closing speed during installation.
What makes this screen door closer a delight to use is the easy auto-release function. Simply pushing the door a bit more open will unlock the mechanism and free the door to gradually shut at the speed you set.
If there were one caveat to getting the National Hardware screen door closer, it would be the inability to use it as a top jamb. Putting it at the top of a door frame can leave the button beyond arm's length and make the hold-open feature obsolete.
What We Like
Non-greasy design
Powder finish
Easy to install
Simple hold open design
What We Don't Like
Awkward as a top jamb
Material: Steel | Dimensions: 2 x 4 x 4 inches | Weight: 1.03 pounds | Color: White | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No
5. Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Dual Door Closer System
Another offering from Greenstar, this particular model is designed as a dual storm door closer. It can withstand exposure and weight from wind, making it a heavy-duty attachment to keep doors secured. What's more, it also features the trademark hands-free open design for convenience.
What makes this storm door closer so unique is the dual design that is able to withstand the heavy weight of storm doors. It does not compromise on its durability, having an all-metal body that can replace a number of other door closers.
Furthermore, this dual storm door closer has a simple installation and features the patented smooth closing that Greenstar is known for. There are no unexpectedly fast or slower closing speeds; it moves at the rate you set it as while installing.
Of course, the highlight feature has to be the button that can be tapped to keep the door propped open. This feature works at any position and can be released by pushing the door slightly more open and allowing it to close. Truly, an easy-to-use design that comes in handy when you need it.
While it is not a dealbreaker, one minor inconvenience to this Greenstar dual storm door closer is the placement of the door hold button. They have only included it on one closer, meaning having the feature on both doors will require an additional purchase to get closer with the button.
What We Like
Designed for heavy-duty storm door
Versatile installation
Durable body
Hands-free operation
What We Don't Like
Only one closer has a hold button
Material: Steel | Dimensions: 15.9 x 3.6 x 1.6 inches | Weight: 2.14 pounds | Color: Bronze | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: Yes
6. Onarway Automatic Door Closer
The Onarway automatic closer is an incredibly heavy-duty option if you need the absolute best in top jamb closers. With the opportunity to keep the door open past 90 degrees, it is a one-of-a-kind opener that keeps heavy doors from closing too fast.
Right off the bat, this door closer stands out as a versatile attachment for any medium-sized door, whether they are indoor or outdoor. Material and right or left orientation is also not a factor; the door closer can be applied regardless.
With such a broad scope of applicable contexts, it is surprising to see that the closer is able to support the entire weight of the door in an open state. When opened past 90 degrees, the door will remain open at the position you leave it at. To close it, simply return it to any angle lower than 90 degrees, and it will softly close itself.
Furthermore, it has a durable build of antioxidative and non-corrosive aluminum alloy. This material also has the benefit of being resistant to rust and weather conditions while giving a steady, silent operation.
As this door closer is meant for heavier doors, it does have a heftier weight than other door closers. Young children and older people may find opening or closing the door to be challenging; more force is required to get the door to the locked open position.
What We Like
Automatic closing and opening
Weather and abrasion-resistant
Easy installation
Supports 99-132 lbs. doors
What We Don't Like
Strong push/pull required
Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 7 x 1.57 x 2.4 inches | Weight: 3 pounds | Color: Silver | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No
7. FORTSTRONG Door Closer
A high-quality piece of hardware, the Fortstrong commercial door closer is a seamless way to slowly and smoothly close doors. With two independent adjustment levels, there are a number of customizations in terms of closing speed that can be made.
One feature that came especially in handy was the option to adjust the sweeping motion and catch mechanism of the closer. The sweeping motion ensures the door doesn't open too fast, while the catch will limit the closing speed to the desired level. Each of these parameters together makes for a fully custom motion for the door to work precisely the way you want.
As the FORTSTRONG door closer has an aluminum housing, it is relatively lightweight and ideal for many residential doors. There is also a steel-encased body that brings an extra layer of durability to the entire construction.
For an added touch of convenience in the installation process, FORTSTRONG includes a full fitting template to follow in case you are drilling into a new frame. This cuts down on figuring out the correct measurements, allowing for a seamless installation process.
Similar to many other hydraulic closers, the FORTSTRONG door closer has a tendency to squeak when being opened or closed. While the noise level is not at a considerable level, it is still notable when compared to other door closers.
What We Like
Easy to install
Top jamb placement
Supports 144 lbs. doors
Wood/metal door compatible
What We Don't Like
Squeaking when moving hinges
Material: Aluminum | Dimensions: 10.2 x 3.2 x 2.8 inches | Weight: 3.15 pounds | Color: Silver | Smooth Closing: Yes | Heavy Duty: No
Among door closers, there are specialized types for external and internal doors that can significantly affect performance. Knowing the types and various features in these types of attachments can be the difference between a successful installation or not.
Keep the following factors and features in mind when looking for a door closer in order to get the best performance possible.
1. Closing Method
Depending on the type and weight of the door being supported, the closing mechanism is one of the crucial factors to be considered. There are two main camps when it comes to door-closing methods to soften the motion before it hits the frame.
A. Hydraulic Door Closer
One of the most popular methods used, the hydraulic door closer uses a system of air in pipes to open and close the door as smoothly as possible. Opening a standard door with this type of mechanism attached will result in the cylinder being compressed with air and then released when closed.
By making adjustments to the amount of air being used in each motion, the closing force can be altered. More or less air in the cylinder will equate to a faster or slower movement. Depending on the weight of the door, these adjustments can help make opening and closing the door more manageable and safer.
B. Spring Mechanism
A spring mechanism door closer is similar to a hydraulic system, save for the fact that instead of air, it uses a spring box. This spring box has an adjustable spring that is used to control how taut the door will open or shut.
Usually, a spring box mechanism will allow the closer to remain open until 90 degrees from the frame. As such, a spring box method is a popular option for household doors that need to be easily kept open with one hand.
2. Types Of Overhead Door Closers
Just as there is a selection of closing mechanisms to choose from, the installation and design of the door closer is another factor to consider. Below are a few of the most common overhead ones used in both commercial and residential doors. Each closer type has its own unique benefits and drawbacks, so look for the one with all the qualities you are looking for in a closer.
A. Standard Arm Closer
One of the most basic designs of door closers, this regular arm closer uses two arms to ease the door closed. While one arm is anchored to the frame, the other is attached to a spring box. Where this design falls short is that it sticks out perpendicularly from the door, which is not the sleekest design.
B. Top Jamb Closer
Seen as one of the best storm door closers in terms of design, a top jamb design is incredibly robust. Storm doors require substantial support to remain closed, which is why a top jamb is perfect, with its spring-loaded box that is mounted on the face of the frame of the door.
C. Parallel Arm Closer
Commonly seen in residential doors and other types of lightweight doors, a parallel arm closer is used for its clean aesthetic. Although its closing speed is not as strong as the other types of overhead closers, it is valued as it is not damaged easily. This makes using it on light doors like screen doors more feasible in the long run.
3. Types Of Concealed Closers
On the other end of the spectrum of door closers, there are concealed closers that can not be visibly seen when the door is closed. There are two types of concealed closers that can be used in place of an overhead design to give a cleaner, more polished look to the frame.
A. Surface Mount Closers
A surface-mounted door closer is placed on the back of a door frame to add support and act as a buffer. Typically, it is used for automatic doors that close autonomously. Additionally, they are available in a wide range of colors, so matching them to the finish of the frame and door is quite easy.
B. Floor Spring Closers
One of the most high-quality door closers in terms of design and budget, a floor spring is incredibly difficult to identify. Of course, this is the primary goal of a concealed closer, an illusion that is achieved by keeping the mechanism buried in the floor. Underneath the floor, these closers control how fast or slow a door moves.
As these types of closers are pretty costly to install, they are not always seen in residential doors. Commercial applications are more common for a concealed floor spring closer.
With that, we will wrap up our review and guide for door closers; hopefully, you were able to find what you were looking for.
All that's left now is selecting a model; our top choice has to be Hampton Productsfor its incredible durability. However, we would give the best storm door closer to the Ideal Security as it has a number of installation possibilities. As for the best screen door closer, the Greenstar Touch ‘n Hold Smooth Door Closer has a handy halted opening design.
Regardless of what door closer you decide to go with, one thing is clear. No longer will you have to worry about the doors catching you off guard and slamming on any heels with a closer installed. A door closer is a small step in the right direction to a higher quality of living; treat yourself today!
There are a lot of jobs that can be done from home nowadays. Usually, people working online, musicians, painters, but also accountants and lawyers could in theory work from home. It all depends on a lot of factors of course.
If you are lucky enough to have the chance to work from home, then you will need a place to work in. That is why we are going to show you designs of Scandinavian home offices that you can consider building in your home.
Don't get scared of the word "building" because building a home office, especially in the Scandi style, is usually placing a desk in the corner of an existing room in your home. Of course, this is a simple explanation. If you actually want to have a beautiful home office that will motivate you to work more, then you need to tailor it to your needs.
First off, we should make it clear that Scandinavian home offices are a very functional addition to your home even if you don't have the ability to work from home. It will prove useful to you anyway because you will have a space in which you can read, do some research, take care of the bills, or most importantly, practice your hobbies without anyone bothering you, or you bothering anyone.
So, now that we have that cleared up, what makes a home office a good home office? What's the most important thing to you when it comes to working and when it comes to home? Comfort. That is one of the biggest reasons a home office beats a regular office. You can do your job while enjoying the comfort of your home. No dress codes, and no generic furniture. Brew a fresh cup of your favorite coffee in your favorite mug and start working in your pajamas. Okay, maybe not in pajamas, but you get the idea.
Check out the designs of Scandinavian home offices that we have displayed in this collection and you will find plenty of awesome ideas!
1. Combine the study with the bedroom if space is limited
To work from home should be a treat and it surely needs to feel like it. Make sure you are comfortable, that you have everything that you need at your grasp, and that it defines you.
How do you like the stunning Scandinavian Home Offices above? How does yours look? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below! Also, if you want to learn about the four variables of professional task supervision, check out the AtTrack Blog website.
In order to give your epoxy resin workpieces a finished look after curing, you need to sand the surfaces to make them even.
Since you have looked up this guide, we are pretty sure that you take a keen interest in creating workpieces. Today, we are going to learn about the things you need to take care of while sanding.
We will also be taking a close look at the materials that you will be needing. Be assured that by the end of this article, you will have a firm knowledge of the different kinds of sanding and their pros and cons.
So, without any further ado, let us learn how to properly sand epoxy resin!
Sanding Epoxy Resin
We bet you know how hard the liquid-casting resin turns during curing; this makes it pretty hard for us to sand the surfaces of the workpiece. The main reason why it becomes so hard is that the abrasive paper used often gets dull almost immediately.
Furthermore, the hard resin totally deteriorates the quality of the sandpaper, which leads us to buy a new one. So, to use the sandpaper well and avoid clogging, we strongly advise you to wet sand epoxy resin surfaces.
▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...
Wet Sanding vs. Dry Sanding
There are essentially two kinds of sanding - wet and dry. Now, you might be wondering, which one is better? We have found out that wet sanding does a better job when compared to dry sanding.
There are a good number of reasons for backing this method. For starters, the abrasive paper employed during wet sanding tends to last longer than the material used while dry sanding.
Also, when you wet sand, you get rid of the unevenness almost immediately, and this process produces less dust because of the moisture. Another important benefit of wet sanding is that the surface of the workpiece becomes much more visible, so it can be taken care of anytime.
But, there are several occasions where dry sanding proves to be more beneficial. For instance, dry sanding works best on materials that are partially made of wood or other similar materials that are moisture sensitive. If you wet sand wooden materials, it would cause the wood to swell up and may also cause hideous stains on the surface.
Apart from this reason, wet sanding always ends up beating dry sanding in most cases. Dry sanding requires a lot of physical effort, and it also creates a good amount of frictional heat and dust. This heat may loosen the resin surface, which might give a matt shine to the surface.
Once the shine is gone, it is very difficult to have it back. Also, wear a mask if you do intend to dry sand as the resin dust is carcinogenic.
Advantages Of Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin
There are quite a few advantages of wet sanding epoxy resin, so let’s take a look at them now.
It Offers Better Results
Wet sanding offers significantly better results than dry sanding. The water cleanses the abrasive particles off the surface, which prevents the sandpaper from clogging, so it can be used for a long period.
No Risk Of Breathing In Dust
There is no dust involved in wet sanding, so it saves you from the dangers of inhaling carcinogenic dust. This is one of the biggest advantages of using wet sanding over dry sanding.
Disadvantages of Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin
Wet sanding comes with its fair share of disadvantages as well. We’ll take a look at them in this section.
The Dust Is Absorbed By The Water Used
The dust generated makes the water used dirty. Often, this contaminated water causes damage to the material, so you must ensure that you cover the materials with a well-built trampoline.
If you do not have access to a trampoline, make sure to cover it with a protective plastic sheet.
The Water Used Leads To the Swelling Of Wooden Parts
While wet sanding, the water can lead to the wooden parts swelling up. So, you must ensure that the wooden parts of the workpieces are not exposed during wet sanding. Other materials similar to wood that are prone to swelling should not be exposed to wet sanding either.
Waterproof Sandpaper | Explained
In order to conduct the process of sand resin by wet sanding in an efficient manner, it is important to get hold of water-resistant sandpaper. It is nothing but sandpaper that is made of silicon carbide.
These special kinds of sandpapers are available in grits ranging between 60 and 4000. Keep in mind that the coarser your water-resistant sandpaper is, the harsher it is for your workpiece material. Coarse water-resistant sandpapers can leave deep starches, which may be very difficult to get rid of.
So, while sanding epoxy resin, ensure that you start with a grit ranging near 120. And after getting the hang of it, you can steadily work up to a finer grit.
Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin 101 - A Beginner's Guide
In this part, we are going to take a look at how you can efficiently perform the process of wet sanding epoxy resin. Wet sanding is mainly performed by hand. We strongly advise you against using electrical equipment as it can give out electric shock because of the water used. You can consider using an air-power sander to work on large surfaces.
Furthermore, you can use a rubber sanding block to ensure that your abrasive paper remains flat during wet sanding. If you are going to sand on a curved surface, we recommend you use a suitable alternative.
If you do not want the hassle of using a sand block or pad, simply use your hand to keep the abrasive paper in a comfortable position before moistening it.
That being said, the downside is that waterproof sandpaper does not bend quite easily. This becomes a problem when you want to use it on uneven surfaces of workpieces or complicatedly shaped epoxy resin pieces. It is very difficult to bend the abrasive paper on these kinds of surfaces.
But, do not worry as there are several alternatives out there for such occurrences; one such alternative is using a Scotch Brite.
During wet sanding, you must ensure that you keep a large water tank nearby. If the ambient temperature is cold, you must use hot water. Always scrub the sandpaper in a regular circular motion while wet sanding epoxy resin, and do not forget to dip the waterproof sandpaper in the water frequently.
Furthermore, you should make it a point to only change the grit to a finer version when there are no traces visible of the older grit on the resin surface.
Tips For Wet Sanding Epoxy Resin
In this section, we’ll discuss some tips that will help achieve better results while wet sanding epoxy resin.
Wet The Surface Instead Of Wetting The Sandpaper
It is always better to wet the surface of your workpiece instead of continuously wetting the sandpaper. We recommend that you consider using a spray bottle to spray water on your workpiece frequently.
Use A Cloth To Remove The Existing Sand Residue
By removing the existing sand residue, you can keep track of how much you are sanding. If you do intend to change to a grain that is finer, ensure that the surface of your workpiece must be cleaned before.
Doing so will prevent your workpiece from sustaining scratches from coarse sand grains.
Use An Electrostatic Dust Cloth
You must use an electrostatic dust cloth if you consider painting right after you finish sanding. Using an electrostatic dust cloth will eliminate the smallest dust particles from the surface so that it does not affect the painting.
▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...
Dry Sanding Epoxy Resin 101 - A Beginner's Guide
Dry sanding is a better option when you are sanding a large area and when time and effort are your prime concerns. While dry sanding, there is going to be a lot of dust involved. So, we strongly suggest you wear a respiratory mask while you are dry sanding. As we have already mentioned before, you must work in an open area or at least in a well-ventilated room.
Keep in mind that these dust are highly toxic, so you must take all the required measures to protect yourself. While dry sanding epoxy, ensure that you start with 200 grit and then slowly make up to 1000 grits.
The sandpaper will likely clog during dry sanding, so we advise you to use a rubber stick to remove all the resin residue from the sandpaper's surface. Another important thing to keep in mind is that you should remove any visible sanding traces from your workpiece before changing the grit size.
Tips for Dry Sanding Epoxy Resin
Now, let’s talk about some of the key tips that will help you get better results while dry sanding epoxy resin.
Do Not Apply Too Much Pressure
It is recommended that you do not apply too much pressure while dry sanding epoxy resin. You must keep the pressure from moderate to light. Also, do not sand the same spot over and over again, as it will leave a depression that could show up while you paint your workpiece.
Use A Headlamp While Sanding
If you use a headlamp, it will help you locate spots that need more attention, such as scratches, dings, gouges, etc. If you do find out any of these, make sure that you re-sand them to get better results.
Be Attentive While Cleaning Up
You must be very attentive when you are cleaning up the dust after you are done dry sanding. Keep in mind that this dust is highly toxic to the lungs, and it can mess up the paint's adhesion to your workpiece. The sooner you remove the dust, the better it is for your workpiece.
▶ PREFECT FOR ANY ARTIST’S PROJECT - Puduo Clear Epoxy...
▶ EASY TO USE - Straightforward and no confusion, just mix...
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
In this part, we have tried to answer some of the frequently asked questions. We strongly recommend that you read these questions and answers.
What is amine redness?
Anime redness is a sticky layer that gets formed on your workpiece during the process of curing. This mainly happens when there is a consequential fluctuation in temperature in the course of drying.
Sometimes the amine redness is not visible to the eyes since its appearance may alternate, but it can be seen and felt as a dull layer in cold and humid temperatures.
The resin under amine redness is usually damaged, but you should remove it right away as the sandpaper will clog due to the malleable and sticky surface.
How to remove amine redness?
You can remove amine redness by using the following agents
Use soapy water and a sponge
Use a commercial spirit and a cloth
It can also be removed by wet sanding
Even though anime redness is not harmful, it should be removed immediately, if you are interested in giving an extra touch to your workpiece with special paint or epoxy resin. If you do not remove the anime redness, these materials will not be able to bond successfully with the resin.
How to smoothen the resin surface?
The resin surface can be easily smoothened by sanding it. We would recommend you gather all the necessary supplies. You will need sandpaper with a grit size between 400 grits and 1000 grits.
Place the resin on a hard surface and then start applying the sandpaper to it. Keep doing this until you flatten the resin surface.
Can I use a Dremel for sanding resin?
Yes, you can very well use a Dremel instead of sandpaper to sand resin. However, there is one problem, a Dremel does not sand as straight as sandpaper. If you use a Dremel to sand resin, it will leave a lot of gouges that you will have to deal with.
Another problem is that a Dremel is prone to peeling off resins very quickly. Be extra careful; otherwise, there will be depression in your resins that will have to be filled with more resins.
So, if you are hell-bent on using a Dremel, we suggest getting a pair of safety glasses for your own good.
What is the process of sanding resin art?
For sanding resin art, you need to first buy sanding blocks, wet them, and only then use them for sanding resin art. We strongly advise you to pay full attention during the entire process.
Ensure that you do not take much off; only cover the area by 1/8 inch since artwork resins have a self-leveling depth of 1/8. Keep sanding until you get the desired results.
Final Thoughts
There you have it! That was pretty much everything you needed to know about sanding epoxy resin. Sanding epoxy resin is very important in order to give your workpieces a finished look.
Wet and dry sanding have their fair share of pros and cons, with each meant to be done in different conditions and on different materials.
We hope you found this article informative and that it has provided you with some valuable information regarding wet sanding and dry sanding of epoxy resin.
With that, we wish to take your leave. For further queries or suggestions, kindly leave a comment down below.
Are you concerned about your impact on the environment? Then one of the most significant steps you can take is to minimize plastic usage.
Plastic is a versatile material, which is not only easy to manufacture but is also quite durable and flexible compared to others. However, most plastics are harmful to the environment and your health due to the toxicity of the chemicals.
So, how can you switch from using plastic to more sustainable materials? We suggest that you start by taking some small steps. For starters, how about switching to an electric tea kettle made of food-grade safe stainless steel?
But then there are numerous options for electric kettles, so how do you choose? That’s why we have done the research and compiled this list of the top 10 electric kettles without plastic.
So, without wasting any more time, let’s cut to the chase!
Mueller is a pretty well-known brand that manufactures a wide range of home and kitchen accessories known for being efficient. And its range of kettles is made from durable, high-quality materials. That is why we have picked the M99S Ultra Kettle as one of our top picks.
Fast Boiling – Quickly heat hot water with our 1.8 L...
Enjoy Hot Water – Attractive Borosilicate glass kettle...
Why Did We Like It?
The M99S features a body made from borosilicate glass and high-grade 304 stainless steel. And the BPA-free, heat-resistant copolyester used for its making is not as toxic or harmful to the environment as conventional plastics.
For starters, the kettle’s borosilicate glass body can last for a long time. In addition, its 360-degree rotational body helps in measuring the amount of fluid in the kettle.
As an important safety measure, it has an inbuilt thermostat that automatically shuts it off after 30 seconds once the temperature reaches 212 degrees Fahrenheit. It has boil-dry protection technology as well and, therefore, does not function if there is no fluid in it.
Furthermore, Mueller’s proprietary SpeedBoil circuitry can quickly boil 1.8 liters of water, tea, or coffee, which amounts to roughly 7 cups. The jug itself has a convenient cordless design, which makes it easy to carry and operate. It also has a nifty LED indicator that lights up when the kettle is in use.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Mueller M99S is a solid option for a plastic-free electric kettle. However, one minor issue that we noticed while using it was that it had developed a dark heat stain on the stainless steel underside. While it does not affect the quality or performance of this electric kettle, it can be visually unappealing.
Pros
Water, tea, or coffee can be boiled very quickly
All the materials are food-grade and non-toxic
Convenient and portable design
Lasts for a long time
Cons
The stainless steel underside can develop heat stains
Hamilton Beach is another well-known brand when it comes to high-quality kitchenware. And true to the brand value, the Hamilton Beach 40880 is a solid plastic-free electric tea kettle. Besides tea, you can use it for boiling water or coffee as well.
FAST BOILING WITH 1500 WATTS: This electric kettle boils up...
PEACE OF MIND WITH AUTO SHUTOFF: The automatic shutoff...
Why Did We Like It?
The Hamilton 40880 comes with a fully stainless steel body that is entirely food-safe and grants higher durability to the kettle. It can be used for quickly boiling water, a cup of tea, French press coffee, or hot cocoa. This is possible thanks to its 1,500-watt heat output, which can promptly heat 1.7 liters of any of the mentioned beverages.
In addition, it comes with an auto-shutoff function which provides boil-dry protection in the absence of fluids. And, thanks to the convenient water level window, you can monitor how much water there is inside the kettle.
This electric kettle is pretty easy to use as well, thanks to the cordless design, easy on/off switch, and easy pour spout. Moreover, you can easily remove the mesh filter, which makes cleaning this kettle effortless and convenient.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Hamilton Beach 40880 is a pretty good option for a stainless steel electric kettle. However, the body is not heat-insulated, and since it is made from stainless steel, you should be careful while using it. Even a slight touch can cause a nasty and painful skin burn.
For our next review, we have considered the CPK-17 PerfecTemp electric kettle by the home and kitchenware manufacturer Cuisinart. This is another high-quality, plastic-free electric kettle made from stainless steel. Consequently, it is both durable and convenient to use.
FAST HEAT-UP: The Cuisinart Electric Kettle features...
6 PRESET HEAT SETTINGS: With 6 preset temperatures ranging...
Why Did We Like It?
An exciting feature of the CPK-17 is the 30-minute keep-warm functionality, which increases the convenience of using this electric kettle. You can set a temperature, and it will automatically maintain that temperature for the required time. This eliminates the need for you to regulate the temperature manually.
The convenience is further enhanced by the one-touch heating controls and the 6 different heating settings. These features also make the kettle versatile in heating tea, coffee, water, or cocoa. Besides, the heating is pretty quick, thanks to its 1,500-watt output, and a memory feature retains the heat even after shutting it off.
In addition, it has a LED-backlit window that allows for measuring the level of fluid in the kettle. Its 360-degree swiveling base and cordless interface make it highly portable as well. Moreover, the removable scale filter makes it convenient to clean.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This electric kettle really shines due to its host of features. However, because of those same features, it comes with a pretty hefty price tag. So, if you are looking for a more budget-friendly option, this kettle may not be a very feasible choice.
When it comes to electronic kitchen essentials, COSORI is a brand that is readily recognizable. Likewise, the GK172-CO electric kettle is also a pretty popular product. If you are looking for a reliable and affordable alternative to plastic kettles, this is a worthy option to consider.
Plastic-Free Spout & Filter—— Glass spout and stainless...
Faster Than a Stovetop Kettle—— Boils a full cup of...
Why Did We Like It?
The GK172-CO is a high-quality electric glass kettle with a power output of 1,500 watts. As a result, it can heat up 1.7 liters of water in a relatively short time of 3 to 7 minutes. Besides boiling water, it can be used for boiling tea, coffee, or cocoa, so it is relatively versatile.
In addition, the borosilicate glass and 304 stainless steel used in the body make it durable and resistant to any type of damage. The handle is made from BPA-free material, which further makes it safe and non-toxic.
Moreover, the crystal clear glass body makes it easy to monitor the water levels. It comes with an auto shut-off feature that shuts it down after 30 seconds and boil-dry protection, which makes it highly convenient to use.
On top of that, it can be cleaned pretty easily, thanks to the wide mouth opening. As a bonus, it comes with LED indicators so that you can use it in the dark as well.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While using this electric kettle, we noticed that the temperature controls are somewhat erratic and inconsistent. As a result, this impacted the auto shut-off feature, failing to shut the kettle off after it reached boiling temperatures. So, you might need to keep an eye out while using it, which can be a little inconvenient.
If you have ever used Amazon before, then you have most likely stumbled across the Amazon Basics brand. It is Amazon’s in-house brand for electronics, household, and kitchen appliances that are often sold at low cost. Consequently, the Amazon Basics F-265C electric kettle is another affordable option.
RAPID HEATING: Powerful 1500W heating element brings water...
SAFETY FEATURES: The electric kettle features both automatic...
Why Did We Like It?
The F-265C is another electric kettle that incorporates glass and stainless steel in its build. It has a 1,500-watt heating element that can quickly boil water, tea, coffee, or cocoa. The maximum volume of fluids that can be boiled is 1.7 liters.
However, despite its relatively high capacity, it has a pretty compact design and can easily fit in the small spaces of your kitchen. It comes with a cordless design and can be easily detached from its base for easy serving.
This electric kettle is also equipped with safety features, such as auto shut-off and boil-dry protection. Furthermore, the cool touch handle makes it safe to hold at boiling temperatures, while its LED indicator conveniently lights up when it’s in use.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite being a highly affordable and convenient option, we found that it is prone to scratches and damage. This can be primarily attributed to the quality of materials used to coat it, which might raise questions about its durability in the long run.
Pros
Highly compact design
Comes with in-built safety features for enhanced convenience
When it comes to household and kitchen appliances, COMFEE is a pretty underrated brand. But its CEKG001 electric kettle is a high-quality model that uses very minimal plastic. In addition, it is affordable, which makes it a worthwhile option.
BPA FREE GLASS - Made from high quality Heat Tempered...
FAST BOIL - This 1500W electric kettle has concealed heating...
Why Did We Like It?
The CEKG001 is made from high-quality borosilicate glass and stainless steel in the interior lining. All of the materials are food-grade and BPA-free, and there is no plastic in the kettle’s interior.
Furthermore, the glass is fully heat-tempered and resistant to scratches and stains. There is a gauge on the clear glass body for measuring the level of fluid in the kettle.
This large, 1.7-liter kettle can quickly boil water, tea, coffee, or instant soup within 5 to 7 minutes, thanks to its 1,500-watt output. It comes with an auto shut-off function and prevents dry boiling of the kettle.
Moreover, the pop-up inner lid is attached to a cool-touch handle, which prevents any accidental burns. It also has a cordless design, and the 360-degree swiveling base can be easily detached to make serving easier. On top of that, it is pretty easy to clean, and a blue LED light acts as a visual indicator.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The CEKG001 is a pretty good option that is almost entirely made without plastic. However, there was one issue that we noticed with this electric kettle. The stainless steel base can become easily discolored due to heat stains and scale buildup. So, that can be somewhat of an inconvenience.
Pros
Highly versatile electric kettle
Can boil any liquid quickly
Relatively safe to use
Easy to clean
Cons
The stainless steel base becomes easily discolored
The fellow is a brand that makes stylish and appealing kitchenware that comes with an equally admirable performance. The Stagg EKG electric kettle is also no different from this tradition. It is a stainless steel kettle that has a visually aesthetic design.
STAGG EKG ELECTRIC KETTLE: Simple aesthetic meets powerful...
PRECISION POUR: Stagg EKG's sleek pointed spout is designed...
Why Did We Like It?
When it comes to style, there are only a few electric kettles that can outperform the Fellow Stagg EKG. It features a unique, minimalistic design that is both aesthetically pleasing and efficient.
The gooseneck kettle design prevents spilling, thereby making it easy to pour from the kettle. Furthermore, the sleek handle provides an effective counterbalance and firm grip, which allows you to control the pouring speed.
In addition, the 1,200-watt output can quickly boil 0.9 liters of water, tea, or coffee. Moreover, it comes with a hold option that maintains the temperature within the kettle for 60 minutes.
You can also set the temperature quite easily, and an LCD display shows you the current temperature and the target temperature. This provides added convenience to the usage of this kettle.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While it is a very sleek and stylish stainless steel kettle, we found the capacity to be comparatively less. This means that you can boil limited amounts of water, coffee, or tea at a time. Also, it is relatively more expensive than most of our previous options.
The DZ380 is an electric glass kettle by the kitchen accessories brand Dezin. It is a high-capacity and versatile electric kettle, which you can use to boil water, coffee, tea, soups, or any other similar foods.
Borosilicate Glass Body - The main body of the kettle was...
304 Stainless Steel - To make sure every cup of water you...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a BPA-free electric kettle that has a body made from high-quality borosilicate glass and food-grade 304 stainless steel. In addition to enhancing its durability, the stainless steel accents provide a visually aesthetic design, which makes it a pretty elegant option for your kitchen.
Besides, the kettle has a pretty high capacity of 1.8 liters, which is sufficient for 7 glasses of water, tea, or coffee. The crystal clear body helps you to measure the water quantity, as well as monitor the boiling process. Furthermore, a rounded, heat-resistant handle ensures that you don’t suffer any accidental burns.
Moreover, the 360-degree swiveling base makes it even more convenient for everyone to use. As an inbuilt safety measure, this kettle is equipped with an auto shut-off function to optimize the boiling process, as well as prevent dry boiling.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite its sleek looks and high-quality build, the DZ380 falls short in one significant aspect. It has a power output of 1,000 watts, which we found to be relatively insufficient for boiling water, tea, or coffee quickly. As a result, it is comparatively slower than many of our previous choices.
Pukomc is not as big or famous as some of the previous brands we have considered. But its kettles are known for being reliable and high-quality that can compete with any of the known brands. The same goes for the retro electric kettle, which has a highly favorable reputation among its users.
HIGH-QUALITY MATERIALS - The double-layer kettle liner,...
FAST BOILING - 1.7L / 1500W, one touch switch operation with...
Why Did We Like It?
One of the most striking features of the Pukomc retro electric kettle is its design. True to its name, this kettle gives off a retro vibe, which is a nice throwback to the kettles used in the old days.
However, do not be fooled by its design, as it is entirely made from food-grade stainless steel, which is not only safe but durable. It also comes with a unique 45-degree angle circular spout, which makes it easy to pour its contents.
Besides, it comes with 1,500-watt heating elements, which can quickly boil up to 1.8 liters of water, tea, or coffee. You can easily monitor the temperature, thanks to the thermometer on its side.
It also comes with auto shut-off and protection against boil drying, which makes it convenient to use. The convenience is further enhanced by its 360-degree detachable swiveling base, ergonomic handle design, and a glass window for monitoring water levels.
What Could’ve Been Better?
If you want a kettle that reminds you of the old days but comes with the performance of modern electric kettles, then this is an obvious choice. However, the paint has a tendency to peel off after a few days of usage. While it does not affect its performance, it can ruin the looks of the kettle.
Secura is a brand best known for manufacturing a wide range of home, bathroom, and kitchen appliances. Likewise, their electric kettles are also quite popular for their reliability and efficiency. That is why we have included their K15-F1E electric kettle, which is a safe and durable option for your kitchen.
Comes with 100% stainless steel interior. Water level lines...
Cordless design allows for easy filling, traveling and...
Why Did We Like It?
The K15-F1E has a stainless steel body that makes it highly durable and resistant to rust and corrosion. In addition, the kettle body is entirely food-safe, so you don’t need to worry about contamination.
One compelling aspect of this kettle is its double-wall construction, which makes it safe to touch while using, despite being made of stainless steel. It provides sufficient insulation from the heat so that you do not get accidentally burned.
Conversely, it helps to keep the contents of the kettle warmer for a long time. In addition, thanks to the British Strix temperature control system, it can auto-shut off to prevent excessive heating or dry boiling.
The kettle comes with a 1,350-watt heating output, which can boil 1.5 liters of water within 6 to 7 minutes. Additionally, it has a wide mouth opening, which makes it relatively easy to clean as well.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While it is claimed to be a plastic-free electric kettle, we observed that the interior of the lid has some plastic lining. So, that can affect the flavor of the water slightly. This is the only potential issue that we noticed for this otherwise great kettle.
Pros
Safe to use, despite having a stainless steel body
Highly durable and resistant to rust and corrosion
Highly convenient to clean
The contents remain hot for a long time
Cons
There is some plastic lining that can affect the water flavor
Electric Kettles Without Plastic Buying Guide
We hope that by now, you have gone through our list of the top 10 plastic-free electric kettles. So, have you decided on which one you want to buy yet?
Choosing the proper electric kettle can be challenging, especially if there are so many options available on the market. So, if you are still confused about which one is suitable for you, then you are not alone. We faced a similar problem when we went looking.
That is why, through some research, we have listed some of the most pertinent factors that you need to consider before buying an electric kettle. We hope that these factors will help you decide better.
So, without any further ado, let’s see what these factors are.
Materials Used
If you are looking for an electric kettle without plastic, the obvious factor for consideration is the materials used for its construction. Most plastic-free kettles use borosilicate glass and stainless steel, so you should get those kettles that are made from these two materials.
Durability
Durability is almost complementary to the above factor of materials used. This is because some materials, such as stainless steel, are more durable than borosilicate glass.
However, it doesn’t imply that glass kettles are not durable. The glass used in these kettles is pretty tough and is accented by stainless steel, which makes them almost equally durable. In any case, before making the purchase, ensure that the kettle is durable enough to handle your requirements.
Ease Of Use
Another critical factor that you should consider is the ease of use. This includes the design, safety measures, and convenience features included with the kettle.
Look for features such as ergonomic designs, a double-walled body, and other similar aspects that make the kettle easy to use. In addition, you should ensure that the kettle is easy to clean as well.
Heating
If your kettle has low heating output, you won’t find it very useful. In such cases, either it will take a long time to boil, or it won’t be able to heat the contents adequately.
So ideally, you should look for an electric kettle that has high power output. That will ensure that it can effectively heat tea, water, or any liquids in a short time.
Capacity
Before making a purchase, you should check the capacity of the kettle you are buying. A large-capacity kettle will save you a lot of time and will also allow you to serve a lot more cups each time.
Or, if you wish, you can fill it partially if you do not have that many family members. Such flexibility will not be possible for lower-capacity kettles, and thus, you should ensure that the kettle you want has a decent capacity.
Top Electric Kettles Without Plastic Verdict
With so many options, it is easy to get confused when looking for the most suitable plastic-free electric kettle. That’s why we have prepared this detailed review-based guide. And now that we have arrived at the end of this article, we hope that you find this insightful.
Before we conclude, let us reiterate our top picks once more. The Mueller is pretty convenient and relatively affordable, which makes it the best choice overall.
However, if you have a tighter budget, then we suggest Hamilton Beach since it’s cheaper. And if your top priority is convenience and quality, and you are not afraid to lay down a few more bucks for that, then you should get the Cuisinart PerfecTemp.
Now, with that out of our way, it is time to bid farewell. Take care!
It’s a common belief that all cutting tools are the same, but the real picture is different!
Although their basic purpose is, of course, the same, each tool is made to suit different cutting needs. That’s where all the difference between sabre saws and jigsaws, two very efficient cutting tools, lies!
Both the saws run on either battery or electric power, but each type has different features. Plus, there are hundreds of models available for you to choose from. So, choosing the most suitable product might seem complicated.
Hence, we try to make things simpler for you by putting forward this guide on sabre saws and jigsaws. We’ve selected the best models in the market for each type and have also included a detailed buyer’s guide to help you make the right decision.
If versatility is one of your major lookouts, going for this product would be a great decision. It is equipped with technology that is patent to DEWALT and offers other efficient features that make it one of our top recommendations. So, let’s find out about all the exciting features that this tool offers.
4-position blade clamp of DEWALT 20V reciprocating saw...
1-1/8-inch stroke length delivers a fast cutting speed
Why Did We Like It?
As we mentioned earlier, high versatility is one of the most compelling features of this product. And behind this magic is the blade clamp that allows you to adjust the blade in 4 different positions and facilitates flush cutting. In addition to this, the blade can reach tight places, thereby improving the performance manifold.
Now, performance ultimately matters the most when it comes to any tool, and this DEWALT saw ranks pretty high in that parameter as well. It is armed with a 1 ⅛-inch long stroke, which delivers an incredibly fast cutting speed.
Plus, a trigger with a variable-speed feature is offered, that provides a maximum of 3,000 strokes per minute, allowing greater blade control.
Also, a 3-year warranty is included with the product. So, you need not worry about extra expenses due to any issue that you might face with the tool within that period.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only downside of this product is that it vibrates a bit and produces noise that may become disturbing sometimes. You can deal with this problem by replacing the cutting blade with a better-quality one. That said, the noise might disappear after a few months of use.
This BLACK+DECKER sabre saw can give tough competition to our previous pick. Its high-quality build and super-efficient features work to deliver a superb performance that anyone would love. Thus, be it any household task or DIY project, you can complete all the cutting work effortlessly with this tool.
Cordless reciprocating saw features tool-free blade change
Pivoting shoe for increased control
Why Did We Like It?
The first feature of this product that caught our attention was its blade shoe. That’s because it provided us with greater control while turning or adjusting the angle. This in turn helps make the cutting more accurate.
The interchangeable battery of this sabre saw another feature that we loved. Its powerful 20-Volt lithium-ion battery system helps the saw deliver consistent service for the years to come. So, you are less likely to need any major replacement or repair work.
Staying safe during the task is also equally important, and to ensure that, this saw includes an effective electric brake, providing the necessary control and safety. Finally, you can change the blade very simply without any tools so that you can quickly get back to work.
What Could’ve Been Better?
If you order the product online, sometimes the saw blade might be missing from the package. So, do make sure you check it carefully as soon as it arrives. Also, you will have to pay a delivery charge for getting the saw blades after requesting for an exchange from the manufacturer.
Worx is one of the frontrunners when it comes to DIY, gardening, and lawn care products, thanks to its reputation of offering high-precision and powerful tools. And this convertible saw from the brand is one of its best products to date, coming with a range of incredible features. So, let’s move on and find out what it offers.
2 SAWS IN 1: Use the pivoting, push-button head to quickly...
DO MORE IN LESS TIME: The speedy reciprocating saw uses...
Why Did We Like It?
For those who want the job to be done faster, this is among the best saws you’ll ever find. What does the trick is the circular motion of the blades, which is much more efficient than the usual back-and-forth action. Also, this doesn’t cause as much strain as the latter system of blade movement.
What’s more, this saw offers you the convertibility that very few cutting tools would. By just pressing the push-button head, you can turn a jigsaw into a sabre saw and vice-versa as per your needs.
Yet another beneficial feature of this product is the dust blower integrated into it. As such, debris and dust are always kept away from the surface of each cut, providing better visibility and a cleaner working environment.
Lastly, the lightweight and compact design lets you maneuver easily to make more detailed cuts and doesn’t cause too much fatigue.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only thing that disappointed us a bit was the battery since it was not as long-lasting as other high-quality products. As such, you may need to replace it within a year of regular use. Hence, you would have to put in the effort to get hold of a new battery, besides having to spend more money.
When it comes to precision, there are very few tools that can compete with this jigsaw from BLACK+DECKER. It uses highly advanced technology to work out perfect cuts for different purposes, which makes it fairly versatile. Note that this model comes in dimensions of 11.75 x 4.38 x 9.25 inches and weighs 4.6 lbs.
HIGH PERFORMANCE ELECTRIC JIG SAW - 5 amp electric jig saw...
CURVE CONTROL TECHNOLOGY - Four curve settings for maximum...
Why Did We Like It?
Not all projects require the same type of cuts, which is why a tool with customized settings can be of great help. And this jigsaw is just the right product to go for, as the curve control feature offers four different customized settings to adjust the orbit of the saw for different projects.
Along with that, the powerful motor with variable speed can generate a cutting power of at most 3,000 Strokes Per Minute (SPM). An improved Wire Guard is another great feature of this jigsaw that makes for a perfectly clear line of sight for all precise cuts.
Working with this saw is also very comfortable, thanks to its compact rubber handle, which has a dust blower built into it. Note to forget the rare bevel-cutting feature that lets you make such cuts by an angle of up to 45°.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The lock ring of the wheel which keeps the blade centered may fall off sometimes, and you have to fix it in the right place each time. If this issue is faced too often, it becomes a hassle, so it will be best to request a replacement for such a lock ring.
Pros
Lets you adjust the orbit for different projects
Generates a very fast-cutting power
Makes for a clear line of sight
Compact rubber handle reduces fatigue
Cons
The lock ring of the wheel holding the blade may fall off
Another impressive jigsaw we came across was this product from DEWALT, which makes all your cutting work a breeze. It is packed with a set of excellent features that work to deliver highly efficient performance for a long time. Note that this product comes with a beneficial 3-year limited warranty and weighs 5.54 lbs.
All-metal, keyless shoe bevel with detents at 0 degree, 15...
Why Did We Like It?
Changing the blade becomes effortless and quicker with the keyless lever-action blade clamp of this jigsaw. Plus, the all-metal shoe bevel, which is keyless, has four dents at 30°, 45°, 0°, and 15° to enable easy bevel adjustments.
You also get an orbital action feature for cutting wood, which can be adjusted by 4 positions to suit different projects. And the variable speed trigger lets you adjust the cutting speed as well. Additionally, there is a shoe cover provided with the tool that protects the blade shoe from any scratches.
Furthermore, users can clearly see the cuts that they made, thanks to the dust blower built into the tool. As for blade compatibility, this saw can be used with all T-shank blades to facilitate optimal holding power and professional results.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Though the product offers a quite satisfying performance, the metal pins provided for fixing the battery are not efficient and durable enough. Thus, you might not be able to fix it properly with those and may have to buy additional pins.
Pros
Lets you change blades effortlessly
Enables easy bevel adjustments
Blade shoe is protected from scratches
Can be used with all T-shank blades
Cons
Inferior-quality metal pins for batteries
Jigsaw vs Sabre Saw Buyer’s Guide
Now, even though you’ve looked at some of the best sabre saws and jigsaws on the market, we understand that it isn’t enough to make a choice.
So, to have a clearer idea, you’ll need the answers to a few important questions, such as, ‘Which saw would suit your needs?’ or ‘How are jigsaws and sabre saws different?’. So, here’s a guide on the key points that you need to consider. These include their most important features and the various purposes they can be used for.
Precision
This is definitely an important parameter to consider when it comes to using saws. But note that the required precision may vary with the project that you’re working on.
As such, the two types of saws don’t provide equally precise cuts. The jigsaw is more accurate in this regard and includes a handy guide to using it for creating different shapes or cutting along different lines. Thus, you can easily handle tasks where making intricate cuts is absolutely necessary.
On the other hand, when using a sabre saw, the accuracy depends on how you would direct the blade through the material. As such, it is suitable for tasks that just require you to make rough cuts.
Power Source
Tools running on power would need a battery or a motor as the source, so it’s a crucial factor when choosing a jigsaw or sabre saw. Though electric power is channeled from a power outlet or a battery in both cases, the way it is distributed across the two saws.
While the power is distributed to the blade of the jigsaw, in the case of the sabre saw it is transmitted throughout the entire tool. Thus, the concentration of power in the jigsaw blade helps deliver more power cuts. Also, the motors of sabre saws are comparatively smaller than that of jigsaws and may have a lesser speed too.
Stroke Length
The stroke length is the distance by which the saw blade moves up and down with each stroke. Thus, the higher the stroke rate, the more is distance the blade covers while cutting any material. So ultimately, the work is finished faster.
Generally, sabre saws have greater stroke length, meaning that the job gets done quicker. On the other hand, jigsaws take a relatively longer time to complete the task. Note that jigsaws are used for more careful work such as cutting semi-circles or corners, so the shorter stroke length is also more favorable for them.
Blade
The cutting work, of course, depends primarily on the blade quality. Note that though the blades of these two tools might look the same, they are not entirely so. There are a number of differences, including the length and thickness. However, each type includes products of varying length.
As for sabre saws, the blade is more exposed in the front portion, since they need more area for cutting than jigsaws. And their length varies between 3 to 12 inches, though the majority of users go for 7 to 8-inch-long blades. Plus, the blade of a sabre saw is relatively thicker, which makes them more sturdy, thereby ensuring that they can tolerate more abuse during rough cutting.
Talking about jigsaws, they have typically shorter blades in comparison to sabre saws. These saws have an average blade-length of 3 to 9 inches. Another vital point to remember is that blades of jigsaws have different TPI count, which ranges from 7 to 25. It is this feature that makes jigsaws suitable for different uses.
Best Use
Since both these saws make cuts through a reciprocating motion, many people are likely to assume that their application will also be the same. But the reality is different, as there are major differences in features such as design and blade size.
Sabre saws are best for making rough cuts since it doesn’t give you as much control over the cuts as jigsaws. So, they can be helpful during demolition work or for ripping through large lumber pieces. You can also use them for sizing PVC pipes, making cuts in overhead positions, and cutting screws that are difficult to pull out.
Making more delicate and intricate cuts is what jigsaws are meant for. Furthermore, they let you make the compound, beveled, and effortless straight cuts.
As such, they can be used for other applications such as cutting laminate for home improvement or cutting ceramic tiles. In addition to this, craftsmen use these saws to make patterns in workpieces of wood.
Who is it for?
This will vary with the specific projects that you engage in, and some people may need both for different kinds of work. However, generally, sabre saws are more useful for hobbyists, home remodelers, and DIY enthusiasts since they often need to make rough cuts. Regular homeowners will also find this tool to be quite beneficial for purposes such as pruning trees.
Coming to the jigsaw, the greater versatility and accuracy makes it fit for professionals who engage in woodwork. It will be a very useful tool in their workshop. Plus, a professional craftsperson will find this saw really beneficial.
Cost
Note that you’ll get both high-end and budget-friendly options for each of the types. Thus, there is something available for every user.
However, while basic models of both saws can be found at lesser prices, the medium and high-tier jigsaws are slightly more expensive. Top-notch sabre saws with superb features and powerful motors wouldn’t generally need spending very high amounts.
Portability
You may have to use the power saw in different places, and thus portability is also a vital point to consider.
As a matter of fact, both the jigsaw and sabre saw will be sufficiently portable, considering that they are smaller than other types such as circular saws.
Though, sabre saws can be bulkier and larger than jigsaws, which are more compact and lightweight. Hence, a jigsaw can be considered a more portable option.
Shoe Length
The shoe of a saw protects the blade and hence is important for maintaining a consistent performance. As for jigsaws, the shoe is adjustable, which makes it useful for cutting tricky materials or for angled cuts. Sabre saws are relatively less flexible since they can’t be used as tabletop tools.
Choosing The Best Tool For Yourself
This would depend on the projects you would generally utilize the tool for. Say, for instance, if you need to cut through materials but don’t need absolute accuracy, the sabre saw would be worth purchasing.
But if you prefer to use the saw as a tabletop tool and engage in DIY projects that require accurate work, you can go for a jigsaw. With this tool, you can produce various types of cuts at a slower speed.
A point to note here is that sabre saws are often confused with tools such as scroll saws and reciprocating saws. But the latter are different since they are suitable for more heavy-duty tasks and have much longer blades.
Also, a sabre saw can be described as a combination of a reciprocating saw and a handheld jigsaw. That’s because many jigsaws can make cuts similar to their reciprocating saw alternatives.
Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw Verdict
With that, we reach the end of our guide. We hope now you’ll have a better understanding of what jigsaws and sabre saws offer. As such, choosing the best saw for yourself won’t be difficult now.
But before we bring down the curtains, let’s take you through our favorites from the list. If you need a jigsaw for intricate cutting work for DIY projects but also have a tight budget, the BLACK+DECKER BDEJS600C will be the perfect tool to go for.
However, the WORX WX550L Convertible Saw is ideal for those who engage in a variety of projects with different cutting needs. As for the price, it is more affordable than many other convertible saws in the market.
Not many things can match the joy of a warm American summer. The ideal weather, the longer days, and the perfect blend of family, friends, and food make it the most exciting time in the year.
Whether it is an intimate gathering of close friends or family, or an expansive get together featuring distant friends and relatives, the backyard of an American household becomes the center stage of games, fun, and activities.
A gas grill is the pivot of these gatherings, acting as a force that reunites all friends and family over the love for food. The long stories that Uncle Jim tells or the details of the funny events that older cousin witnessed in his time in Europe become more meaningful and exciting around the gas grill.
Since a gas grill plays a critical role in shaping a fun-filled night and ensuring that our friends and family have a great time, it is only essential to ensure that you get the best of the product.
SABER's cooking system allows for even temperature, no...
All stainless steel construction - firebox and internal...
Renowned for their gas grills, Saber prides itself on mixing the right dose of both innovation and entrepreneurship. With a reputation formed mainly based on the company's quest for quality, value, and integrity, Saber has become the frontrunner in providing popular leisure lifestyle brands.
Saber
As a premium grill company, Saber is responsible for the creation of various gas grill models to aid a family in living the exciting American Summer. Taking advantage of the infrared technology, Saber launched new products using an superior version of Quantum Infrared technology which increased the BTU output.
However, of all the models offered by the brand, the one that stands out for providing premium technology is the R50SC1417. The product from the model that catches attention instantly and is often presented by Saber as premier of the Elite series is the Saber 3-Burner Infrared gas grill.
Saber Elite Series
The Saber elite series has caught the attention of critics and users alike. With polished edges and a body made of stainless steel, the elite series presents a luxurious and stylish look, justifying the name it has. In addition to the sophisticated look, the elite series features LED lighting over the knob.
Easy to use design and texture and the addition of accessories in the grill make the use of the grill easier in comparison to other series and models.
Saber R50SC1417 3-Burner Infrared Gas Grill
One thing that Saber claims and boasts about is their uncompromising attitude towards the quality of their products, regardless of the price they have to charge for it. The design and quality of the Saber gas grill is a testament of their ambitions because we all know that for most users looks do matter.
In addition to the looks, the significance of the design rests on the ease of use it brings to the customer. What good is a gas grill if the design that adds to the beauty of the product also acts as a hindrance and barrier in using the product.
Made entirely of stainless steel, the Saber Grills R50SC1417 , unlike some other gas grills, is easy to clean. Consequently, the sound cleaning features add to the longevity of the product, making it a long lasting appliance.
You can clean the bright annealed stainless steel by just using a damp cloth. It is not only the cleaning that makes the product easy to use. The presence of sufficient storage cabinet with two stainless steel doors gives the users the option of storing refreshments and condiments. The material used in the formation of the gas grill makes the product considerably heavy, which is why at the base there are gliding caster wheels that aid in the movement of the appliance.
The creativity of the makers is at full display in the form of a systematic control panel. Made of stainless steel, the panel has three knobs in the front and two separate knobs in the left. To aid the use of the gas grill, the Saber Grills R50SC1417 has tables on both sides of the device. The knobs lead to an opening on both side of the gas grill, resulting in a burner on one side and a table on the other.
Features
Like all other gas grills, the Saber Grills R50SC1417 has three stainless-steel tubular at the base. However, a separate compartment for each ensures that the burners have a heat zone of their own. The division of the burners in boxes of their own adds an element of safety to a burner.
At the bottom of the gas grill lays a stainless-steel sheet of perforated metal, the sheet lies just under the cooking grate. The perforated metal is the source where the heat of all the components of the gas grills accumulates. The heat that radiates from the cooking grate and the perforated metal ensures that the food is ready.
Studying and comparing the design of gas grills, you will realize how close you are to an accident when using the products. The grease that is common in all other gas grills does not reach the burner in the Saber patented cooking system; this prevents the risk of a flare-up. The Saber Grills R50SC1417 is one of the few gas grills that don't have any flare up.
The grilling system ensures that there is even heating throughout the gas grill. In addition to eliminating the risk of a flare-up in the system, the Saber R50SC1417 is cheaper to use. The reduced propane consumption limits the operating cost. According to an estimate, the reduction in the consumption of propane in the gas grill is by 30%, making the change a welcome one.
Moreover, just like any other gas grill, the distribution of heat and airflow in the system plays a crucial role in ensuring that there are no or limited chances of food burning in the system. Although the design and the mechanism of the grill ensure the supply of heat and air to all parts of the gas grill, the appliance still able to save gas by giving you the option of heating only the space you need for cooking.
A significant upgrade from the previous installments is the space available. The 675 square inches of grilling space constitutes of 500 square inches of primary cooking area. The abundance of cooking space, the unique cooking grate, and flame tamer design provide an even surface ideal for cooking.
Given above are some of the standard features found in the Saber Grills R50SC1417 . However, before we study the pros and limitations of the gas grill, it is imperative to be aware of the standard specifications found in all Saber Grills model.
Complete awareness of the standard specifications will help us in determining whether the producers of the gas grill have made an effort to go an extra mile with the innovation of the product.
Common Features
Since the primary motif of the different gas grill models is the same, there are bound to be some similarities in all the products.
1. Mirror Polished Edges
Since the Saber Grills R50SC1417 belongs to the elite series, it takes advantage of what is usually considered an exclusively elite feature.
The mirror polished edges along the lid, control panel, shelves, and doors is a feature that is common amongst all elite gas grills by Saber
2. Stainless Steel
Another factor that adds to the luxury and sophistication of the product is stainless steel. However, it is not the factor that is found exclusively in the product we are reviewing. Stainless steel plays a huge role in the formation of many products that don’t fall under the domain of an elite gas grill.
The 304 stainless steel burners, the emitters, and the grate systems are examples of some of the features that are common in other gas grills too.
3. Simple Cleanup
This is another feature that all of the products of Saber can boast about. The front access ease tray found in Saber aids the cleaning of the grill while ensuring the safety of the user and the environment.
Burning off and brushing away are some of the common ways to clean all of the products from Saber. However, in the case of Saber Grills R50SC1417 , a damp rug will be enough to clean the outer body of the product.
4. Safe to Use
In addition to the quality and reliability of another feature that the makers of the elite series pay special attention to is safety. With the use of the exclusive EZ NG technology the makers ensure that the product is safe to use, the ease of natural gas conversion is another aspect of the technology that makes products from Saber stand out.
An idea of the common standard features found in all gas grill models from Saber will help us in identifying the special features found exclusively in Saber. Giving a positive or negative review solely based on the standard features is unjust, as reviewers, it is imperative for us to assess the product through all aspects and give our feedback once we have developed a conclusive opinion about the product.
Special Features
Some of the special features that differentiate the Saber from other products are as follows.
1. Dual Control Side Burner
The Saber Grills R50SC1417 has two separate side burners which give the users a remarkable heat output of 18,000 BTUs per hour. The main three burners provide a heat output accumulating to 24,000 BTUs. The side burners aid in warming, boiling, and cooking.
2. Cooking Zones
As discussed earlier, the Saber Grills R50SC1417 has three cooking zones. The presence of the three zones gives the user ample space to work with, unlike the other gas grills. A user can now use one, two, or three zones all at once.
3. Halogen Lights Under the Lid
Although there are LED lights already present in the gas grill, the addition of two halogen lights under the lid is another feature adding to the ease of use of the product. The halogen lights make it easier to use the product, especially in the dark outdoors when there is not much light around.
4. Stainless Shelf Inside the Cabinet
To add to the storage capacity of the gas grill, the producers have enhanced the storage options allowing customers to store more than they did before.
5. Reliable Ignition System
With an electrode at every burner, it is safe to say that the ignition of the system is not as dangerous as it once was. The spark or heat generated by the ignition system heats the electrode to a high temperature resulting in the flow of current in the entire gas grill.
As a whole, the advent of Saber Grills R50SC1417 provides users with innovative solutions to fundamental problems. The storage system and the halogen lights are examples of the convenience the product adds to the lives of the users.
People can do without both extra storage and light, but it is only when you use the product, the realization of the significance of these factors dawns on you. Similarly, the cooking zones and the reliable ignition system add to the Saber a perfect blend of both creativity and innovation.
In short, the new product stays true to the identity of Saber gas grills, while experimenting with innovation and making the lives of the user more comfortable.
Specifications
Now that we have an idea of the proportion of standard features and new innovative features in the Saber Grills R50SC1417 , we move on to the specifications of the product. An idea of the specs and the dimensions of a product are enough for the user to decide whether the product suits their needs or not.
The presence of heavy-duty nylon casters makes it easier to shift the 193.12 kg gas grill around the yard. Propane is the fuel source of the product, rendering all other fuel types ineffective on the product.
The broad dimensions of the product (56.5L X 25.0W X 48.4H) are again a testament of the excess available to a user. To adjust for the large size, the gas grill comes with a large carton size.
The three burners and the varieties of cooking surfaces available are all part of the specifications the product has.
Warranty
The most important part of the discussion for all electronic appliances is the warranty. Studies and reviews of electric and gas products are incomplete without the mention of the warranty. Similarly, no brand today is foolish enough to launch and offer products without providing for the warranty.
As consumers, we want to ensure that the money we are investing in a product has a good value for return and that we can use the product without any difficulty or damage. Similarly, companies offer a warranty as a show of confidence, warranty on a product indicates that a company has full faith on its production methods and there are very low likelihoods of the product not functioning properly after purchase.
The Saber Grills R50SC1417 offers a warranty on the parts and components of the product. Since there are products which are critical to the proper functioning of the product, they have a higher warranty attached.
The burner tubes and the carryover tubes responsible for sustaining the flow of heat and air in the grill have a warranty of 10 years attached to them.
The components found at the base of the grill have a five-year warranty. These components include the cooking grates, warming rack, and emitter and burner box.
The whole grill, however, has a two years warranty including the painted and other remaining parts.
Pros and Cons
A detailed analysis of the benefits and limitations of the product always help a user in choosing the best. While the exercise of jotting down the pros and cons of the products is ideal for comparison, it still helps in giving the reader a more profound insight into the brand.
Pros
Made entirely out of stainless steel
Product comes with a lot of new accessories; the grill has a rotisserie kit and a cover standard
Fuel efficient
Cons
Water from a leaking pipe may enter the grill and the drip pan
According to many consumers, the product is a little overpriced, the accessories and the material of the product contribute to the high price the product has
Accessories
Like any other appliance, the gas grill also has its fair share of accessories that add to the experience you have when using the product.
Unfortunately, the accessories are not part of the deal, and if you are looking for the ideal barbecue experience, you will have to purchase the accessories separately.
1. Premium 3-Piece Tool Set
The toolset is fully equipped with all that you need for making your favorite meals while using the gas grill. The soft grip handles ensure that the user is comfortable while using the tools. The set comes with a stainless steel spatula and fork. Plus locking tongs are also part of the set to aid you in the challenge of locking and releasing grilled items.
2. Dual Skewers
The 14-inch tine and flat handles of the accessory keep the hands of the user away from the heat and make it easier to turn and flip the product.
The dual skewers have dual tines that keep the food from rotating too much and falling off.
3. EZ NG Conversion Kit
The kit helps in converting the Saber Grills R50SC1417 from EZ to Natural Gas. The conversion kit can turn any propane grill that has a model number in 17 or higher.
The Saber has so far received positive reviews; there are doubts over the price of the product, and some users have also raised question marks on the flames which, according to them die down easily.
Apart from the one odd poor review, customers are satisfied with the performance of the product and are specifically pleased with the easy-to-use nature of the gas grill.
Every woodworker needs a router. Without one, it isn’t easy to do a lot of finishing work, like cutting the angles of the wood, shaping and molding and other things that are required to give your woodwork a neat finish. But, even though a router is usually used by hand, having it installed on a table makes it a lot better because you have a better angle to work on and it isn’t taxing on your back as lumbar support is important in the long run. Plus, a handheld router can be hazardous if you lose focus as opposed to a mounted router.
But, router tables can be quite costly. So, what if you could make one for yourself? These DIY router table plans will help you do just that. With these 49 designs, you can easily build a router table on your own, for less than half the price of a manufactured router table.
This large router table looks fantastic and is very practical. Not only does it give you a big working space, but it also enables you with enough storage space. It resembles an old-school television stand and has four wheels to move it around. There are four drawers, with two small and vertical and two very large and horizontal ones. It is easy to make and looks great! So, why wait? Go create this table by following these easy steps.
This lovely and petite router table falls into the category of router tables that have no add-ons and are just meant for you to do what you’re going to woodworking. It has four neat wheels to move it around and a lovely white finish on the top with blue accents. You can set up this rig in a short time following this very visual how-to guide.
Wall-mounted router tables are great for lumbar support. You don’t have to bend too much to work on the wood. Plus, they are great space savers and also look lovely installed on the wall. This router table is very functional and even though it is wall mounted, provides enough storage space with four large shelves to keep the tools in.
This is a very compact and comprehensive router table that can be created from a pre-existing table saw. By following the guide, you can fix the table saw to the router fence to create a table saw and router table, thus providing you with two options to work rather than just one. Plus, it looks very neat and has generous storage space for all your tools.
This is a very neat-looking router table with some lovely accentuated edges to appeal to your aesthetic sense. Thanks to the plans provided, you can not only build this router table with ease but also give it the finish that will make it look more like decor and less like a tool kit. It isn’t elaborate and doesn’t have cabinets, but is still efficient and great to look at.
This is the most do-it-yourself and cheapest of the router table idea on the list. Trash cans are used for pretty much a lot of things other than storing trash, but using a trash can as the base for a router table? Who would’ve thought that? By drilling a hole at the bottom of the trash can to pass the cord, and putting a sandbag at the bottom for dust collection and for the stability of the can while you work at the top. You can attach the router top to the trash can by fixing it to the holders and voila! Your router table is ready.
The family handyman always has great designs. This route table is another one of a list of lovely DIY appliances. It is a little more elaborate than other tables on the list and can cost you up to 500 dollars, but the result is fantastic and very satisfying. It has a large storage space and a single cabinet, with the option of making multiple ones inside.
This bench-mounted router table has more space than you can ask for. It is installed over a workbench and hence doesn’t require you to set up a separate router table and waste both your time and space. It is a neat design, and the workbench already covers your requirement for storage space.
Wire spools look cool, but they can be put to use for many creative projects once they don’t have a wire wrapped around them. So, if you do have one in your store room that’s waiting to rot and invite termites, then take it out of its misery and put it to use by turning it into a router table. It is sleek and looks unique and offers the table enough base to sit on. Plus, this is quite simple to build.
This is a rectangular router table that is long rather than tall, and it is pretty simple in its design. It has a pretty thick working table and a long drawer right below it. There is extra space at the bottom to keep more tools, and the height is right enough for good lumbar support.
This portable router table is lightweight and looks great. Because it is portable, you can shift the router from one place to another in case you feel like you've worked enough in a single spot and the monotony is creeping upon you.
Another plus point of building this DIY router is that it is very affordable to make. Just for less than a hundred dollars. Moreover, the instructions are detailed and quite simple, so it shouldn't be difficult for you to follow them.
This is a beautiful and vintage-looking router table. It has enough space for your router to be mounted on and also has three large drawers and eight small drawers for you to keep little and medium-sized tools and other miscellaneous stuff in. It has four standard wheels to move the table around. I like the vintage knobs and holders for the drawers and the color scheme of it. You can make this router table on your own with as little money spent as possible and then you can get onto shaping and molding wood for more elaborate woodworking endeavors.
Quick and Easy Router Table
This is a box-shaped router table with an enormous space underneath and a drawer to keep your tools in. This is installed on a metal stand which you will most likely need to purchase. Nevertheless, the storage space and the space on the surface are enough to provide you with the requirements you need to get working on wood shaping.
This is a pretty simple and standard router table that does the job it is meant to without providing you with any extra options. You have no drawers in this nor do you have any place to store your tools, but if you are new to carpentry, this build is just right for you.
The All Around Router Table
If you have a router table that is basic and doesn’t have a cabinet, then you might think of going for this one. It is not too different from the standard router table design but it is tall and thus provides good lumbar support and has a large cabinet space that utilizes everything from the table for your storage needs. This way you won’t need to keep your tools elsewhere and pack up everything neatly at the end of the day.
It isn’t a basic model, and so it might be a little difficult for someone who isn’t a bit experienced on the carpentry side, but the plans are detailed enough for you to get a good grip on the make of it and give it a shot. It has a rectangular shape with six drawers, and two cabinets, one open and one lidded. The space on the top is pretty standard. If you want to organize all the tools and essentials properly, you ought to try this one out.
If you’re really short on budget and want to build something that won’t cost you much, then this router table is for you. It can be made for just $100, and it still looks uber cool. It also has a single storage space, big enough to store the tools yet not compartmentalize them. The paint job on this router table makes it look neat and furnished. It is also pretty space-saving.
This is the router table that will satisfy your every woodworking and routing need. It has such a large storage space, with drawers and cabinets ample enough to keep every tool on the table at the end of the day or to access them easily. It’s easy to make and looks pretty great.
The trash can router table idea has been discussed before in this list, but this one is even simpler than the previously mentioned idea. All you need to do is place the router table top onto a trash can, even one that is presently in use for its actual purpose.
This router table also works as a decorative piece, in case you plan to retire it someday and still don’t want to discard it. It resembles a vintage dresser, and the cabinet is pretty stylized and great to look at. Not only can you build this but you can also give it a neat finish and a polish with a paint job to make it look more appealing. It has enough storage space apart from giving you a big enough space to woodwork at the top.
This is a very stylish router table. Its white color and blue accents are a standout. It is tall and with a big space on the top. Containing four drawers and two uncovered large cabinets, it provides enough space under the table to keep all your essentials. This router table was made by Jane, a blogger, and you can make it too.
This DIY router table is out to prove a point. It intentionally resembles a readymade router table, and once you go into the details, you will see the resemblance is very intricate indeed. It has a neat fence, a large cabinet, and a sag-free top and it is something you can create for far less than what you’d spend at a store.
This router table looks beautiful. It has an H-shaped design and has three drawers installed at the bottom, painted white, contrasting the lovely orange on the sides. It also has a protruding space on the top which is both functional and decorative. I would love to have this router table in my workshop and especially because, for all its polished appeal, it is easy to make on my own.
I love foldable furniture. There is something very clever about it, and it also feels good just to fold up and hide away something that was just the past moment standing out. This foldable router table helps you save on storage space. At the end of the day, once you’re done with creating amazing wood stuff, you can just fold up the table and retire for the night.
You can create stopped cuts on this router table because of the adjustable pressure option provided by the pressure jig. So, when the wood is routed at the edge of the table, the cuts are easy to make. Even though it is a DIY, it resembles an IKEA build due to how neat it looks. There is ample space to set up your woodworking rig.
Cheap and Easy Storage Router Table
This one’s for you if you are short on storage space and also short on budget. This is a small router table that can be mounted on another table and yet does its job well. Even though it does not provide you with extra space for storing tools and isn’t as movable as other router tables, when it comes to the platform, it has more than enough space for woodworking.
A table mate is a friend whose router table needs to have its back and keep it clean. This dust-collecting appliance is also easy to make and can be built for as cheap as fifty dollars. This guide will show you how to make it in simple steps.
On the outset, it looks like a TV table or a clock table, but this different-looking router table also has a very special and convenient function, one that will help you with your lumbar comfort. It had an adjustable height option, so you can determine its height and set it according to your preference. Plus, it offers a lot of cabinets and shelves so that you don't need to put your tools and other essentials elsewhere and can access them anytime.
This is a gorgeous router table. It also has a very organized cabinet space that will come really handy for you. The instruction manual is far too detailed and covers every single aspect of building this router table, mentioning every cabinet space utilization separately. Give this one a try.
I love this router table. It looks like a perfect piece of furniture to have in my home. Its finishing and its design afford it the luxury to be of use even after retirement as it can work as a lovely table in the house outside the workshop. It is delightful to look at and offers a lot of storage space and crafting it with the guide is not that difficult a task.
Wall-mounted router tables are extremely convenient. As is known, even though they are fixed to a wall, they provide you with some moving space around it and help you work with a correct posture. Lumbar support is really important. Otherwise, spasms and exhaustion can cause a lot of back aches and other back issues.
Plus, a wall-mounted router table can be folded and closed off when not in use and hence save space for you.
But, this one might require more experienced carpentry know-how, so be wary.
The 3-in-1 Router Table
This one’s made for more than just routing. This advanced router table does a far more intricate job for you, and if you are a carpenter with some pretty elaborate woodworking methods and ideas, then you will absolutely adore this one. It has a circular saw and a jigsaw installed into it apart from the router, and that is a big plus. Moreover, it has a pretty standard design and has no drawers but does have enough storage space below.
A woodworker's friend, this router table has so much to offer to you, given that you decide to build it first. Not only does this router table have a big working space for you to dremel, shape, and chisel away your wood easily, it also offers a lot of additional storage space with multiple cabinets and tool storage shelves, including shelves for keeping small tools.
This is a solid wood router table with a very retro design. It has a large working surface area, and it can also be used to lay out, and design plans when you're not working on wood. But, apart from the working area, it also has abundant storage space and will help you store all the essential tools and miscellaneous stuff with ease. And though it looks pretty complex, building it should not be a tough task once you follow the guide.
This one's a pretty ingenious way to build a router table. Not only does it save you a whole lot of man hours and a lot of dollars, but it also makes your work incredibly easier. All that you need to do is take a wardrobe base that is out of use and retrofit a cupboard door with it to build this beautifully vintage router table.
With this table, you get a working area that is bigger than usual, and you also get cabinets to store your tools. Sounds like something I would go for.
This is a very simple router table plan that won’t burden your pocket all that much. It’s quite a basic design really. Just a square-shaped table with a router installed in the center. So, it won’t really need an expert hand to build. It does compromise a bit on the space side, and also doesn’t really provide you with any actual storage space for your tools, but its minimalistic design fits budget constraints, and its size saves space in your workshop.
You don't always have to start from scratch. Sometimes you can just recycle and make use of something that you already have. In this case. An old study or work desk will work best for your workshop. Even if you aren't experienced in carpentry, you can retrofit your desk into a router table with a big working area, just by following these easy plans. What you get in the end is a lot of saved time, a lot of saved wood and a lot of saved money, and a fully furnished router table.
This router table looks like it was sold in a shop and made professionally. But, it is actually a DIY project in its finished state. That’s the advantage of having a highly detailed and orderly how-to guide. What’s more? The finished product will cost you half of what you’d spend on buying the same in a shop. Of course, you could just buy the thing in the first place, but where’s the fun in that when you’re venturing into carpentry?
This DIY router table is incredible in its shape and design. It has some complex mechanisms, and the build looks more like a miniature futuristic industrial complex and less of a router table. So, it’s safe to say that this will require an above-average carpentry skills to construct. But, the plans have a lot of images for visual reference, and the instructions are comprehensive and yet easy to understand. So, you won’t be struggling with the understanding part.
This is a box-shaped router table with a large woodworking area on the top and ample space on the bottom for keeping your tools. There is a large space and below it a slim and retractable drawer. This is mounted on a metal stand, the height of which can be adjusted as per your requirements. It is pretty simple in design and won’t be difficult for even a beginner to make. Plus, it won’t cost you much to create.
I love that this tabletop look alike a router table. It is small, accentuated, and adorable to look at. It does provide space to keep your tools, even though it isn't enough for a lot of them. But it does not compromise the working space. The how-to guide is very helpful too and will show you how to build this pretty router table in the best and easiest way possible.
This is a router that becomes easier to make if you already have a table at your place. What’s more amazing is that it also works as a table saw, and not only as a router table. By building a two-in-one router and saw table, you’re saving on money, time, and on space, and your work becomes more efficient as you don’t have to work on separate tables for sawing and shaping. Moreover, the plans are pretty comprehensive and easy to understand, with a simple language and mode of instruction.
This is as simple as it gets. This is a router table that does not offer you any storage area, no cabinets, no compartments, no drawers, or shelves. It is just a table with a router set up installed at the top. But if it is something that you want, then it does its job quite efficiently. Plus, it has a decent size for you to work on. And because it is simple in its make, it is as easy to create. So, you'll be done making it before long.
This particular router table looks extremely hi-tech but isn’t too difficult to make. What I really love about it is how different it looks. A very modern and mechanical design, but also efficient, it looks professional and readymade. Because it is mostly made out of materials that aren’t wood, it does come on the costly side of DIY options for you. But, ultimately, the price and effort are worth the finished product.
This a stunning DIY router table plan. It looks fantastic and has such a steampunk appearance to it. But, it is not really difficult to make. Plus, it won’t cost you a lot of money to make because it can be made for less than fifty dollars. It’s installed on a table stand that has a height adjustment option, and it is quite lightweight, so you can carry it around if you plan to work on the go. It’s also pretty small, so it will save on your space and the plans to construct it are easy to follow.
There is a unique component in this particular router table. At the outset, it looks like a standard router table with its vintage design and a few cabinets, but it has a router lift built into it, and that helps you with wood processing. This does require an adept carpentry skill level, but you can give it a shot even if you’re a beginner. That’s because the how-to guide for this has extensive plans that are easy to follow and will help you not only with detailed steps but also with reference images. Though not super cheap on the cost side, the finished product is satisfying.
Instead of giving you a single option to go with, this how-to DIY guide gives you three lovely options to choose from. These router table designs are fantastic and have unique design elements that make them look appealing.
So, what DIY router table plans impressed you the most, and which one did you find the easiest to make? Is budget a constraint for you or the skill required? Do share the design you ultimately choose to build!
If the interior of your home is analogous to the brain, then that would make the roof comparable to a skull. In other words, it protects the delicate interior of your home from the outside elements. However, despite its importance, the roof accounts for only 3% of the total house construction cost and sadly the right roof types are not adapted to one`s architectural solution, roofs are are often simply overlooked. That is mainly due to the ignorance of people. While an inexpensive Gable roof might save you some cash, it might end up doing irreparable damage in case you live in an area prone to cyclones or tornadoes. On the flip-side, if your area is far from windy, a Gable roof will definitely be more fitting. In fact, it will be more useful compared to a hip roof.
Why you ask? Well, to find the answer to that question and more, you need to go through this article first.
What are you waiting for?
Read along to find out everything you need to know about various roof structures.
What better way to start our extensive roof guide than with the highly popular Open Gable Roof? But, before we get into the details, let us first explore Gable Roofs in general. Gable roofs have been used for time immemorial. In fact, they were used quite generously in ancient Roman and Greek architecture. What makes them so popular?
Well, for starters, they are comparatively inexpensive and also have a wide range of versatility when it comes to the design. Moreover, gabled roofs have a simple design principle which makes working on them quite easy when compared to the other complex roof structures in this article. However, that is not all; gabled roofs are also incredibly weather resistant and offer great protection from rain and snow.
Now that you have a clearer picture of what a gabled roof is, let us explore Open Gable Roof structures. Open gabled roofs are possibly the most common gabled roof structures used in the US. The main distinguishing feature of this structure is that the triangular extension at each end of the house is open.
The following are the two types of Open Gable Roofs based on the direction the Gable is facing:
Front Gable Roof. In this structure, the front-gabled building faces the street with its gable. Buildings with this type of roof were extremely common in the medieval Gothic period. You can still find buildings with this type of roof structure in many German city streets. The image that follows shows a building with a front gabled roof.
Side Gable Roof. In this case, the sloping side of the Gable faces the streets. Buildings that came up in the later Renaissance period were influenced by this structure. The next image illustrates a building with a side-gabled roof.
Box gabled roofs are extremely similar to open Gable roofs, with one small exception. On box-gabled roofs, the triangular extension at each end of the house is closed off instead of being opened. That is the only difference between these two structures.
Whether you want the triangular extension at each end to be closed or open is more of a personal choice than a practical one. However, we can tell you that the use of extra materials in the case of box-gabled roofs will definitely make it a little more expensive than open-gabled roofs. If you are on a tight budget, we suggest you go for the open gabled roof structure for your house. Below an image illustrates a standard building with a box-gabled roof structure.
The Skillion and Lean-to-Roof structures are quite commonly used in modern homes. A standalone skillion roof has a single slope which resembles the roof of a shed. When the Skillion Roof is combined with a lean-to roof, it results in a sleek and modern look as seen in the illustration below.
Combining these different roof structures together has an aesthetic benefit. It allows you to build walls of varying heights, just like the house featured in the illustration below. Interestingly, this roof structure does not have a roof ridge like every other roof. That is primarily because of the varying elevation level of the sloping structures.
Next up on our list is the Dormer Roof. Now, the Dormer Roof isn't a completely different roof structure, rather it features an additional structure on top of an existing roof structure. This roofed structure usually contains a window and it projects vertically outwards beyond the plane of a pitched roof. The photo below shows a standard Gable Roof house with two Gable Dormer structures.
While dormers can drastically improve the aesthetics of the building, they are also extremely practical as they can be used to extend the interior space whilst inviting additional light inside.
Various types of dormer structures that are commonly used in buildings follow.
Gable Fronted Dormer. Gable Fronted Dormers have protruding windows with gabled roofs. This type of dormer is by far the most common as it is comparatively less expensive to build compared to the other dormers on this list.
Hip Roof Dormer. Hip Roof Dormers are also quite commonly used in buildings. While a standard Gable Fronted Dormer has two sloping sides, this dormer structure has an additional sloping structure in the front.
Whether hip-roof dormers are more attractive than Gable fronted dormers is up for debate. However, this type of dormer structure is generally more expensive compared to a simple Gable Fronted Dormer.
Flat Roof Dormer. As its name suggests, the roofed structure of this dormer is flat and does not have any ridges. However, for practical purposes, sometimes the flat roof is slightly inclined to let rainwater slide off. In case you live in an area with heavy rainfall, we suggest you go for sloping roofed dormers instead of flat ones.
Shed Dormer. Shed dormers are quite similar to flat-roof dormers and do not have any ridges. However, unlike flat roof dormers, shed dormers have a greater level of inclination for the roofed structure. This is certainly more practical in case you live in an area with high rainfall.
Wall Dormer. Now, a Wall Dormer is not an entirely different dormer structure. Rather it is a dormer that is positioned in such a way that it rises vertically with the wall of the building. In other words, the face of this dormer is co-planar with the face of the wall below it. These Wall Dormers usually feature a gabled roof structure on top.
Eyebrow or Eyelid Dormer. This type of Dormer places more importance on the design rather than the functionality. As its name suggests, this low and wide dormer has a curved roof that resembles an eyelid.
Link Dormer. There can essentially be two types of link dormers; one which connects one part of the roof with another or another which houses the chimney. The latter is similar to a wall dormer, with the addition of a chimney.
Bonneted Dormer. Also known as a segmental dormer, this type of arched roof dormer is commonly found in Victorian structures. They are mainly built for improved aesthetics and not for practicality.
Nantucket Dormer. These are possibly the largest type of dormers. The entire structure can be broken down into three segments, out of which the outer two segments are simply gable dormers. The middle segment features a shed dormer and it connects both the gable dormers together.
Lucarne. This type of dormer usually appears on the slope of a Gothic spire. These dormers are usually slender and gable-fronted.
Blind or False Dormer. As its name suggests, these dormers aren't built with functionality in mind. These dormers are used purely to improve the aesthetics of a building and they are not accessible from the interior. In fact, these false dormers can be an afterthought.
5. Hip Roof
If there was a major flaw with the structural design of gable roofs, then that would be the fact that the triangular extensions at each end do not provide the side walls with sufficient protection from the rain. One way to solve the problem would be to make the roofs protrude further.
However, if you have limited horizontal space, then that would not be advisable. In that case, you will require a Hipped roof for your building. So, what exactly is a hipped roof? In comparison to simple gabled roofs which do not have sloping structures on 2 sides of the building, hipped roofs have slopes on all sides. Other than additional protection from the rain, hipped roofs are also better suited in windy environments.
But, there is a downside to installing hipped roofs, and that is the cost. They are more expensive compared to a simple Gable Roof. Moreover, the sloping sides mean that there will be less usable attic space, as illustrated by the image below.
6. Hip and Valley Roof
You can think of a hip and value roof as a modified or an extended version of a simple hipped roof. However, the difference in the roof structure is due to the shape of the building. If the building is not rectangular and is either T or L-shaped, then the hipped roof structure used for this building will be a Hip and Valley roof.
We understand that the explanation is a bit complicated, so we have also featured an illustration below to make things simpler. If you are interested in constructing a Hip and Valley roof for your building, then we suggest you take a look at this detailed guide.
The Gambrel Roof is very similar to a standard gabled roof, however, instead of a single slope on each side, Gambrel roofs feature two slopes. This type of structure is commonly noticed in barn houses. The illustration presents a barn house-like structure with a standard gambrel roof.
In the case of gambrel roofs, the bottom slopes are more steeply raked compared to the top ones. This design philosophy results in increased attic space compared to a similarly sized building with a Gable roof.
However, there are some downsides to this design choice as well. The most obvious one is the price as gambrel roofs are usually more expensive to construct compared to a simple gabled roof. Moreover, gambrel roofs are less weather resistant compared to a Gable or hipped roof structure.
You can think of the Mansard roof as a mixture between a hipped roof and a gambrel roof. Why do you ask? Well, unlike a standard gambrel roof which has sloping edges on two sides of the building instead of all four, a Mansard roof has sloping edges on all sides. The sloping edges are exactly like that of a gambrel roof. In other words, each side of a Mansard roof has two slopes, out of which the bottom slope is steeper than the top one.
Mansard roofs also go by the name French roofs as this style was popularized in France by architect François Mansart. You can see buildings sporting the Mansard roof commonly in many European countries, including France.
Despite its usage in many aristocratic buildings, Mansard roofs are not that popularly used in normal homes. Not only are they much more expensive compared to the more popular roof structures, they are also quite complicated to construct. If you are looking to install a Mansard room in your building, then we suggest you consult with an experienced professional first.
Source Unknown
9. Butterfly Roof
Simply put, a Butterfly roof is nothing but an inverted Gable roof. This type of roof structure is quite new compared to other roof structures featured on this list and was popularized by William Krisel and Dan Palmer in the late 1950s. The first Butterfly roof was created by a Swiss-French architect named Le Corbusier, who used it for a vacation house in Chile in 1930.
While beauty lies in the eye of the beholder, the practicality of the Butterfly roof's design cannot be questioned. This roof structure allows more natural light to enter the house and results in greater interior space well, moreover, it is also effective in collecting rainwater.
A Dutch Gable roof or a Gablet is a fusion between a hipped roof and a Gable roof. As you can see in the illustration below, the Gable portion sits on top of the Hip Roof. Now, there are quite a few advantages to this design philosophy.
Since a standard Hip Roof offers less attic space, the gable portion makes sure that the house has comparatively greater attic space. Moreover, the Hip structure on the bottom gives the entire roof more rigidity and that results in greater weather resistance. On top of that, the hipped part of this roof creates a covered porch area, as observed in the image below. In other words, a Dutch Gable roof combines the strength of both gable roofs and hip roofs and eliminates most of the drawbacks as well.
Hexagonal Roofs are not fit for every house. In fact, they are mainly designed for improved aesthetics rather than practicality. One of the most common places you will see a hexagonal roof is in a pavilion structure like a Gazebo. The illustration below shows us a beautiful Gazebo with a Hexagonal roof on top.
The Jerkinhead Roof is a mash-up between a Gable roof and a Hip Roof. However, unlike the Dutch Gable, which is also a fusion of the same, Jerkinhead roofs have a large gable with clipped edges. These clipped edges resemble a hipped roof structure.
Now, the benefits of this design are increased attic space compared to a standard Hip roof and greater wind stability due to the Hip roof structure. However, as you can see from the illustration, Jerkinhead roofs have a complicated design and that makes it much more expensive to construct compared to a standalone Gable roof or a Hip roof.
The Clerestory roof is quite similar to the Skillion and Lean-to Roof we covered earlier. However, unlike a standard Skillion and Lean-to Roof, the Clerestory roof features a row of windows on the top as you can see in the illustration below. Since the windows of a Clerestory roof are placed very high up, they do not invade your privacy by any means.
So, what is the function of the windows? Well, they are there to fulfill a single purpose, and - you guessed it - it is to let a ton of natural light into the building. Moreover, as a result of the excess natural light, the room stays warm during winter months as well.
Although Saw-tooth roofs were usually used in industrial buildings, this design philosophy has slowly trickled down into eco-friendly homes. By definition, a saw-tooth roof is comprised of a series of ridges with vertical glass windows that meets a pitched roof. So, what are the benefits of this roof design?
Well, just like Clerestory roofs, Saw-tooth roofs are also built with natural light in mind. However, unlike Clerestory roofs which have only one set of windows, Saw-tooth roofs feature vertical windows on each segment.
If you are deciding between a Clerestory roof and a Saw-tooth roof, we would suggest going for the latter only if your house is extremely wide. Otherwise, a Clerestory roof will be better suited. Plus, you will also save some cash.
Although flat roofs are quite commonly used in commercial and other industrial buildings, they are also used in many residential houses. Surprisingly, they are installed in both high and low-rainfall areas. However, if you live in an area with heavy rainfall and snowfall, we would advise you against it. Instead, you should go for a Hip roof or any of the other weatherproof roofs featured on our list.
Another interesting fact about flat roofs is that they are not completely flat. In fact, they have a slight incline to not allow water to collect on it. In case you live in an area that is free from harsh weather conditions, then you can definitely install a flat roof. Moreover, you can use the flat space on top to make your house even more practical. For example, you can install PV Solar Panels on top of your flat roof to make your house energy efficient or even energy independent.
As its name suggests, M Shaped Roofs resemble the letter M. Well, not exactly a vertical M, but it is more akin to a flattened M. In other words, M-shaped roofs are nothing but two connected gable roofs. Now, the design of the M-shaped roofs leads to an obvious downfall which would be the meeting point of the two gables.
Needless to say, snow and rain will definitely build up in this area. Although, that can be countered to some extent with the use of a central gutter. In areas of high rainfall and snowfall, the pitch of M-shaped roofs is usually much steeper and this ensures that it catches less rain and snow.
Saltbox roofs are quite common in New England. In fact, the first Saltbox house originated in New England and is an example of American colonial architecture. Saltbox roofs are quite similar to Gable roofs, however, unlike Gable roofs which have symmetrical slopes on either side, these roofs have asymmetrical slopes. Take a look at the illustration below, the right slope is much longer than the left one.
This design philosophy leads to a few problems. The interior space on the back side of the house is quite limited due to the roof almost extending to the ground. Moreover, the tricky design also leads to increased costs.
However, there are a few redeeming qualities that make this roof style desirable. Saltbox roofs are usually more durable than standard gable roofs owing to their asymmetrical design. On top of that, the large slope makes it easy for water to run off and you can collect a lot of rainwater if you live in an area with heavy rainfall.
Shed roofs, also known as Skillion roofs, have a single slope, as you can see in the illustration below. Many modern homes prefer to have this kind of roof style as it not only offers more interior space as opposed to a gable roof or a hip roof, but it can look quite sophisticated as well. Moreover, shed roofs allow more natural light inside compared to pitched roofs.
Another benefit of installing Skillion roofs is simplicity. These roofs are easy to assemble and do not need as many building materials as some of the other roof styles. However, if you live in an area prone to tornadoes or hurricanes, we would suggest you go for a more windproof roofing style like a hip roof.
As its name suggests, combination roofs are an amalgamation of simpler roofing styles. Take a look at the illustration below, for example, it incorporates multiple gable roofs along with a hip roof for the front porch. Combination roofs are more suitable for complex architecture.
However, the complexity of the roof structure leads to an obvious downside: the cost. Moreover, building such roofs requires roofing experts and cannot be attempted by an amateur. On top of that, if there are multiple valleys in the roof, it can lead to water damage through those weak points.
Last but not least, is the Pyramid Hip Roof, and as its name suggests this roof closely resembles a pyramid structure. You can think of this roof as a special case of a standard hip roof. Normally, in the case of hip roof, the four sides of the roof converge in the center thus creating a ridge. However, in the case of a Pyramid Hip roof, the four sides converge to a single point, as you can see in the illustration below.
If you live in an area with harsh environmental conditions, then Pyramid roofs will have you covered. They are extremely resistant to strong winds. However, the downside of a Pyramid Hip roof is the complexity of the design which leads to increased costs over a standard Hip roof or a Gable roof.
With that, our article has come to an end. Now that you have read through this article you ought to be better prepared to choose the correct roofing structure for your home. Before we bid adieu, remember that roofs are extremely important, they`re not there just to improve the aesthetics of a building. It is highly recommended to go the extra mile and splurge on the roof best suited to your needs.
What roof types you`ve noticed in your area and what roof types do you think you actually need?
There’s no denying that an effective circular saw is integral to any workshop.
And if you’re into different DIY construction projects, you’ve surely heard praises about the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K mini circular saw by now. But that doesn’t guarantee that this tool is most suitable for your needs, does it?
For this purpose, you need to look at many different facets of the product, including its benefits and downsides. And having used this circular saw for an entire month, we can confidently say that its range of advantageous features does make up for the few faults.
So, to help you figure out whether it’s the ideal tool to go for, we’ve written this detailed review based on our experience. Read on to know more.
Cuts wide variety of materials such as tile, wood, sheet...
Why Buy This Product?
Rockwell may be a relatively newer brand on the market for power tools, but it has come up with a range of innovative tools since its inception. Each of these offers ultimate efficiency and durability despite being available at a budget-friendly rate.
And the ROCKWELL VersaCut saw is definitely among the best products put forward by the brand till date. So, to help you understand its benefits better, let’s start our discussion with a brief explanation of each of its positive features.
Motor
Since this circular saw comes in a relatively smaller size, you might be wondering whether that would affect its motor power and speed in any way. But rest assured that you won’t face any such issues with this tool as its motor is strong enough to handle cuts of professional standard comfortably.
Coming with a motor of 4 amps, it lets you rip through most materials at a rotational speed of 3500 RPM. In fact, its sheer power will save you much more time on large-scale projects, which is why it can give tough competition to many regular saws. Using this power, it can precisely cut cabinet plywood having a thickness of ¾ inches with little force and effort.
Note that most handheld saws barely work at 2,500 RPM, so the Versacut RK3440K will indeed be of great help to any DIY enthusiast.
Cutting Power
This saw also ranks high in terms of cutting efficiency, thanks to the use of a superior-grade Laser guide functionality that helps define the cutting lines precisely. This proprietary technology ensures that you get the desired accuracy with each cut on any material, be it ceramic tiles, metal, flooring, or wood.
For this purpose, it consists of a light source that projects a triangular light ray on the surface of the material. Even an adapter for dust extraction is included with the saw to clean the laser-guided cutting lines and increase the visibility further. As such, this saw is an ideal fit for people engaged in heavy-duty woodworking projects.
Coupled with this is the cutting depth of 1-1/16 inches, which boosts its versatility further. So, you can make a variety of cuts, including crosscuts, plunge cuts, straight cuts, angular cuts, and bevel cuts, quite easily using this power-packed tool. There is also a lever for depth adjustment on one side, which allows you to quickly change the cutting depth to suit your needs.
At this point, here’s a side note; always make sure that you’re using the right blades for your projects. Choosing an inefficient blade may lead to rough cuts, cause them to get stuck, and even result in kickbacks, which are very dangerous.
Safety Features
Safety is a key factor when it comes to cutting tools though many DIYers often overlook it. Hence, the presence of adequate safety features is a must.
And you’ll be glad to know that the Rockwell Versacut doesn’t disappoint since it comes with an emergency lock-off switch. This switch prevents any accidental start and thereby rules out any injury.
Design And Build Quality
Its lightweight and streamlined design is another great benefit, which provides users with much greater control while working. Also, this ensures you don’t have to drag the saw around the workstation or your home.
Coming in a compact size, it is easy to store and doesn’t occupy too much space in the room. And that’s not all; you get a sturdy carrying bag in the package which can be used to store the saw.
Furthermore, the small size of the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K makes it perfect for working in tight spaces with equal power and accuracy. Keep in mind that this would be impossible to achieve if you use a larger saw in place of this model.
The user convenience on offer is also commendable, as the design is ergonomic and balanced. In addition, the motor is fitted in the rear portion of the saw, which enhances comfort and helps reduce fatigue.
By incorporating such a feature, not only is the weight of the saw disseminated but the cutting vibrations are also minimized. This ensures the muscles in the hands are never strained. All in all, such features make it simple to use for beginners as well as pros in DIY construction projects.
Coming to durability, the inner and outer body of the saw is entirely made of metal, which enhances its sturdiness and extends its service life considerably.
Warranty And Price
This Rockwell circular saw comes with a limited warranty of 2 years, which is quite appreciable. This naturally makes the product more reliable and also ensures that you don’t incur any additional expenses on the tool for two years.
Notably, most other circular saws you’ll find on the market offer either a warranty of 1 year or just a money-back guarantee of 30 days. This also puts the model a step ahead of all those products.
Moreover, it is also priced reasonably considering all its capabilities, thereby providing you the ideal value for your money. This is something you get only in products manufactured by top-rated tool brands.
Accessories
Another impressive aspect of the Rockwell VErsacut RK3440K is the assortment of essential tools and accessories that comes with it. Sounds exciting, doesn’t it?
So, let’s get to the point. The contents of the package (other than the saw) include three blades, an edge guide, a base plate, a plastic cover to protect the base, a few wrenches, and a blade guard.
And let us tell you that the blades that you get are designed to work with different materials. While the 24-tooth carbide blade is suitable for wood, there’s a diamond blade to rip through cement and also an HSS blade for aluminum items.
Long story short, you get pretty much everything you need to start working with this advanced tool.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K mini circular saw delivers a seamless performance and gets the job done with ease, there are a few shortcomings. But we assure you that these won’t affect its overall efficiency as such.
Firstly, finding replacement blades for this saw can be difficult since they are sparsely available on the market. If you manage to get your hands on one of those, they might turn out to be a bit expensive. But a way out of this problem is to contact the manufacturer and inquire about replacement blades, as they might sell these blades at a relatively cheaper rate.
Also, the spring in this mini circular saw may be somewhat stiffer than that found in other models. Owing to this, you may have to apply some amount of pressure to overcome the plunging action while making plunge cuts.
But note that this issue may not be faced by all users. And thanks to the availability of a two-year warranty, you can always get in touch with the manufacturer for a solution.
Pros
Laser-guide functionality provides greater control
Lightweight and streamlined design
Effective two-year warranty
Value for money
Long-lasting
Cons
Replacement blades might not be easily available
Spring for plunge cuts might be stiffer in some cases
Rockwell Versacut Buyer’s Guide
Whether you consider purchasing the Rockwell Versacut RK3440K or any other circular saw for that matter, taking into account some key factors is a must. These would ultimately determine the performance of the tool and its durability in the long run. On that note, we’ve listed some important points that you need to keep in mind before choosing a suitable circular saw.
No-Load Speed
Having adequate control over the tool while you’re working with it is of prime importance. This is largely determined by the speed at which the motor rotates the blades of the saw. Notably, the free-load speed indicates the raw sawing power, so a higher number of revolutions per minute will facilitate a better work efficiency.
This speed generally varies based on the model, but it’s typically anywhere between 2,700 to 5,000+ RPM.
Bevel Capacity
Good-quality circular saws are not just capable of making simple cuts perpendicularly but can also make bevel cuts at different angles up to 55°. What makes this possible is an adjustable base plate. So, remember to check whether the circular saw has a bevel capability, determine its maximum angle, and figure out the cutting depth at a 45° angle.
Cutting Depth And Capacity
A greater cutting capacity gives a circular saw the power to handle thicker wood pieces and complete more cutting tasks. This capacity is determined by the maximum cut at a 90° angle and would range between 35mm and 70mm.
ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K FAQ
How Do You Choose A Blade For A Circular Saw?
To select the right blade for your circular saw, you must consider the number of teeth provided in it, its gullet size, the hook angles, and bevel angles.
How Will You Use The Rockwell Versacut RK3440K?
To use this mini circular saw, turn it on and move the blade slowly through the material. You can use it with one hand and also apply it for overhead operation owing to its ergonomic design.
How To Cut Plywood With A Circular Saw Without Splintering?
While cutting plywood, there is a high probability that the wood may be splintered or torn. Hence, you should follow some simple steps to avoid any such possibilities. Firstly, make sure you use the appropriate blade to get the best results.
Another step is to keep the outer portion of the blade close to the face of the piece of plywood. Lastly, you should always cover the cutting line with some masking tape.
What Should You Do If Your Circular Saw Goes Backward?
A circular saw going backward implies that there might be an electrical fault in the tool. So, you should immediately stop using that saw as your safety might be at risk. Wait until the saw is fixed by a reliable technician.
ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K Verdict
That brings us to the end of our review, and we hope you’ve developed a clear idea about this mini circular saw by now.
From our experience with this tool, we think the Rockwell VersaCut RK3440K a must-have for all DIY enthusiasts in their workshop. It would offer much greater accuracy and consistency than many other circular saws priced considerably higher.
Nonetheless, don’t forget to consider your needs and preferences and go through the buyer’s guide before the purchase; this will surely clear any doubts in your mind. And let us know about your experience after using the product in the comments section below. We’ll be glad to hear about it!
Rocket stoves are no rocket science, but there is still a science to how they work. Luckily, they do not require elaborate mechanics, and they surely aren’t dependent on either gas or electricity to cook you a delicious meal and satiate your hunger.
So, what’s a rocket stove exactly and how does it work? A rocket stove works chiefly on wood fuel. Creating a simple exoskeleton for the stove, you insert a piece of wood to burn in the combustion chamber and let the flame and smoke rise through the chimney which is vertical and insulated. This makes the combustion to be complete even before the fire reaches the top cooking area.
Not only are rocket stoves simple in mechanics, but they are also extremely feasible for a traveler’s life, with their usually small size and easy portability. And yes, they are cheap on the pocket too. In fact, you can make them on your own, in a shape, you deem best. Rocket stoves can be created using scrap and recyclable materials. They are also used for heating homes or small spaces. Once you have a decent idea of how to make one, you can build a rocket stove in emergency situations too with no elaborate list of materials required.
To help you with the process, here are some easy-to-make DIY rocket stove plans.
Recycling is the best way to arrange materials for your stove. Take three tin cans to make this amazing rocket stove and cook delicious food in the middle of nowhere. Always remember to use gloves while making this, and tin cutters and snips for cutting through the tin, and heat insulation for keeping the stove insulated. It’s not tough to make this, is it?
Instead of tin cans, we are using a metal bucket here. But, in spite of the big surface for cooking, there is no fuel efficiency reduction. Take a metal bucket that can hold five gallons, two metal pipes, a grill rack for the surface, and some clay dirt. Voila. Use twigs for fuel and cook to your heart’s delight.
Trash cans are usually known for dumpster diving and foraging food by stray animals, but you can use a metal trash can to do wonders for your outdoor kitchen or inside a cabin in the woods. You can always paint the stove not to make it look like a trash can and decorate it whichever way you deem fit.
This is as handy as it gets. All you need is a tubular piece of steel with a three-inch section and a cross on the top made of steel again for the surface. Very easy to carry and extremely efficient, you can cook outdoors in the simplest of ways.
I understand you don’t want to always carry a rocket stove around and perhaps just want a gas-free, electricity-free stove out in the backyard for outdoor cooking. For this, creating a permanent stove using stacked bricks is a great way to do it. More details at onegreenplanet.org
6. Bricks, but More Suave This Time
If you want neater finishing and more permanence for your brick stove, go for this red brick-and-mortar stove that looks as neat as a fireplace in an old country house. You can, of course, paint the bricks or add more touch-ups to them to make them look more appealing. More details at rootsimple.com
7. A Small Tin Can And a Whole Lotta Fun
This is a tin can again, but one that is comparatively much smaller than others yet equally efficient in its cooking abilities. All you need are a bunch of twigs and some leaves to fuel it up. More details at treehugger.com
8. Heating With a Rocket
Rocket stoves can be used for more than just cooking. You can create a rocket stove to custom use it as a house heater. Trust me. This is far cheaper than using a gas or electricity-based heater and warms up the house as cozily as possible. Here, a water heater was used to heat the house instead.
This is a smaller heater and more open on the top, but actually manages to heat up big open indoor spaces. Easy on the money and easy on the building side, yet more heating for the winters to be tolerable.
This one is amazing to look at and is amazing at work too. This particular design makes the stove run for 4 hours once loaded and lit. It is a long burner and helps save resources, even if those resources have been rummaged from the garden.
You can create a rocket stove that runs on twigs to fuel your cooking. Simple, right? A rocket stove created by using #10 Can and other scrap material makes it easy for you to build one. Take one #10 Can, and two cans that can store 28oz each, and add another can to it for the shelf section. Get some thermal insulation. Get a tin cutter to cut through metal and heavy-duty gloves for your safety. Use a wire hanger to make the handle and a can of spray paint that is heat resistant if you want to paint the stove.
This is a tough-skinned stove. It is robust and does not look like it will falter. Neatly welded, it is meant to last long. You will require an extra helping hand if you want to cut and weld it as neatly and tightly as it looks. You might also want to paint it to make it look fancier. More details at instructables.com
13. Utility and Aesthetics Rolled into One
This rocket stove is very steampunk in its appearance and looks more complete than others, with a full stand for support. It is portable and is sort of a centerpiece wherever you install it. You can paint it or spend a little more and get extra finishing on it, like the ones you have for malm fireplaces. More details at instructables.com
14. Small, Yet Efficient
This is an adorably small rocket stove that once again uses a #10 can for its main body, and four soup cans for the rest. If you already have such material lying in your garage or your kitchen, you are spending nothing on making this. It is easy to use and easy to make, and as a bonus looks cute while you cook. More details atinstructables.com
15. The Tiki Stove With Magical Powers
This one adds a very ethereal element to your stove. It perfectly complements the look and feel of nature and blends with its natural environment. Moreover, its relic-like appearance makes it a great decorative piece too.
But, making a tiki stove isn’t as simple as making a #10 can stove. This one’s a heavy stove that isn’t easy to move around. Why? Because it is made out of concrete. It doesn’t mean you cannot take it camping, it just means you need a good number of hands to transport it. More details at instructables.com
16. The Hobos
It doesn’t sound all that fashionable, and the name comes from the ever-cliched yet never-old shot in films of people cooking in the underpasses and at stations with small stoves. These people are called Hobos usually, and so is the stove after them. But, hey, it isn’t bad at all in functionality. It is small, lightweight, and can be carried around very easily for your camping trips or even when you’re out of gas or electricity. More details at logcabincooking.com
17. Stove Out of Cinderblocks
Cinder blocks look cool. Cinder blocks are also robust. Cinder blocks come with readymade compartments, and they are adequately heavy-duty. Moreover, they are big enough for you to use bigger-sized pots for cooking and with enough blocks, cook with more than one pot. And yes, they are easy on the pocket and easy on the make. More details atattainable-sustainable.net
18. Steampunk for the Win!
The steampunk appeal never goes, and heaters like these just bring that nostalgia to your rocket stove idea. It is heavy-duty and is more equipped for heating up your home than for making a meal. And because of how it looks, it clearly isn’t simple to make. But, once you figure out the mechanics of it, you won’t need to feel guilty for using stuff that adds to environmental degradation.
This looks like something out of dystopian concept art. And not only is it great to look at, but it is very functional in use. This is complete with two sets of trays and platforms for keeping stuff. It also looks like a robot is serving you food with plates held high. You can, of course, add to that effect by crafting or drawing a face for this stove. This grill is also big enough to cook a lot and won’t cost you much. More details at instructables.com
20. The Easiest Thing to Make Ever!
This is by far the simplest and most cost-efficient rocket stove on this list, but it is only mostly possible if you are a seaside dweller. Even if you aren’t one, there is no harm to learn how to make it. All you really require for this is a lot of sand. The other materials used here are again scraps that can be rummaged through and customized for the stove. More details at instructables.com
21. A Portable Stove- Hell Yeah!
This one’s a winner. It is small enough to fit anywhere in your house or car, or even on the back of your bike, and it not only helps you efficiently cook food, but it also heats better than it looks it can. Moreover, it is lightweight and easy to carry, and needless to say easy on the pocket. Also, just for gags, you can call it your pocket rocket. Funny, I know. More details at instructables.com
22. Homemade Stove Perfect for Camping and Backyard Picnics
Neat in design and resembling something out of War of the Worlds or Star Wars, this rocket stove is meant to last. It appears to be industry-grade and readymade but is really homemade. And no, it is not difficult to make. In a few easy steps, you can have this stove in your backyard or on your camping trips. More details at instructables.com
23. Another Easy-to-Make
This is very easy to make, and once you have a detailed list of instructions on how to make it step by step, your job gets so much easier than before. It isn’t expensive either, as is usually the nature of a rocket stove. Plus, it looks very tidy and appealing and easy to carry around. More details at rootsimple.com
24. A Few Tin Cans And Some Other Stuff
Yes, this one does make use of rummaged material mostly and isn’t too pretty to look at, but at the same time, it is time-saving, effort-saving, and money-saving to make. Just by using a couple of big tin cans and some bent tin for the handles, this rocket stove does its job efficiently and helps you prepare a delicious meal on the go. More details at instructables.com
25. 'Style' is Its Middle Name
This rocket stove looks very chic in design and is sleek and neat to look at it. It has three small pieces of a rod at the bottom for legs and a symmetrically asymmetrical design with two nozzles for the firebrand and four steel rods at the surface for keeping the cooking pan. Moreover, it seems to have welded the cooking pan to the stove, but that doesn’t seem necessary to do. It is easy to carry and can be used in your backyard and on camping trips. More details on Pinterest
26. An Industrial Model
Very industrial in design and resembling something of a locomotive, this stove, instead of being tall or broad, is long in shape and uses iron blocks and plates to cut and weld them together in the most efficient way. It has a support on the surface for placing the pots, and in the ignition area, it compartmentalizes the wood, twig, or leaf stuffing area. The two rectangular pipes at the bottom for support can be custom fitted with wheels to move around. More details on Pinterest
27. A Stove on Wheels? What!
Speaking of wheels, this rocket stove cum full-fledged cooking grill is welded into the back of a trailer truck, complete with a long, rectangular, and spacious grill and a deep area for the firebrand. It also has handles on the side to hold it and lid to cover the grill. Very neatly cut and welded, with this portable yet fixed grill you can have well-done steak in the middle of the forest. Extremely efficient for people who like to be on the go as often as possible, this heavy-duty grill is meant to last long. More details onPinterest
Which DIY Rocket stove plan is your favorite?
Now that we've given you some top ideas for DIY oven stoves, when do you intend to get your hands dirty? Worry not; these extreme tips should give you the ability to make Stoves out of scraps in no time!
Roborock has been making vacuum cleaners for many years, and this cordless version is indeed a superb creation. So, it is time to say goodbye to the wires! This product is currently discontinued, and no such updated products available from the maker.
The Roborock H7 vacuum cleaner comes with a wide range of features and is an upgraded version compared to the H6 model, which was released in 2023. And with this unit, Roborock offers a lot of competition to the top vacuum cleaning brands like Samsung, Shark, and Dyson.
If you are looking for a vacuum cleaner that can be easily taken around tight spaces, this one can easily serve the purpose. Plus, people of all age groups can easily operate it because of the lightweight design.
And so that our readers can have a better understanding of the Roborock H7, we have penned down some of its main features in detail below.
Now, dive in!
Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner Review
About the Brand
Beijing Roborock Technology Co., Ltd. or Roborock was founded way back in 2014, and it has been striving to make life easier for its customers. It has its headquarters in Beijing, and there are a number of scientists, designers, experts, manufacturers, and engineers who work closely to come up with the products. They have been designing different kinds of vacuums, and the cordless variant has been a huge success.
Furthermore, the team members come from reputed companies including Huawei, Microsoft, and Foxconn, and they have diverse experience in various fields such as electronic engineering, manufacturing, machine structure design, and development of algorithms.
The main motto of Roborock is to ensure that it uses the latest technologies to manufacture its vacuum cleaners so that people can leave the job to these machines. They believe in creating smart products that will make life easier and ensure that you can focus on other important activities.
Product Review
Features And Specifications
First of all, the H7 vacuum cleaner comes with a 1.3-inch OLED screen that will help you understand the remaining time, battery percentage and display the mode that is currently selected. It initially shows the battery percentage, but on selecting a mode, the display will tell you the remaining time that you have while working with that specific mode.
There is a button just beside the screen, which will help in changing the mode, and it is easily accessible while working. You can reach out to it at any time by just moving a finger.
The package includes a set of accessories that include a multi-surface brush, dusting brush, MagBase, crevice tool, and a motorized mini-brush.
They all are magnetic and can easily stick onto the MagBase easily. Besides, the MagBase can be mounted on a wall so that you can keep all the brushes in one place without worrying about misplacing or losing them.
We also loved how the vacuum cleaner can be used as a mop as well, but you will need to buy a separate accessory for this purpose, which can be ordered while purchasing the device.
However, there are some drawbacks that caught our eye. Firstly, this vacuum cleaner doesn’t come with a roller, which buyers will generally expect from a premium brand like Roborock.
And although the brushes function well, we were not able to remove the brush bar from the casing that it came in. This makes maintaining it slightly difficult, as you will not be able to reach the inner corners of the brush.
Design And Build
If you are specifically looking for a vacuum cleaner that can be operated easily around furniture, then the H7 is a great option. Its lightweight design weighs only 1.5 kgs, which makes it easy to take around and maneuver near the corners of your home.
Plus, you won’t have to strain your hands while working with it in handheld mode, especially while cleaning stairs or car seats. This is a huge bonus for elderly people or users who may not have much strength in their arms.
Apart from that, it’s accompanied by a dirt bin, which has a considerable capacity of 0.5 liters so that it can hold a lot of dirt and debris. However, there is no mechanism that automatically pushes out the dirt from the bin, so you will need to clean its insides manually.
Now, this can be prevented if you line it with a plastic bag, which makes it easier to remove all the debris at once. However, if you plan on using the vacuum regularly, you’re likely to use removable dirt bags, and the package comes with two of these. But if you have dirt allergy or other issues with dust, we will recommend that you purchase more such bags.
Performance
This unit ranks pretty high when it comes to performance, thanks to the 480-watt motor, which can create powerful suction to remove a lot of dust and dirt at one go. Hence, it will cut down on your maintenance efforts and time.
Additionally, you can toggle among 3 different modes, namely max mode, standard mode, and eco.
The max mode should be switched on when you need to clean dirt that is clinging to the fabrics of the sofa or carpets. However, it’s extremely powerful and can pull almost anything out. Hence, be very careful while operating the device in this mode to ensure that you don’t cause any unnecessary damages.
Next is the standard mode, which provides ample suction power but also consumes a lot of energy. Hence, we will recommend using this once in a while to do a thorough cleaning of the place.
Lastly, the eco mode is the most power-friendly operation option that you will find on this device. It is perfect for everyday use without racking up the power bills.
Besides, you do not have to keep the trigger pressed at all times. You can switch on the sustain mode, and the vacuum will operate smoothly. After the work is done, just turn this mode off, and you are good to go.
Furthermore, this machine is known to perform really well when it comes to tiny dust and dirt particles. It also works well with hair, and it will pick hair and fur that is scattered around the floor. You can keep using eco mode for all of it. However, if you need to pick up larger particles, then the standard mode may be required. The max mode is generally not used at all in practice as it is too strong.
Battery
As with all vacuums, the battery life differs depending on the mode you use, and you can recharge it once the power drops. You will be getting an 80Wh Li-Po or a lithium polymer battery, which takes around 2 and a half hours to charge completely. The battery cannot be removed, and hence, you cannot keep a spare battery and charge it.
If you are using the standard mode, then the vacuum will function for around 40 minutes. On the other hand, if you are using the max mode, then it will function for 8 minutes. The eco mode is the most long-lasting, and in this case, the battery lasts for 90 minutes.
We will recommend switching on the max mode rarely for a half-yearly sofa and carpet cleaning, and then you would not be consuming too much power.
Pricing
The price is on the higher side, and you will have to pay $500 for it. This may require you to go over the budget, so we will ask you to consider all the features before purchasing.
Return Policy And Warranty
There’s no doubt that the Roborock H7 is a powerful and efficient device that will work well for many years if you maintain it properly. Ensure that you keep charging the battery and do not let it drain out completely. The company offers a 1-year warranty on the product, and you can always contact customer care in case of any issues.
Moreover, you can return the product within 30 days of getting it delivered for any reason. If there is a fault with the product, then the shipping charges will be paid by the company.
Otherwise, you will have to pay the charges yourself while the rest of the money will be returned back. Just remember to double-check and see if all the accessories are returned along with the product. Else the product will not be eligible for return.
The company uses trusted shipping services, which include UPS, FedEx, USPS, and Amazon Logistics, and you should receive the product within 3 to 5 days of placing the order.
Pros
Charges quickly
Known for powerful suction capacity
Efficient air filtration
Easy to store
Lightweight and easy to maneuver
Comes with multiple brushes
Cons
No roller is provided
Requires manual removal of dirt and debris
Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner Verdict
We believe that this is a very powerful and cost-effective option to choose among the other competitors in the market. It may not stand out too much considering the price is high, but the price is well justified with the huge number of features and accessories that come along.
However, there are some disadvantages like the absence of a roller and the fact that one has to put their hand in the bin to get the dust out. But since it allows users to add disposable dirtbags, the problem is taken care of to some extent.
Also, the attachments have built-in magnets, and you will not lose them easily as they can all stay attached to one base.
With this, we have reached the end of this review, and we are sure that you have enough information about the H7 vacuum cleaner. If there is something more you would want to know, leave a comment in the section below, and we will try to answer it.
The Ring doorbells have gained attention among homeowners, as currently, the brand produces some of the best doorbells on the market. Apart from easy installation and added security, these doorbells are quite easy on the pocket.
A smart wireless doorbell is an essential addition to all homes. It is important to ensure that your home is safe and secure and your time away is not full of worry and anxiety.
Thus, investing in smart video doorbells - wired or wireless - is a smart decision you can make for your home.
So, package thieves, intruders, or your prom date - you will not have to wait for the door to open to find out! You can use your mobile device to access the doorbell cameras and talk to them using its intercom systems.
Ring Video Doorbell Pro and Basic
Ring is a home security company that specializes in smart doorbells and various other equipment that can guarantee safety for your home. It has manufactured video doorbells that come with the option of wired or wireless. Ring Pro is one of their most popular video doorbells.
Common Features
Before we compare the two best Ring doorbells, wired vs. wireless, let us look at the common features of these doorbells.
Ease Of Installation
Both the Ring video doorbells, wired and wireless, aka Ring and Ring Pro, are very easy to install, thus, enabling homeowners to save time as well as money. As such, setting these Ring doorbells themselves will help them cut the cost of installation. This DIY installation feature makes these doorbells an appealing choice.
Reliable
Irrespective of wired or wireless doorbells, one thing you can be sure of is the reliability of Ring video doorbells. It will provide you with the same security as that of all their models. They last quite a long time as well.
Apart from the hardware reliability, the software has been appreciated by homeowners as they report little to no bugs while using it.
App-friendly
The best feature of the Ring video doorbell is the fact that they are compatible with mobile devices. So, you won’t have to worry while going out for a nice vacation or doing your everyday routine. You can always access the footage of these video doorbells on your phone and keep a check on arriving guests using the Ring app.
Night Vision
Since most crimes happen after dark, the Ring video doorbell having improved night vision is definitely a plus. They allow the user to access videos and download them in high quality, even in night mode. So, wired or wireless ones, both doorbells ensure your home is protected.
Motion Detection
As the name suggests, Ring video doorbell has advanced motion detection facilities that help alert the user when someone is at their door. This prevents trespassing, break-in attempts, and other sorts of notorious activities in the vicinity.
High-definition Videos
The whole point of Ring video doorbell is to record intrusion or unlawful entry. If the quality of the video is questionable and the perpetrators’ faces remain unclear, it is pointless and no different from a traditional doorbell.
Hence, Ring doorbells have high-quality videos that capture everything crisp and clear and record arriving guests at your doorstep.
Two-way Communication
If someone’s at the front door and you don’t want to bother opening it, you can always talk to them using a smartphone or Ring’s intercom system. Ring video doorbell wireless and Ring doorbell Pro boast a two-way audio system that enables you to converse with high-quality sound without being exposed. They also provide you with an audio recording of events outside your door.
Affordable
Both the Ring devices are priced reasonably. So, homeowners on a budget can definitely check them out. Note that most wired or wireless doorbells from other brands are on the pricier side.
Differences
As similar as they seem to be, the Ring video doorbell and the Ring Pro video doorbell have some key differences. The main difference is that one is a traditional wired doorbell system or a purely hardwired Ring doorbell (Ring Pro), and the other isn’t, making it a wireless doorbell (Ring). Other differences include:
Field Of View
The field of view for the Ring video doorbell is 155 degrees, and 160 degrees for the Ring video doorbell Pro. This makes the Pro version comparatively better, as it can capture more in one frame. This wide-angle can record more of your surroundings, thus giving you a better idea of what’s going on.
Cost
The Ring video doorbell Pro is more expensive than the Ring video doorbell. Though both are affordable, the availability of more features makes the Ring Pro model slightly more expensive.
So, if you’re willing to spend a little more, the Ring video doorbell Pro is a good option.
Installation
The Ring doorbell is a wireless system, and the Ring video doorbell Pro is a purely wired system. They are both easy to install, even though the wired doorbell may take slightly longer than the wireless one as it may require wiring. Yet, they don't have complex wiring systems, which makes installation easier compared to other wired doorbells.
Moreover, the Ring doorbell device has a rechargeable battery and has to be taken out to recharge, and you would have to keep in check with their wireless transmitter as well as the wireless receiver. However, traditional wired systems are more reliable than wireless doorbells as you don’t have to keep changing the batteries.
Lighting
When it comes to lighting, The Ring doorbell Pro uses LED lights for a better image while in night vision mode. However, the Ring video doorbell lacks this feature. If security at night is important to you, we suggest opting for the Ring pro video doorbell, as it makes night vision footage clearer.
Alert
Another minute difference would be that Ring doorbell Pro offers customization of alerts and the Ring chime. Ring video doorbell, however, does not offer this feature.
FAQs Regarding Ring Video Doorbell Wired And Wireless
Do You Need The Ring Subscription?
The Ring doorbell offers a subscription service called Ring Protect. Though not mandatory to own, the plan comes with its own advantages. The prices can range from $4 to $20 per month.
Without a Ring Protect plan, you can have the following:
Live video footage of your home
Motion detection notifications from the camera
Two-way communication system with the doorbell
Whereas with a Ring Protect plan, you get
Ability to save recorded videos and share them if necessary
Snapshots from the camera during the day
Extended warranty for your device
Some discounts for your next Ring device purchase
Does Ring Doorbells Work With Alexa?
The Ring doorbell has recently been given an upgrade, so it can now be connected to your Amazon Alexa. Connecting your doorbell to Alexa will enable you to access the doorbell through voice commands. All you have to do is set up your Amazon Alexa account and allow it to detect the Ring doorbell.
This will also enable Alexa to notify you when you have a visitor or if someone is at your front door. If you do not wish to get up and check who is at your door, you can just ask Alexa to do so for you, and it will be displayed on your Ring app.
Yes, the Ring video doorbell, both wired and wireless, does record footage of your porch. Once the camera in the doorbell detects motion at the front door, it will start recording.
When someone alerts the doorbell by either moving around or directly pressing the doorbell button, it sends a notification to your Ring app that someone is present at your front door. Once you open the app, it turns into a live stream, allowing you to talk to the person at the door through the two-way communication system of the doorbell.
With the Ring Protect subscription, you will be able to hold on to the recorded videos for a longer period of time.
How Do Video Doorbells Work?
These video doorbells, as the name suggests, enable you to be aware of who is at your door without stepping out. They are not full-fledged home security systems but rather an addition to them. It can be classified as a mix of a CCTV camera and a smart doorbell. It alerts you when someone is at your door and helps you gain visual and audio access to the person.
As soon as the doorbell camera captures someone outside the door, you instantly get an alert on your mobile device. This helps you get an idea of arriving guests and take action in case of an intruder.
These smart doorbells also integrate well with other home security systems and other smart home devices. These work together to help make your home a safe and secure place to live in without any worry.
Are They Worth The Price?
One popular query is if these smart doorbells are actually worth their cost. And the answer is a resounding “yes!”
Video doorbells are a great addition to the security of your home. It is important to know what is happening outside without putting yourself in a vulnerable position, and video doorbells help you do just that. Be it a family or a bachelor – safety is of utmost priority to all.
From people stealing that pizza you just got delivered to attempts to break into your home – everything can be recorded in these video doorbells. This helps you to take necessary action for the same.
So, investing in a gadget that helps you feel more safe and sound in your home is definitely worth it.
Ring Doorbell Wired VS Wireless Final Thoughts
If you’re looking for a smart doorbell for your new home, the Ring video doorbell wired is ideal. It has various features that enable the user to feel safe and secure in their own home. Since it does not need any electrician to install it, you will be saving up on installation charges. Not to forget, the Ring mobile app makes it a user-friendly device.
Lastly, it provides high-definition videos with night mode and advanced motion sensors.
However, if you want to avoid taking down the drywall and would like an easy change from your old doorbell to a newer one, the Ring wireless doorbell is ideal. It comes with the exact set of features that makes it a suitable choice for your home's security. It is also extremely easy to install and avoids the hassle of wiring. It can also be deemed safer in certain ways as it avoids the risk of fire due to faulty or exposed wiring.
Just like any other soil treatment product, this too contains a list of different ingredients; only, in this case, there are no artificial fillers. Since labeling something as 'organic' or 'natural' is more often than not considered a marketing gimmick, we tested it to assess the quality and results.
Even though the product seemed lacking in some areas, we discovered a host of benefits that can truly nourish your lawn. However, to learn more about its individual properties, you must dig deeper, starting with the positives.
Let's begin.
Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Review
No products found.
Why Buy This Product?
The brand Revive has been delivering top-notch lawn care treatment since 1972, and as such, their product line-up includes different soil solutions that are considered effective by many. So, let's start our review with the benefits of this organic product.
5-1-1 NPK
This is a product information you'll find in every bag of fertilizer or soil treatment grains available on the market. Here's what NPK signifies: nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K). Therefore, this measurement essentially denotes the ratio in which each of these minerals is available in the product.
As you can already figure out, nitrogen has the highest concentration compared to other minerals. This is mainly because your lawn depends on nitrogen to grow and thrive. Apart from that, phosphorus is included to promote root growth essential for better establishment of the grass. Meanwhile, potassium has a positive impact on the overall condition of your green pad.
While the phosphorus and potassium content is remarkably low, there's enough for your lawn to reach optimal growth. However, if you have just seeded the lawn area, you may not be able to discern the favorable impacts of these minerals.
That said, the overall NPK level is relatively low in this product. Therefore, you cannot expect rapid growth or instant greenery within some time of application. Regardless, if you use it every 6 weeks like clockwork (in spring, summer, and fall), you can keep your lawn healthy around the year.
Contains Iron
Nowadays, most fertilizers contain iron, and the Revive Soil Treatment is not far from this trend. However, it's more than a bandwagon effect, considering that iron has a range of tangible benefits that cannot be ignored.
For starters, iron can render your grass greener, making it more vibrant and lush. While nitrogen also has a similar impact, iron supplements enhance the effect and give your lawn grass a bluish-green tone. However, the color shift won't be that drastic as the product contains only 2% iron.
That said, the presence of iron can have other undesirable effects if you fail to apply the fertilizer accurately. For instance, if the granules spill over onto the sidewalk or driveway, it could come in contact with water and stain the concrete. So, make sure to follow all the instructions to the T, and as a precaution, sweep off the granules that have escaped from the lawn.
However, if the iron has already developed stains, you can use a rust remover to eliminate the marks.
Labeled Organic
Like we mentioned before, several big-box companies drive the 'organic' narrative to push their products to customers. However, not all organic fertilizer brands can deliver on their tall claims. Before we discuss how Revive's natural composition benefits your soil, let's learn a little more about what 'organic' essentially means.
Simply put, organic fertilizers comprise plant or animal-based ingredients and are hence labeled so. Also, they contain low amounts of naturally-occurring minerals that foster healthy growth. However, the Revive Soil Treatment Granule is not rated safe for use around children or pets.
You still have to undertake all the necessary precautions before and after administering this lawn food. This bit is critical to the majority of such applications, as you'd want to offset any hazardous consequences altogether. For instance, the iron content in the fertilizer is considered toxic for aquatic beings.
As a rule of thumb, keep your pets and children away from the site of application. That aside, don't forget to protect yourself; wear gloves to avoid direct contact with the grains. Furthermore, you should, at all costs, avoid inhaling or ingesting the product.
Conserves Water
If you live in the Southwestern region of the United States, you're already familiar with the clay problem. High clay content in soil is one of the biggest barriers to a lush, green lawn. Given its volatile nature, clay becomes rock hard when dry and sticky when wet.
Either way, high amounts of clay can impede root growth and adequate soil draining. The latter leads to root decay, which can eventually rob the grass of its vitality. To resolve this issue from scratch, you'll have to manually turn the soil. However, that sort of preparation needs to be undertaken before planting the grass seeds.
So, in case you're trying to change things in a full-grown lawn, high chances it wouldn't work, and you'd end up doing more damage than good. On that note, the Revive Soil Treatment Granules can help in breaking up the soil over time.
With regular application, you can ensure that the grass roots grow deeper and at the same time have access to sufficient water. So, skip the hard work and use these grains to deal with your soil drainage issues.
The best part about it is that you don't have to water your lawn often. Honestly, this is great news for lawn owners who live in states or cities with water conservation mandates. That said, even if your area does not have a shortage of water, you can always reduce the overall consumption.
Greener Grass
By now, you already know that nitrogen, along with iron has a pivotal role in maintaining the greenness of your lawn. That said, if your grass shows signs of premature yellowing, chances are that your soil lacks these essential minerals.
However, you can reclaim your grass with the timely application of this fertilizer. While there won't be a dramatic change from yellow to green, the transformation will eventually lead to taller and high-quality grass.
Furthermore, we'd suggest supplementing the treatment with other natural ingredients that are known to enhance the grass texture and size. However, the key to a gorgeous green lawn is regular feeding and timely watering.
What Could've Been Better?
The product benefits an established lawn more compared to newly seeded areas. For instance, if your pet has done the deed on your grass pad and you're looking for a patch repair, this Revive Soil Treatment will hardly make a difference.
Also, it's highly hazardous for pets and aquatic life, so you may want to weigh-in that bit before buying this. For more information, you should read the Safety Data Sheet on their website to apply the product in the safest way possible. However, that aside, it's still an excellent solution to revitalize your lawn.
Pros
Breaks down soil and improves water drainage
Contains nitrogen and iron for greener grass
Suitable for places with high clay content in the soil
Conserves water and helps to grow healthier roots
Reverses premature yellowing in lawn grass
Cons
Not as effective on newly seeded areas
Highly toxic for pets and aquatic life
Alternatives To Consider
Here are some of the alternatives to the Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules.
Complete NPK Lawn Food: 16-4-8 is the perfect blend of key...
16-4-8 Liquid Lawn Food is best to be used to maintain and...
If you'd rather use a water-soluble lawn treatment than deal with grains, the Simple Lawn Solutions 16-4-8 Lawn Food is a superb option. All you need to do is prepare a batch and use a sprinkler or a hose to spray the solution.
Besides, the NPK ratio is clearly stated in the name itself, so you can rest assured that your lawn is getting a wholesome top-up of all three important minerals. One container of this is good enough to cover an area of 3200 sq. ft. So, if your lawn is bigger than that, you may need to purchase more than one unit.
However, it's half the price of this Revive product, so you would end up saving a lot more.
Enjoy A Lush Green Lawn - Revitalizes lawn to a thick turf...
Works Fast - Lawns start to green up within 3 to 5 days of...
When you make it a point to buy 100% organic lawn fertilizers, you get to choose from a very limited selection of brands. That said, the Safer Brand Lawn Restore is one such reliable name that contains only plant-based ingredients along with a higher concentration of minerals.
Since it does not contain any animal-based ingredients, you can altogether avoid the smell of manure. As for the NPK ratio, it's 10-0-6, meaning it can't do much in newly-seeded lawns. However, it can substantially enhance the green pigment in the grass, and you can see the results in less than a week.
Coverage-wise, it's comparable to the Revive lawn food; however, it's less expensive and just as beneficial.
The Aerify PLUS Liquid Soil Aerator is another alternative option that can work wonders for your lawn. For starters, it can effectively break down clay and loosen compacted soil to facilitate proper root aeration and downward movement of water.
Other than that, it contains seaweed and humic acid, which promotes much-needed bioactivity in the soil. Therefore, this product is truly one of a kind that can replenish the soil nutrients and breathe new life into your lawn. Plus, it's rated children and pet-safe, which is a life-saver for most homeowners.
Price-wise, it's much cheaper than the Revive Soil Treatment, and in terms of the application, a little bit of the Aerator goes a long way.
Buying a lawn fertilizer wouldn't be so complicated if you could randomly pick one and get the desired results. Since that's not the case, you need to have enough insight to choose the right product.
While you could go down the trial and error route, it may end up causing more damage to your lawn. Therefore, we've put together this brief buyers' guide to help you make an informed choice. Read on to know more.
Plant Or Animal-Based Content
Organic fertilizers contain either plant-based or animal-based substances. However, some like the Revive Treatment Granules comprise both. Regardless, you must carefully read the list of ingredients as each of them can individually impact your soil.
Some users intentionally opt for vegan choices, so their pets are not attracted to the lawn food. Also, many customers feel icky about the manure smell, and hence, it's best to opt for plant-based varieties in that case.
On the other hand, several lawn enthusiasts believe that animal-based ingredients offer more nourishment and a steady supply of lawn food. So, ultimately it comes down to your requirements and expectations.
Mineral Content
Now, this is another essential factor that you must weigh-in before buying a lawn treatment product. The NPK measurement on the product label will give you a clear idea about the mineral concentration in a fertilizer.
Typically, the amount of nitrogen is always much higher than phosphorus and potassium. Therefore, depending on your lawn needs, you can decide on the appropriate NPK ratio.
For instance, if you're looking for better root development, get something with a higher level of phosphorus. Likewise, a substantial amount of potassium can promote healthier and greener leaves.
Children And Pet-Safe
Now, we cannot stress how important this is, especially if you want to avoid dealing with any side-effects post-application. When something is labeled 'organic', it does not mean that all its ingredients are safe for humans or pets.
Iron in such fertilizers poses a threat to aquatic life and, as such, can even cause property damage. Furthermore, accidental ingestion or inhaling of these products can have a detrimental effect on humans and pets.
If you have never used lawn food or fertilizers before, you may want to buy something that's rated safe for pets and children.
Cost Per Square Foot
Last but not least, the coverage of the product matters. After all, you don't want to spend an exorbitant amount only to treat a fraction of your lawn. Do that math and figure out which one gives a better yield in terms of cost per square foot.
Verdict On Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules
Despite a few shortcomings, the Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules is an excellent product, in our opinion. In short, it does what it's supposed to do - nourish your soil and revitalize your lawn.
We understand, it might seem a tad on the pricier side, but it's more cost-effective in the long run. Meaning, you can stick to one product and depend on it to meet most of your soil requirements.
Frankly, that sounds like a win-win situation to us. So, just go ahead and give this a shot, and don't forget to share your experience in the comments section below.
Two tone kitchen cabinets have become a trend that swept hundreds of homeowners off their feet. The idea is to have a lighter base and darker shades or tones for the cabinets, usually a combination of gray, blue, black and white. The combinations of such colors bring out a classical look for any kitchen, eliminating the dull component of one tone cabinet designs. If the kitchen needs a little revamp, here is a pool of sensational two tone kitchen cabinets for inspiration, enjoy!
1 .cream and Coventry gray cabinets perfect for a classic look
Light and dark tones are a classic combination that never gets old. This simple combination of cream and gray cabinets creates a stunning look that fits just right for the classic French country kitchen look.
Small kitchen areas can look all wrong or smaller when darker colors are used. These light colors used for this two tone kitchen cabinet design makes the kitchen airy and spacious especially with the bright lighting inserted.
3. perfect sapphire blue and white combination for a lovely kitchen
The usual modern kitchen need not have strong colors to be on point. The white tones used for the kitchen cabinets bring out an exquisite look while the sapphire blue gives emphasis on the modish edge that complements all the other elements and colors of the kitchen.
4. stimulating mix of white and gray
This combination of color is simply invigorating for the eyes. Both colors are light and act as great backgrounds for the other items and decorations of the kitchen. The natural light and white washed back splash illuminate the whole kitchen effortlessly.
5. a vibrant tone with a clean background
Vibrant colors are perfect for the kitchen as they create and stimulate a merry cheerful mood. The sky blue toned cabinets get enough intensity because of the lighter white shade.
6.the natural color of wood looks majestic
Gray, blue and black are the common choices for the darker tones, but the natural colors of wood are not to be excluded. One of the most natural earthy tones, wood acts as a perfect darker tone for both modern and classic kitchens. Not only is it refreshing, it also creates a warm ambiance in the kitchen area.
8. perfect burlap and dark blue for the modern kitchen
While cream and white are lovely light tones, the light burlap color gives a perfect texture against a darker tone. The dark blue looks edgier, older, more powerful against its complementary.
9. simple but awe-inspiring white and gray kitchen cabinets
This two tone kitchen cabinet inspiration is truly amazing whether it is used for a large or small kitchen. The gray tone is perfect for the modern oven and kitchen utensils. The white tone is a lovely background for the classic chandelier, making the whole look chic.
This design may not look like a two tone kitchen cabinet design on a first glance, but the lower cabinets have the gray that still looks amazing against the white background. Anyone who wants to maintain a clean look on their kitchens but still wants the two tone cabinets will find this an ideal choice.
Dark brown or mahogany is a lovely tone that can look even more gorgeous in combination with a lighter tone. White is a common option, going for cream can make the whole look better and give more texture.
12. two toned cabinets face to face
These cabinets in two different tones facing each other is another wonderful option of inviting contrast into your kitchen. It is a balanced look, like a yin yang that has the stunning dark tone and an incredibly immaculate lighter tone.
The illusion of having more space can be achieved with the right colors and organization of items inside a kitchen. The darker gray cabinets along with the black floor tiles make a stunning background, allowing the lighter toned cabinets and kitchen wall pop. The wooden items and chairs bring the country kitchen feel to the whole design of the kitchen.
15. clean white and majestic Navy blue
Blue is a color that works well in any kitchen because of how intense or soft it can look depending on tone. This majestic navy blue tone sets a great contrast on the white cabinets and on the vintage looking back splash. The result is a striking kitchen fit for any home.
16. a subtle blend of white and gray for a simple kitchen
There are more people who choose to have little to no decorations or visible utensils in a kitchen- a clean, simple look. The same simplicity is present in this two tone kitchen cabinet design. The combination still has an impeccable look that can rival more complicated and well decorated kitchens.
17. glimpse of how a simple change of color makes a kitchen stunning
When a revamp in the kitchen is needed, a change of color can be a foolproof choice. With the right combination of colors, two tone kitchen cabinets will surely create a stunning result and bring out the beauty of a kitchen once more.
What do you think about the idea of two tone kitchen cabinets? Is it something you would consider? Feel free to share your opinions in the comment section below.
We all know that Christmas comes in a great package from all kind of decorations to specific table menus, music and a much happier attitude overall, it`s something magic and a great part of the decorations are based on candles or they include candles. Further on we will specify some reasons for which the candles are used for Christmas and also further bellow you`ll see a careful selected gallery meant to inspire you in your decorations.
There are many different reasons why candles are associated with Christmas, although no one knows when they first became connected, thing that makes the mystery even more interesting.
They were used during ancient winter solstice celebrations as a way of remembering that spring would soon come,also one of the earliest records of candles being used at Christmas is from the middle ages, where a huge candle was used to represent the star of Bethlehem. Jesus is sometimes called ‘the Light of the World’ by Christians. This might have started the custom of the Advent Crown and Advent Candles.
Candles are also used during Hanukkah, the Jewish Festival of light which is also celebrated during winter. During the eight nights of Hanukkah, a candle is lit in a special menorah (candelabra) called a ‘hanukkiyah’.
Candles are also used in the modern winter festival Kwanzaa, where a special candle holder called a kinara, that holds seven candles is used.
Perhaps the most famous use of candles at Christmas are Carols by Candlelight Services. These are services when the church is only lit by candles.
Candles were also originally used to decorate Christmas Trees, until safer electric lights were invented and saved many life's of both humans and Christmas trees.
In Southern India, Christians often put small oil burning clay lamps on the flat roofs of their homes to celebrate Christmas. Christians in China use paper lanterns to decorate their Christmas trees. Candles are also used as part of the St. Lucia’s or St. Lucy’s day celebrations in Sweden.
From all that we can keep in mind that there`re lots of reasons to use this amazing things when decorating, the light of a candle inspires warmth and peace along with the great smell that sends our thoughts to Christmas instantly.
Many like to mark essential items in the kitchen or office with a sharpie. But, a sharpie stain can be a nuisance.
Permanent markers have become a must-have in any domestic household or office. That said, you must have used sharpies to label spice containers in your kitchen cabinet.
But, what happens when you want a clean plastic surface so you can relabel them? Indeed, you must first remove the existing permanent marker stains.
On that note, it is best to have some easy cleaning hacks up your sleeve to get rid of any blemishes and streaks.
And that's where we come in. This article will list 15 methods to clean permanent marker stains from plastic surfaces. So, without further ado, let's begin!
Ways To Clean Permanent Marker From Plastics
Unwanted scribble stains on a plastic surface can be a real headache, and to remove them, you will need to use the best cleaning agents. So, before you try and clean that stubborn permanent marker stain off plastic surfaces, it is best to know what cleaning agents are ideal for removing such stains.
In this section, we've highlighted the best ways to clean permanent marker stains from plastic containers with the help of 15 effective cleaning agents. Take a look at how you can use them:
1. Rubbing Alcohol
Rubbing alcohol is probably the most effective cleaning agent when it comes to getting rid of stubborn stains. It is more potent than many industry-grade cleaning agents that are available on the market. So, if you want to relabel the plastic container, you can rub some alcohol on the existing permanent marker stain.
For effective results, we will suggest pouring some rubbing alcohol solution directly on the plastic surface and letting the market ink soak in the alcohol for a while. Then, use a cotton ball, clean cloth, or paper towel to wipe off the marker stain from the plastic. It will also remove all the remaining residue of the permanent ink stain.
2. Applying Bathroom Soap
If you do not have any alcohol in the house, you can always go for any good ol’ bathroom soap. Indeed, ordinary bathroom soaps used for washing our hands can efficiently work to remove persistent, permanent marker stains from any plastic surface.
To do this, you must first apply the soap generously on the stained area and scrub it thoroughly. After you are done scrubbing, rinse the lather off with some warm water. Finally, wipe the container with a clean cloth to check the results.
If the stain is only partially removed, you can repeat the process until it is thoroughly clean.
3. Using Vinegar
Vinegar can work wonders when it comes to removing persistent stains. So, head to the kitchen and find a bottle of vinegar to get rid of a stubborn permanent marker stain that has ruined your favorite plastic bowl. White vinegar is the ideal option under such circumstances.
Also, using baking soda and white vinegar is one of the oldest deep-cleaning tricks to exist in the book. That said, you can sprinkle baking soda on the stained plastic surface and gently pour a small amount of white vinegar on the baking soda.
Let the mixture sit for a few minutes before wiping it off with a clean paper towel. We promise that the results will surely amaze you.
4. Applying Baking Soda With Toothpaste
Although it is a bit unconventional, applying a mixture of toothpaste and baking soda can help remove permanent marker stains from plastic. But, you need to be careful while measuring out the proportions of these two items before preparing the mixture.
Moreover, based on the size of the stain, the amount can also vary. Anyhow, it is best to maintain a ratio of 1:1 for the toothpaste and baking soda. Here, you can use a fork to mix the two items in a cup until it forms a jelly-like texture.
Apply this paste on the plastic surface generously and scrub it thoroughly using an old toothbrush. If the plastic container has a textured surface, make sure that the mixture covers every nook and cranny of the container.
Then, let it rest on the plastic surface for a few minutes before washing it off with water and a clean cloth to see the final result.
5. Rubbing With Magic Eraser Sponge
A magic eraser is specially designed to clean marker ink from all types of surfaces. You can give a quick visit to a local hardware or grocery store to buy a magic sponge eraser. It is best to purchase a magic eraser that doesn't contain any harmful chemical additives.
For the best results, treat the sponge eraser with water or a rubbing alcohol solution before using it on the stained plastic surface.
All you need to do is rub the marker stain with the eraser for about five to ten minutes. Perhaps, this is the easiest way to remove marker stains as you won't be needing any extra cloth or cotton balls to wipe off the stain.
6. Using Hydrogen Peroxide
Hydrogen peroxide is one of the most potent cleaning agents available on the market. It works like magic, especially when you are dealing with stubborn and old marker stains. What’s more, you can easily purchase a bottle of the chemical compound from any nearby pharmaceutical store.
At the same time, you should get some cotton balls for applying the hydrogen peroxide to the stained plastic surface. As for the actual cleaning process, pour a few drops of peroxide on a cotton ball and wipe the marker stain on the plastic container. This method is effective in cleaning light stains.
On the other hand, if you want to remove an old and persistent marker stain, it's best to pour some drops of the peroxide directly onto the stain. Then, you can wipe it off with a clean paper towel or washcloth.
However, you need to be careful while using hydrogen peroxide as your chosen cleaning agent. It is designed to be used on white surfaces as it causes discoloration. So, if you're working with a colored plastic container, it is best to avoid using this method.
7. Applying Glass Cleaner
Commercial glass cleaners like Windex work really well when it comes to cleaning any stained surfaces. Needless to say, you can use this easy DIY cleaning trick for removing permanent marker stains from plastic. Moreover, this method works well against stubborn stains.
It is interesting to note that the ammonia present in Windex is what helps to clean off the unwanted marks. However, ammonia can be a bit harsh on the plastic container, so it is best to dilute the glass cleaner with water before applying it to the plastic surface.
8. Applying Hairspray
Like rubbing alcohol, hairspray uses the same mechanism to remove unwanted marker stains from a plastic surface. So, if you do not own any rubbing alcohol solution, you can use hairspray to get similar results.
It’s simple, really — spray the product on the stained area and let it rest for a while before wiping it off with a washcloth or a clean paper towel. Here, the acetone present in the hairspray will dissolve the marker ink and remove every inch of the stain.
However, you can only use hairspray to remove light or fresh stains. Unfortunately, it won't work on old or stubborn marks.
9. Using WD-40 Lubricant
WD-40 is a widely popular industry-grade lubricant that you can use to grease the sharpie stain so that it comes off easily. Moreover, WD-40 does not contain any toxic chemical additives, so you won't risk causing any damage to the plastic container.
Anyhow, all you have to do is apply the lubricant to the stained area. After the stain is lubricated, you can use a clean washcloth or paper towel to wipe off the product. Once you are satisfied with the cleaning job, lather the stained item with soap and rinse off the excess.
10. Using Dry Erase Marker
It may sound weird, but you can actually remove permanent markers from plastic by using another marker. A dry-erase marker ink can help in erasing any previous marker stains. You can simply cover the old marker stain with the dry-erase marker.
Once you're done covering every inch of the marker stain, you wipe it off with a clean paper towel or washcloth when the dry-erase marker ink is still wet. It is best to apply a little bit of pressure while wiping the plastic container. In this way, both the dry erase marker ink and the old permanent marker stain will be removed from the plastic surface.
11. Applying Nail Polish Remover
You can easily find a small bottle of nail polish remover in your regular makeup kit. This tiny bottle can work like magic in removing both your nail polish and permanent marker from plastic surfaces. The chemical components in a nail polish remover include acetone like in a rubbing alcohol solution, which basically acts on the marker stain.
You need to gently pour a few drops of nail polish remover on the permanent marker stain. Then, use a paper towel or cotton ball to gently dab the stained surface to soak up any excess liquid. Continue tapping the plastic surface gently until all the nail polish remover is absorbed while the marker stain disappears with it.
12. Rubbing With Pencil Eraser
If you don't want to use any harsh chemical products for removing marker stains from plastic surfaces, you can always trust a pencil eraser to do the trick. As a pencil eraser does not contain any toxic chemicals, it can act as a safe and effective cleaning agent in this case.
We're pretty sure you can find a pencil eraser near your study table. So, grab that eraser and start rubbing on the surface of your favorite mug or any other plastic container to clean off that stubborn marker stain. Continuous rubbing of the pencil eraser on the plastic surface will create friction that'll help in removing the marker stain.
13. Using Tea Tree Oil
Tea tree oil is not only used for treating skin ailments but can also be used as a brilliant stain remover. This essential oil can be used to clean any marker stains from plastic as well as wooden surfaces. The organic chemicals present in the tea tree oil can soften the marker stain, which helps in removing it from any wood or plastic surface.
You can pour a few drops of the essential oil on a cotton ball and gently rub the stained plastic surface. The stain will start fading gradually with the continuous rubbing of the tea tree oil. Once you're done rubbing the stained area, wipe off the plastic surface using a clean paper towel or washcloth. Repeat the process until you get a desirable outcome.
14. Applying Dishwashing Liquid
Just like your regular bathroom soap, the dishwashing liquid can very effectively clean off a permanent marker stain from the plastic surface. Moreover, dishwashing liquids do not contain any harsh chemicals and are absolutely safe to use.
You can apply the dishwashing liquid directly to the stained area and scrub it thoroughly with an old toothbrush. Once the scrubbing is done, wash the plastic container with water to rinse off the lather. If you're not satisfied with the result, you can repeat the process until every inch of the marker stain is removed.
15. Using Hand Sanitizers
Believe it or not, hand sanitizers are very potent in removing permanent markers from plastic surfaces. So, if you have a small bottle of hand sanitizer tucked somewhere in the purse, you can easily use it to clean off stubborn marker stains from a plastic container.
Just like a rubbing alcohol solution and nail polish remover, hand sanitizers also contain small amounts of acetone. The acetone essentially dissolves the marker stain, which makes it easy to remove the stain. You can apply the hand sanitizer directly on the stain and gently rub the plastic surface before wiping it off with a clean cloth.
Steps To Remove Permanent Marker From Plastics
Knowing about the right cleaning agents might not be enough if you don't know how to apply them properly to the stained plastic surface. So, in this section, we'll be discussing the steps that you can follow for removing a stubborn permanent marker stain from a plastic container.
Step 1
First, you have to soak the stain with a cleaning agent. If the stain is light and relatively new, you can use mild cleaning agents, like hand sanitizers or pencil erasers. But, if the stain is old and persistent, you need to go for more potent cleaning agents, such as vinegar, hydrogen peroxide, or rubbing alcohol solution.
Step 2
After applying the cleaning agent to the stained area, let it sit for a while as the stain soaks in the cleaning liquid. You'll notice that the chemicals present in the cleaning agents will slowly dissolve the marker ink. After soaking the stain, you need to scrub it thoroughly using a brush before wiping it off with a clean washcloth or paper towel.
Step 3
Once you have wiped off the plastic surface, rinse off the container under water to remove any excess cleaning liquid, along with the remaining marker ink residues. If some of the marker stains still persist, you can repeat the entire process until every bit of stain is cleaned off the plastic.
Things To Keep In Mind
While removing permanent markers from plastic surfaces can be a pretty simple task, it is best to keep certain things in mind when you are using harsh chemicals. For instance, if you have a colored plastic container, you need to stay away from cleaning agents like alcohol or hydrogen peroxide, which can cause discoloration of the container.
Furthermore, strong cleaning agents like baking soda and hydrogen peroxide contain toxic chemicals that are harmful to children and pets. So, it is always best to go for non-toxic cleaning agents, such as a pencil eraser, magic sponge eraser, or even nail polish remover.
But, if you want to use stronger cleaning agents to remove old marker stains from plastics, we'll suggest you wear gloves. These harsh chemicals often cause skin irritation and skin burns. So, to avoid such issues, it is best to wear normal latex gloves while working with these cleaning agents.
Final Words
We understand that removing a permanent marker stain from plastic surfaces can be a bit of a nuisance. After going through the article, we hope you have a better idea regarding the best methods and techniques that you can apply to clean off marker stains easily.
If you're trying to remove an old and stubborn marker stain, you can use potent cleaning agents such as baking soda with white vinegar or even hydrogen peroxide. However, if you're having a light stain on the plastic surface, you can go for less harsh cleaning agents, like regular bathroom soaps, hand sanitizers, or nail polish removers.
Additionally, we'll suggest that it is best to take extra precautions if you're using strong chemicals. And on that note, we'll be signing off. Take care, and we will see you next time!
Red is a very powerful color that is often associated with fire and blood; it can be connected with energy, war, danger, strength, power, determination or desire and love. Highly intense and spectacular, red is a color of emotion that can increase metabolism, respiration rate and elevate blood pressure. This being said it is understandable why some homeowners do consider a tad too powerful for home-use when it comes to their chromatic palette yet every now and then, an individual bold enough to give it a go breaks the charts, creates the extraordinary, the unbelievable with the color through bold red accent walls.
Red Accent Wall Ideas
Red Kitchen Wall Accent
In one`s kitchen and dinning room red makes sense as it is known to increases metabolism and be associated with love and determination. The kitchen and dining room are, at the end of the day, the spaces in which we share the most extraordinary days with our family, spaces in which we find comfort through food, spaces that offer us that important glass of water when we need it. The kitchen is considered the inner core of a home for a good reason; cast a glance at the extraordinary designs below.
Red embracing the walls in kitchen can be balanced with white, sufficient light and a joyful state of well being. Notice how the amount of red above tends to complement the setting.
Light floods an interior spiced with red. The chalkboard with a red frame on a white wall creates a great balanced contrast that challenges the red accent wall.
via coastalliving.com
Sufficient red can create a great background to be animated by your sculptural iconic items; it gives one the opportunity to create depth of filed as the color greatly highlights the item in front.
via journal.homepolish.com
The entire taupe palette functions well with grays and the design above highlights this argument with a slight contrast between gray and red thus bringing the wooden isle forward as an accent.
via HGTV
Red furnishings are a more permanent choice that can function in spaces with sufficient natural light.
Wooden textures, a black countertop, and full red furnishings represent a difficult composition. Here the wooden beams dominate the space with an immense volume sculpted by light; the room also enjoys an extraordinary amount of light that dims the red`s intensity.
The shabby look of a french cottage kitchen needs little visual aid in terms of color palette; here it was sustained with greenery and it`s natural complement in wall paint : red.
A space can evolve in time; paint is an evolutionary tool that homeowners can use and here red was used brilliantly, it simply highlights the contour of the furnishings embraced.
via hgtv.com
A simple red pallet can bring that rustic-vibrant feel of the rural environment indoors.
In the hallway red can be the idea conversation starter; it can also bring forward a gallery, highlight your collectibles or simply energize your guests from step one.
via centsationalgirl.com
Stark white space beyond a door opening framed by an intense red that encapsulates two black doors. Extraordinary contrast and composition that in practice ought to be executed with great attention to details.
Dense setting uses red to tie various elements together.
via Jeremy Samuelson; designed by Rachel Horn
via houzz.com
One accent wall in an uncertain space may do more harm than good.
Source Unknown
Source Unknow
Red Accent Wall in the Bedroom
In the bedroom red might energize the individual each morning, it might aid the individual to create a positive ambiance. Red in any space can bring the light furnishing forward, it can allow the use of numerous highly intricate patterns, textures and details without creating that cluttered feel.
The cherry on the top is the small little heart above the bed. In this setting the right palette disrupts color tension to instate harmony.
Source Unknown
Black and red in interior design are definitely not a common option yet the combo has its certain allure, greatly appreciated by certain homeowners. The boldness and great contrast of the combination clearly stands out.
A child`s bedroom ought to contain color. The red and brown combination is not a happy choice as it makes the interior look dated, rustic and a tad old for a child but if one was to glance at the cart that carries the plush toy and the red wall he will surely be able to see the half-full part of the glass.
A simple frame gallery or your most intricate pattern can benefit from a red background.
via christinefife.com
Red accent walls can help you bring forward more intricate items that you would like to expose thus earning the support status.
via ladolcevitablog.com
Use simple shelving to DISPLAY memories
Source Unknown
Bring forward a gallery
Emphasize your golden frames with intricate details with right background; red creates that intense energizing atmosphere that simply amplifies the effect of the exhibit.
Modern interiors could use red with ease, sculptural modernist furnishings applaud this color.
Source Unknown
Break the impact with light
The light from a window can brighten the interior space being able to change a red interior that might look dark and unfriendly to something highly positive, filled with energy.
via bhg.com
The coziness of a wood burning stove or a fire-place can shape a magical setting.
Red bold accent walls are most commonly used as support elements for intricate details, furnishings, and patterns thus creating highly intense spaces in interior design. How do you see and use the red color indoors? We would love to hear your valuable feedback in the comment section below!
Wooden pallets are the topic of today's chosen article, here to make a stand for their raw beauty and incredible versatility around the household. Their usefulness cannot be contested and their raw texture and shape serves as the perfect base for a multitude of delicate, bold and powerful projects alike. Coffee tables, kitchen revamps or simple and fun wall art projects, all can be achieved and empowered by the humble wooden pallet. We invite you to emerge yourself in this creative universe and choose your favorite craft from the 101 DIY pallet projects presented below.
Pallets – the one wonder of furnishing that still remains underutilized. But I’m not surprised; do a quick Google search and it’s likely that you’ll come across very few websites that actually go into the depths to explain their use. Sure, you can re-purpose pallets to practically build anything you want, but wouldn’t you need a guide for that?
Of course you would! That’s why I’m going to attempt to give you a series of DIY pallet project ideas to execute right now. It’s time you put all the hesitations behind and geared up to make some epic pallet furniture.
But before we begin
There are two things I’d like to tell you. First – where you might get pallets without spending a dime; second – the kind of pallets that are safe for use.
Free pallets. Since pallets are primarily treated as disposable extras, you can get your hands on them without spending any money. Just get in touch with small businesses that are looking to dispose of these items and offer to help. They would gladly give you what you need. Some other places you can look for free pallets are:
Construction sites
Small businesses such as furniture stores, pet stores, and hardware stores
A place where a new company is about to open
Craigslist
Other online marketplaces
How to find out if your pallets are safe for use? There is no point in gathering free pallets if they aren’t safe for DIY use in the first place. You don’t want the DIY pallets to be made of wood that has been treated with harmful chemicals. You can figure this part out quite safely by looking at the following aspects.
[HT] =Heat Treatment - Means safe to use
[DB] =Debarked - Safe to use
[MB] =Methyl Bromide - Not safe to use
[KD]=Kiln Dried - Safe to use
The codes are pretty self-explanatory, aren’t they? But what do you do if your pallets do not have these markings [IPPC markings]? Well, this is a bit of a tough one.
Some say pallets that do not contain IPPC markings are intended to be used for domestic purposes only, and domestic pallets are not treated with harmful chemicals. But there’s no way to be 100% certain they are safe to use or not.
Also, avoid using pallets that look damaged or rotten, it makes little sense, you need healthy wood!
DIY Pallet Projects
#1. Wonderful Garden Tunnel Suitable For Vines and Games Alike
We will start our most beautiful 101 DIY Pallet Projects with one idea implemented in the garden, perfectly applicable this spring season.Four wooden pallets have been cut to size and adjusted to create a wonderful tunnel in your garden which can later on be populated with flowery climbing vines and used as a hiding spot for your little one's games. Remember to treat the wood properly for your creation to last longer.
#2. Old Wooden Pallet Boards Assembled as Dinning Room Table Box Centerpiece
A dinning room table box centerpiece is a very versatile piece of decoration. It can be transformed with each passing season, reflecting the home's atmosphere and embellishing the actual dinner table in an unique manner. Fill it with fruit, fresh flowers, pumpkins and spice for the autumn season or pine-cones and cinnamon for the frosty one.Place it in the center of the table and not overcrowd it with additional decorations. The actual wood of the box will speak of beauty and naturalness itself.
#3. Drawer and Shelves Pallet Furniture Piece With an Industrial Appeal
A modern apartment nowadays tends to focus on mixing and matching different furniture pieces in order to obtain the perfect ambiance. A raw wooden piece made out of recycled wooden pallets can constitute such an example, speaking of its shade, texture and exuding a raw beauty, an industrial vibe very popular and sought by many. Place it in an all white Scandinavian decor and observe how it can, at the same time, blend in and stand out from the crowd.
The issue of storing a bike has been solved a long time ago with so many systems and gadgets being invented to support and host our metal companions. But in our opinion the classical wooden pallet bike rack can not be overthrown by nay metallic creation, its beauty laying in the actual simplicity of this project.
#5. Pallet Scraps Merged Into a Raw Yet Beautiful Wall Art Piece
What we have learned over the year from creating various DIY projects is that any piece of material be it wood or metal can be re-purposed and transformed into a work of art.The following piece can be included in this topic where different bits and pieces of old wooden pallets have been cut and assembled into a heart shaped wall art with a delicate hidden message.
Wood and paper decoupage go hand in hand into creating incredible vintage pieces usable in custom flooring or wall decoration. The tricky part of this projects lies in the choosing of the right decorative paper and the realization of the process itself, mastering the exact amount of left paper and exposed wood to obtain the perfect worn out effect.
Rope and wood go a long way in DIY projects and almost every combination of the two natural materials results in wonderful creations. Here the simplicity of this wooden tray is overpowered by the beauty of the materials used and their raw texture. make sure you secure the rope handles properly to avoid unwanted accidents.
#8. Wooden Headboard With a Specially Designed Rope Message
The classical headboard should and can be replaced by a specially designed hand made diy wooden pallet headboard. Add in this picture some glue and rope and we can guarantee a winner.Here the worn out wooden pieces assembled together and being delicately contrasted by the warmth of the raw rope assembled to form a loving message.
Spring is taking over our gardens and there is no better time than the present to start preparing your garden for this blooming fresh season. Use old wooden pallets to create a risen planter with drilled holes in its sides. Fill the created box with soil and fill the holes with flowers that will in time grow and cover the entire planter in a canopy of beauty and colors.
#10. Wooden pallets Assembled Into a MUlti-functional Tool Organizer
Organization and planning represents the key to success in most cases.Keeping an organized garage can turn out to be a challenge but by creating a tool wall out of a few wooden pallets you will save a lot of time in searching for lost tolls in the future undertaken projects. Simply attach the pallets to an empty wall and create all sort of supports rising from it from which you can hang your tools and materials.
#11. Vintage Vibes in a Simple Bathroom Cart
Vintage wood, candle light, fresh soap, wicker and lavender all come together and merge into creating a truly relaxation bathroom cart with a French vibe, suitable for any interior decor.Surge inspiration from the decoration of it and let it take you to that relaxing moment we all search at the end of the day from a hot scented bath.
#12. DIY Woodland Sign Perfect for the Holiday Season
Decorating your home and adorning your walls has become a tradition in the wintry season. This year we are proposing you a different set of decorations made out of simple pallet wood and basic rope. Send a cheerful message throughout the home and express your joy and excitement in an elegant manner.
#13. Scandinavian Coffee Table Risen From an Old Wooden Pallet
The Scandinavian style is probably the most adored out there for its coziness warmth and simple beauty exuded by each and everyone of the elements composing its atmosphere.White dominates the color scheme and wooden elements come to complete the desired image in a subtle manner. Today is a pallet coffee table adorned with wheels for increased maneuvering and a fresh coat of white paint to increase the chances of blending this furniture piece in.
Wall art offers a versatile wide pallet of options for the adorning of blank walls. Wooden pallets come to fill such an empty spot in contrast with colorful yarn shaped in a creative manner.Choose a simple yet beuatiful piece of wood for this project as it serves as the background for it, contrasting and yarn itself and giving it power and boldness in making a statement.
#15. Outdoor pallet Furniture Set For The Hole Family
Warm nights are to come and spending more and more times outdoors is highly recommended for our mental and physical health as well. Thus we encourage you to invest your time and effort into creating a wonderful versatile pallet furniture set for the outdoors with the exact purpose of encouraging you and your loves ones to spend quality time together in the freshness of your garden.
#16. Wooden pallet Turned Into a Gorgeous Chandelier
The texture and naturalness of a piece of wood can be but to value and exploited even further by the addition of warm light sources meant to diffuse their cozy shimmer and empower the actual wood piece even further. Here a selection of wooden pallet boards have been assembled to serve as a base for a set of hanging light bulbs. The effect is wonderful and exudes such a cozy warm vibe.
Invite the natural element in by creating a basic simple vertical garden from a simple yet gorgeous wooden pallet and a set of mason jars filled with plants and herbs. Add a few extra mason jars to serve as candle holders and infuse a warm light that pushes this project to the statement of wall art.
#18. Creating a Shelving Unit Out of a Wooden Ladder and Pallet Wood
The entire success of an idea behind a DIY project lies in the creative re-purposing of mundane materials an objects and their actual merge. Here a wooden ladder has bee used as the body for a pallet furniture shelf piece. Adorned properly this versatile creation can become a focal point in your living room. Add a string of Christmas lights to the frame of the ladder for special occasions.
Finding the right couch that fills your living area properly and merges perfectly with your desired decor and ambiance is a very difficult task many fail to accomplish. The solution to this problem lies once again in the humble wooden pallet that saves the day once more with its versatility. Paint a set of wooden pallets in a white or black hue and add comfortable cozy pillows and fluffy blankets for the perfect Scandinavian inspired couch.
#20. Succulent Filled Coffee Table
Succulents must be the most adorable cute beautiful little plants out there.Their simplicity and vibrant green tones come in perfect completion of the natural raw texture of pallet wood which can be assembled into creating a wonderful coffee table that serves as a succulent planter at the same time.Remember to treat the wood once a year to prevent additional damage from the water added to your tiny plants.
If you are an intense gardener who takes his job very seriously than you will definitely need to create a potting and planting command center where you can organize and store all your gardening tools and seeds.And because we are talking about the garden, wooden pallets constitute the perfect raw material for such a creative projects. Choose a fresh tone such as the mint green below for an extra touch.
You can take a simple wooden pallet and transform it into a useful beuatiful vertical herb garden in a blink of an eye. Simply add bottoms to your actual planting area and a set of legs for the planter to be free-standing. Place it near your kitchen window for easy access or use it to divide different ares on your wooden porch.Remember to treat the wood and protect it from water and insects.
The resilience of these wonderful plants is what recommends them as the perfect candidates for a pallet vertical garden. Simply fill an entire pallet with different variations of the succulent plant and create a delicate composition that will slowly and surely take over the pallet wood, claiming it their own.
When placed indoors, such a wooden pallet succulent garden can become the focus point of an entire wall. Let the beauty of the creation speak for itself and observe the growth of the beautiful plants that transform this wall art each year. Place the pallet in a spot with enough natural light and spray on water occasionally.
As much as some of us might despise insects, their vital role in our garden can not be contested. If being in control of this aspect is something you are searching for, creating an insect hotel seems like a fun interesting project that should take up a place in your garden. Invite butterflies bees and other such creatures into your green heaven and encourage the natural order of things.
#26. Wooden pallet Garden Shed
Transform a corner of your garden into an useful garden shed for tools and storage by using a series of wooden pallets assembled together. Encourage plants and vines to take it over and observe as it becomes more and more part of the actual garden with each passing year.
#27. Raised Garden Beds from Wooden Pallets
A spring herb garden can be created by using wooden pallets as raised garden beds, protecting yourself from occasional animal attacks on your greenery. Another incredible benefit of using raised beds is comfort. You can thus avoid all those long hours spent bent over your plant beds ending up with excruciating back problems.
#28. Classic Wooden Planter from pallets
I think you can agree with us that the merge of wood and greenery is beuatiful beyond compare.There is a subtle delicate elegance in this association that has deep roots into our subconscious. So it is only natural that pallet wood be used in the creation of planters for both indoor and outdoor purpose.Due to its delicacy the planters below have not been used in the true purpose of a flower pot but serve as a support for other ceramic planters that hold the herbs and plants, but with proper care and treatment you can use a wooden planter in the same manner as a ceramic one.
Childhood memories are often filled with the image of a wooden swing placed in the garden or backyard hung from a big old tree. Here a simple wooden pallet has been dressed in white coat and transformed into a beuatiful swing hung in the front porch. Adorn it with vines and flowers for special occasions and a romantic setting.
There is nothing more enjoyable than serving and delighting yourself in a delicious meal outdoors in the fresh comfort of your garden. Upgrade the classical picnic with a blanket and a wicker basket and stack a set of wooden pallets to achieve a perfect informal dinning table outdoors.Use fluffy pillows for sitting and adorn the entire picture with fresh cut flowers for a wonderful scented experience.
The memories revolving around that wooden swing hung in the backyard from the biggest thickest tree in view will stay with you forever. Invest time in recreating those wonderful moments by using a rather long wooden pallet and some thick rope to add a new swing to your patio. Make it a little more comfortable by adding on a few throw pillows in different tones that will spice things up.
#32. Mason Jars and Wooden pallet Wood Lighting Fixture
The wooden pallet has a new addition, as versatile as it is: the mason jar. Fill them up with elegant white candles and adorn your living room ceiling with this perfect vintage creation.Hung it down with a set of ropes to finish and complete the rustic picture.
Merge two wooden pallets and use an old wooden door a a headboard for the perfect little couch. Add a set of cozy fluffy pillows on top and play with textures and colors for a vibrant dynamic of the room.
The industrial style has been very in for a long time now and it is amazing how simple it is to achieve. Take an old pallet, add a set of large wheels and you are done.Place it in a modern contemporary interior design and notice how beautifully the entire scene comes together.
Create an adorning love shelving unit for your walls with a few simple cuts from a new wooden pallet. Use the letter O to center an important meaningful family photo.
Spending hours and hours in front of the computer at your desk will most definitely result in back and neck pains.Thus taking a break from time to time and changing your sitting area is highly recommended.If you are fond of using your comfortable couch as your working station, create this small functional laptop table out of pallet wood and metal pipes.
#37. Wooden pallet Display Units
If you are the owner of a little boutique, why invest tons of money in expensive furniture when you can create your own with your personal touches. Stack up a set of new wooden pallets and adorn them with underneath lighting fixtures for a special effect. Keep things modern and hip and your clients will adore the atmosphere exuded.
#38. Delicate Pallet Mirror Frame
Use the wonderful wood of o wooden pallet to create a delicate mirror frame. Leave the wood unfinished and let the cracks and texture speak for itself and its life.Add it to a small space like a hallway to maximize the idea of space or place it facing a large window to reflect the outdoors in.
Create this useful set without spending a dime and infuse a dose of rustic ambiance into your bathroom.Treat the wood with oil to bring out its wonderful texture.
Merge a set of wooden pallets, add wheels and a bright pop tone, finishing it all up with glass/mirror surfaces and complete your living room with a fun vibrant coffee table.
#41. Re-purposed Pallet Wood
Take bits and pieces of old pallets and arrange them in a wonderful composition to form the frame of a mirror.The entire appeal exudes a shabby chic style we find adorable.Do not try to remove the layers of paint as it is a touch that adds glamour to the piece.
Using wood as a backsplash in the kitchen might seem a little bit odd, considering steam and humidity but a washed out wood stenciled with a fun message will add a classic French vibe to your working area. Remember to treat the wood regularly to prevent deterioration.
Invite your family to a special dinner everyday by presenting the menu ahead in a vintage fun way. Create a wooden board and use contrasting tons to write the days of the week and chalk to change the daily dishes.
#44. An Array of Wooden Pieces
Use bits and pieces of different wooden pallets and assemble them together to form a wonderful coffee table. Mix and match the different tones and textures for an incredible effect and merge the raw texture with a set of hairpin legs.
Enjoy the wonderful spring heather outside in your backyard in a hand made pallet sun bed. Use a white paint finish for a Scandinavian fresh vibe that will contrast beautifully with the rich vibrant greenery surrounding you.
If you are looking for the vintage rustic style for your abode, a wooden designed kitchen will definitely fit right in. Use withered wood from an old pallet for a French vibe and let it stand out from the rest of your white painted cabinets.
Take the side of ecologists this year and opt for a wooden pallet light Christmas tree that will spare a new fresh tree from being cut. Use a single type of lights, preferably white for a delicate atmosphere.
Select a few pieces of rustic old wood and create a wonderful star decoration you can place in your Christmas tree or adorn your mantel with. Leave the wood unfinished and use different parts of the pallet with different textures and tones for a varied effect.
Keep things simple this year and opt for a Scandinavian pallet wood tree that can be left untouched for a rough effect or glamoured up with a set of Christmas lights and some basic rope ornaments you could create yourself. Another beautiful option would be to paint the wood and express your creativity for this wonderful DIY project.
Cut a pallet in long pieces, merge the pieces together and paint it white. You can now use this board as a photo display by attaching a few twigs to it and connecting your photos and the twigs with some basic rope. Drill a few holes in the pallet and place a lighting source beneath for a starry effect.
Storing all the different items we tend to gather up around the home can turn out to be a very difficult task we all dread to solve. Use the leftover pallets you have lying around the garden and transform them into a creative wonderful wooden box for placing books, magazines or throw pillows and place it next to your couch in the living room. Add a set of rope handles for effective maneuvering.
Every child needs a working station where he can learn, draw or read. It is an essential structural element in one's life and you can create such one from a set of wooden pallets. Treat the wood, finish it with a glossy white paint and cut out bits and parts to create certain storage spaces.
Decorate your child's bedroom with a custom made white pallet wood swing decorated with artificial flowers and transform his universe. You can create a larger version for your porch and spend cozy summer nights outdoors.
Diversify your crafting portfolio with a Christmas tree/ card& photo holder project as a perfect addition to your blank walls.Decorate it with pine branches to add that cozy holiday scent to your home.
Candle light transform any room and atmosphere. Add vintage wood to the equation and you've got yourself a definite winner. Choose to cut the sides with a specific motif that will exude light in a delicate manner. Attach a piece of thick rope as a handle and place your hand made luminaries somewhere you can admire and will use everyday.
Bookends are those simple volumetric letters everybody uses to hold their literature in place on the shelves but which do not necessarily beautify the place. To this problem we present you today a craft that through simple texture adds delicacy and beauty to any corner you intend it to be placed.
Improve the rustic vintage image of your kitchen with a pallet wood vent hood that will draw attention in an instant and empower the entire design. A darker wood tone will contrast beautifully with a pure white kitchen furniture.
Spring is the most wonderful season so let its primary elements which are the flowers bloom and grow in a wonderful controlled environment. Create a pallet wood planter box and place it outdoors on your patio in full spring sun.Add a layer of white paint and let it dry for a little before taking an old rag and removing the paint. The end effect will reflect a French vintage vibe we adore.
Shelving is one of the most easy and common pallet crafts you will find out there.It can add beauty, functionality and style to any blank wall in an instant. Embellish it will fresh cut flowers and family memories and photos to claim the craft your own.
Wooden doors come in all shapes and sizes but the actual beauty lies in the age of the wood, its intricate texture and natural tone.Here a few pallets have been transformed into an incredible sliding door that can be easily placed in a modern contemporary design.
The passage of time mark everyone and everything and wood is no exception. Wood aging is something being pursuit and searched thus it is only logical to use old pallet wood in the creation of a basic wooden clock.
Source
#64. Colorful Wood Box
Increase your storage space with a colorful addition. Create a wonderful wooden box with a touch of color and rope hinges.
As spring emerges from the dark corners it had been hiding, nature revives and birds, bugs and all sorts of creatures come to life and animate our garden. Take a step in this direction and invite the thrills of birds in your backyard with this fun bird feeders craft.
Blank walls should be decorated with your personal creations so feel free to express your imagination on a canvas created out of pallet wood. Use bleach to paint your dreams white.
A fresh fun twist on wall art should be added to a rather conventional area like the kitchen or dinning zone. Use pallet wood to create such a shape and add a coat of a bright hue to the end product to make it stand out and contrast the blank wall.
Use old pallets to create a sturdy structure for your bed. Customize it by adding a comfortable mattress and colorful pillows for the personal touch and taste.
Exploit the love you carry for a certain city and reflect in in your own wall art creation. Capture the city' skyline in an unique project you will simply adore in the end. Find different details you might have missed at the beginning and get attached even more to the image created itself.
Invest time in creating a comfortable patio chair or couch without spending lots of money or investing a lot of time and effort. Keep things simple and study and customize it with colorful pillows and cozy blankets that will come in handy on chilly nights spent outside.
Enjoy hot summer days relaxing in the sun in your garden on a hand made pallet adjustable sun bed.
#76. Kitchen Fruit Basket
Add a colorful touch to your white cabinet classically designed kitchen with this vibrant fresh pallet wood fruit basket. You can create similar ones for storing jars or spices and even for holding on to herb pots that will freshen up the kitchen and become useful at the same time.
#77. Simple Candle Holders
En-light your nights with these simple yet elegant vertical candle holders.Be careful by the combination of wood and fire and protect the actual candle with glass.
#78. A Special Family Message Display
Display you love and affection in plain sight and leave your mark on wood for the future to come.
Wish a merry and bright Christmas this year with a fun wall art creation on pallet wood.Use white and red paint to truly embody the Christmas spirit and attach a pine branch to complete the scene.
Although Valentine's day has become mainly a consumerist affair, try to attack the issue in a different manner by creating your gift instead of purchasing it. This wall art piece expresses affection in a very colorful and beautiful manner, maintaining that degree of uniqueness we all search in items today.
You you fill like committing and investing more time into a Valentine's project, create a stencil, dram your shape on a pallet wood board and cut it accordingly to the design. Apply a fresh coat of pastel paint and adorn with flowers or photographs.
If you have in the near future plan an idea of changing your kitchen cabinets, why not orient yourself towards wooden pallets? Choose old pieces of wood with character and combine them with a white kitchen main body.
#85. Outdoor's Coffee Table With Built in Fire-pit
Summer is approaching fast and with it, wonderful nights spent outside in the garden with friends and family. Create a functional pallet coffee table and insert a central fire pit areas for those cozy summer nights.
#86. Garden Pallet Playhouse
Spending tons of money on store bought toys does not sound like a good investment.So orient yourself towards creating a garden playground for your little ones from pallet wood. Invest time in the project and try and implicate them in the process for a memory they will cherish forever.
If you are a fan of wooden floors and let's be honest, who isn't, pallet wood is a wonderful creative method that will save you a lot of money but will cost in the time department.
#88. The Perfect Tree House
Create a tree house for adults by merging wooden pallets into a platform where you can add a few furniture pieces and enjoy nature from within.
Start a spring herb garden by filling up a wooden pallet with soil and compost and planting your seedings. Make tags for your herbs to remember exactly what you have planted.
#90. Rustic Flower Pots
Lemon trees and olive trees exude that Mediterranean vibe we adore so much thus it seems only logical to try and complement the olive green with some gorgeous wooden pallet planters.
If you are lucky enough to live in the seaside or to have such a vacation home, create outdoor furniture for entertaining from wooden pallets. Keep them basic and simple and add a set of comfortable cushions to the ensemble.
A wonderful patio or deck deserves a large swing for the entire family, especially if the view is worth it. Add string lights to the ensemble for magical nights.
#95. Vertical Indoor Garden
Use a wooden pallet to create a vertical herb garden. Apply a layer of chalkboard paint and use chalk to write the exact herbs and spices you have planted.
A wooden pallet background seen through a canopy of string lights is the perfect vision for a wedding decor. Add flowers to the mixture and the image is complete.
What is your take on the versatility and utility of wooden pallets? Choose your favorite from the 101 pallet projects presented above and share your ideas with us in the comment section below.
Earlier this year we gathered a collection of the most beautiful 101 DIY pallet projects to take on, providing you with what we believe to be useful inspirational information for future DIY projects. Today we have focused our attention on recycled pallet bed frames, a topic commonly encountered and of high interest among fellow drafters. Pallet wood is an infinite resource, filled with creative possibilities and multiple functions. The number of pallet projects or areas where pallet wood proves to be useful grows larger with each passing day, filling in blanks left in the furniture industry and being re-adapted, reinterpreted and beautified in creative, imaginative ways. Whether we are talking about recycled pallet bed frames, outdoors patio furniture, pallet coffee tables, raised garden beds and so on, pallet wood is and should be recycled and up-cycled on a daily basis.
"A pallet/ˈpælᵻt/, sometimes inaccurately called a skid (a skid has no bottom deck boards), is a flat transport structure that supports goods in a stable fashion while being lifted by a forklift, pallet jack, front loader, work saver, or other jacking device, or a crane. A pallet is the structural foundation of a unit load which allows handling and storage efficiencies. Goods or shipping containers are often placed on a pallet secured with strapping, stretch wrap orshrink wrap and shipped. Since its invention in the twentieth century, its use has dramatically supplanted older forms of crating like the wooden box and the wooden barrel, as it works well with modern packaging like cardboard boxes and Intermodal containers commonly used for bulk shipping.
While most pallets are wooden, pallets can also be made of plastic, metal, paper, and recycled materials. Each material has advantages and disadvantages relative to the others."
The advantages of using the beautiful material of pallet wood are numerous: they are very easy to find, with healthy strong wood and sturdy structure, and rather cheap, which makes them a wonderful alternative to other store-available materials, not to mention the actual beauty of the wood, its intricate complex texture evoking the natural environment with all its small perfect imperfections, raw texture and multitude of varieties and tones. Pallets come in different sizes, offering numerous possibilities for interpretation and modification. They can be cut up to fit a tiny corner, the wood stripped and reused in creative projects layered to form storage units or raised beds, and so on. Imagination and patience are all that is required in the process. Left bare, in their raw shape, they would fit any decor from the modern, contemporary ones where they will add a necessary contrast with other sleek pieces of furniture, to industrial raw environments where exposed brick walls and concrete flooring demand such a material to warm up the atmosphere. If chosen to be painted, pallets welcome neutral tones of white, beige, grey or even pastel tones that will fit perfectly a Scandinavian-inspired decor. Choose to invest your creativity wisely and opt for pallet furniture.
Recycled Pallet Bed Frames
Further on we invite you to cast a glance at our small collection of pallet bed frames and we encourage you to choose your favorite project from the list below.
1. Layered pallet frame bed with a white tile background serving as a headboard
Notice how the natural tone of the wood exudes warmth and coziness into the room. The rest of the decor has been kept to neutral tones as well, letting the atmosphere breathe and not overwhelm it. This like many other beds in our list are simple, inexpensive examples of DIY platform beds with pallets, a simple and swift resolution that can boost your comfort with little to no costs.
2. Wooden headboard and bed frame exuding warmth and coziness
A rather small bedroom requires storage space. Here pallet wood has been used to create the bed headboard and floating nightstands. The space beneath the pallets themselves is being used as book and magazine storage.
For a narrow bed placed near a large glazed wall overlooking the city line, pallets seem like the right smart choice. Cheap and versatile, don't you think?
6. A boho-chic atmosphere integrating a pallet bed frame and greenery
We love the mixture of pallet wood warm and cozy and the green fresh touch of nature. Wooden crates have been added to the décor to complete the image and store plants and pillows.
7. Delicate pastel TURQUOISE pallet bed frame lit by string lights
For a feminine touch this diyer chose to paint his pallet bed frame in a delicate turquoise tone that is here emphasized by the warm touch of string lights.
The simplest of designs, featuring a single layer of pallets nestling a rather comfortable mattress and warm fluffy bed covers.
10. The perfect bed frame design for an airy large modern bedroom
Large bedroom with huge glazed walls overlooking the natural environment should be let to breath, with as little furniture as possible. Here the pallet bed does just that, allowing the surroundings to trespass the physical limit and become part of the actual bedroom.
11. Scandinavian infused bedroom design with a pallet bed frame at its center
We at Homesthetics have always found the Scandinavian style with its airy open neutral fresh style adorable and suitable for so many individuals. It is a spirit that allows you to feel cozy at home without overdoing it. Here old pallets have become a beautiful rustic bed headboard emphasized by the stark white of the rest of the décor.
12. Bright neon green pallet bed adorned on a gold and green wallpaper background
Feeling cheerful and creative? Opt for bright toned bed frame that will raise your spirit each day.
13. Cozy small bedroom with a pallet bed frame serving as a shoe storage at the same time
A narrow room with an exposed brick wall requires a light furniture, one hat will contrast the raw texture and intense rich tone of the wall itself. Choose a pallet bed frame adorned with white bed covers which can double as shoe storage as well.
Pallet beds can exude a serious conservative atmosphere as well, even if at a first you wouldn't associate recycled pallets with such a style. Here perfectly cleaned pallets frame a simple bed adorned with elegant bed covers and pillows with delicate blue accents.
Source unknown
15. A very low pallet bed frame offering comfort in a minimal design
If you are a big fan of the Japanese style, improvise a low pallet bed frame, keep the decorations to a minimum and the tones neutral and obtain a relaxed bedroom style that will bring you closer to the earth's energy.
16. Raw industrial loft design with exposed brick walls, cement flooring and pallet bed frame
The industrial style adores raw insertions: exposed brick walls, concrete floors, pallet furniture, hanging wires and free lighting bulbs to illuminate the scene.
20. Small bedroom providing comfort through a simple pallet bed
Small spaces can be quite tricky to furnish but pallet furniture can turn out to be the solution you were seeking for.
21. Pallet bed offering storage space
Storage is of the essence when you are dealing with a small apartment so opt for a layered pallet bed frame that will provide you with all the shoe storage space you require.
22. Dark hues contrasting an airy light atmosphere
A beautiful dark tiled floor requires a similar bed frame approach. here a dark toned pallet bed frame complements the Moroccan inspired floor whilst contrasting the beautiful natural light invading the bedroom.
Baby cribs can be quiet expensive and are used only for a short period of time. Create your own crib from pallet wood and invest time and love into the design.
24. A day pallet bed frame with accent decorative pillows
A day bed that doubles as a sofa can be created out of wooden pallets and adorned with comfortable pillows, a fluffy mattress and delicate fabrics.
For an unconventional Bohemian chic bedroom design opt for the unconventional: stacking up pallets to create the bed frame and use them as nook storage as well.
31. Simple pallet and rope creation perfect for the front porch
Adorn your front porch with a simple pallet swing you and your little ones will adore for a long long time. Create it as a family project and have fun with it.
You patio or terrace requires a comfortable sofa where you can relax and entertain at the same time. Pallet wood provides the perfect base material for this project if treated properly against the natural elements.
You could have fun with the organization and decoration of your little one's bedroom and opt for a pallet bed frame painted in a bright tone he will adore.
48. Pallet bed frame nestled in a small attic bedroom with exposed beams
The attic space can be transformed to suit the most comfortable and cozy bedroom there is. Exposed wooden beams complement the small space and fit perfectly with the warm tones of a pallet wood bed frame.
49. Simple pallet bed frame with a large vintage map serving as its background
A pallet bed frame can serve as neutral base for a teenager's bedroom. Here an old large map has been used to decorate the background. Source
50. Cozy dark hued bed frame in a similar background design
If you are looking to decorate and furnish a wooden cottage, the possibilities revolve around iron or wood as materials go. Here the wonderful wooden dark paneling has been let to be the primary focus of the room whereas the pallet wood bed frame evokes the same dark tones without drawing attention.
What do you think about the idea of using pallet wood as a base for your bed? Is the style a little bit too nonconformist for your taste? Feel free to share your ideas and opinions in the comment section below.
Your recliner can indeed serve you for many years. But that is only possible when you take proper care of it.
To prevent your recliner or leather chairs from everyday wear and tear, it is an absolute must that you find the right slipcover. However, you need to keep in mind that durability is not the only thing you can think about.
If your recliner is in the living room, you must find a slipcover that also looks elegant and goes with the existing décor. When done right, your furniture will get a reupholstered look. The problem, however, arises when you visit the market to buy one as there are thousands of options that will leave you confused.
To help you, we have designed this guide with the top 7 products you can try. So, let’s take a look!
One of the first recommendations that we have for you is the Easy-Going Recliner Stretch Sofa Slipcover. To protect your recliner from daily wear and tear, it is best that you give this option a try. The designers have paid special attention to ensure that it fits your oversized recliner well.
High Quality Material: 80% polyester+20% spandex,high...
Dimensions:Recliner Slipcover：Fit Total sitting area is...
Why Did We Like It?
The slipcover comes in 4 parts, and it will fit your sofa like it has been made specifically for the purpose. This is one of the best recliner slipcovers as it comes in separate parts to make sure that it fits every part of your recliner well.
It has elastic straps that secure the cover nicely to the recliner. Apart from that, the material of the slipcover requires a special mention as it is made up of high-quality polyester-spandex blend, enhancing the durability and flexibility of the product manifold. Extra points to the manufacturers for choosing the right material, which makes the slipcover extremely huggable and stretchable.
Moreover, maintaining this item won’t be bothersome. Once it gets a little dirty with use, put it directly into the washing machine and set it for a mild machine wash. But keep in mind that in order to maintain the high-quality fabric, it is best that you use mild detergent for cleaning.
What Could've Been Better?
The only issue with this item is that it is not waterproof and can get damaged in case there is a sudden spillage of liquids. In case the liquid seeps deep under the layers, it would be difficult to take the stains out. So, if you have kids in the house, you might have to reconsider.
Up next, we have the H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Slipcover on the list, which is popular among users for the extra soft and plush feel that it delivers. What makes this recliner stand out among its contemporaries is that it comes with a footrest that wraps nicely beneath it and delivers an excellent fit.
GREAT FIT: This innovated 1 Piece recliner chair couch cover...
FULL PROTECT: These fantastic velvet slipcovers are unique...
Why Did We Like It?
If you are looking to add a luxurious touch to your living space, this is one of the best recliner covers to try. It is made of plush velvet fabric, and therefore, looks fantastic while being soft to touch. You would be surprised by the versatility that it puts on the table and is suitable for manual and electric recliners alike.
Moreover, we scored this product high on the ease of use that it offers to the users. There is a right-side handle, side pockets, and a continuous footrest, making it super easy for the user to put on the slipcover. There are also two elastic loops present at the back corner, which ensures that the fit is top-notch.
Other than that, it is super convenient to install this item. There are proper instructions printed on the manual that you will find in the package. Not to mention, the elasticized bottom makes it easy to put on the slipcover and make sure that it stays in place.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite being made of excellent quality material, it is essential to note that it is not suitable for an oversized recliner. If you use it on one, it will be pretty difficult for you to get the fabric tucked in and will only give the recliner partial coverage. In the worst case scenario, the elastic edges won’t really sit well.
The Great Bay Home Modern Velvet Plush Recliner Slipcover is so plush and velvety that you won’t be able to resist cuddling on it. This high-quality polyester slipcover will have you at hello! It is super comfortable and adds a dash of style to your room.
Protects furniture from spills, stains, wear and tear with...
Fits most armchairs up to 40 inches wide
Why Did We Like It?
This recliner cover is made of 95% polyester and 5% spandex and hardly experiences any wear and tear with use. It can easily last for a few years with little to no maintenance. The spandex-coated outdoor fabric is also super soft and will help you take long naps on your recliner.
Furthermore, it is one of those recliner covers that provide the ultimate protection to your furniture. Once you put it on, your recliner will be protected against dust and stains. Even if you have children in the house, this cover will make sure that no harm is caused to your recliner.
Moreover, you can rest assured that when you put it on correctly, it will stay in place and not move much as it is slip-resistant. You will find a helpful installation guide on the package, and that, along with the elasticized bottom, will make installation extremely simple.
What Could've Been Better?
Unfortunately, on receiving the product, we noticed that the side pockets on this recliner slipcover were two shades darker than the rest of the cover. It looked a little odd, honestly, when viewed from particular angles. If this problem had been rectified, we would have scored this product even higher.
Next up, we have the Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover. This has managed to garner much popularity in the last few years because of the exceptional workmanship that goes into its making. The faux suede fabric is of excellent quality and is relatively easy to maintain.
HIGH QUALITY: Elegant quilted texture, thick microfiber,...
DIMENSIONS: Sofa Cover: Fit seat width 18-19 in, please...
Why Did We Like It?
The first thing to take note of about this product is its exceptional build quality. It comes in an elegant quilted texture that adds a great deal of definition to the piece.
The microfiber is pretty thick and will last for a long time with minimal maintenance. Plus, because it is water-resistant, its lifespan is considerably extended.
Coming to maintenance, as we have mentioned already, it is super convenient. You can put it directly in your washing machine for a quick wash. A word of advice: Refrain from using bleach or harsh detergents as that might damage the color of the furniture covers.
Lastly, what adds to the ease of use is the fact that it comes with elastic straps that prevent the slipcover from sliding. So, even if you are sitting on it for a long time, it will remain in place and not move an inch.
What Could've Been Better?
While we have no complaints about the quality of the product, we need to mention that it does not come with a proper instruction guide. So, unless you have prior experience of using recliner covers, you might find it challenging to put this slipcover on the recliner.
We are almost reaching the end of our list, and next up, we have the Prince Deco Stretch Recliner Slipcover. Thanks to the high-quality blend, it is super comfortable to use, and no doubt looks stellar.
UNIQUE FEATURES AND FABRIC: This soft textured stretch...
PERFECT FITTED DIMENSIONS: These cozy and fantastic recliner...
Why Did We Like It?
This recliner chair slipcover comes in a range of colors, and there is one for everyone. It is made of polyester and spandex blend and delivers a soft texture that will make you want to sit on the recliner for long. The thick knit material gives the recliner cover an exquisite look and will surely catch everyone’s attention.
And this recliner cover not only offers versatility in terms of colors but also in the types of recliners that it is suitable for. So, you can go for this option irrespective of whether your recliner chair is manual or electric.
Not to mention, we loved the shrink-resistant feature that ensures that the fits stay well even after multiple washes. It is super easy to clean too; you can wash it by hand or put it in the washing machine.
What Could've Been Better?
A word of warning: This item is not waterproof. So, if any liquid falls on this thick material, there is a chance that it will seep in and leave permanent stains. If you accidentally drop something on it, we suggest that you wash it immediately.
To enjoy a cozy experience on your recliner, try the Rose Home Fashion RHF 4 Separate Piece Velvet Recliner Slipcovers. The soft velvety material is soft to touch and makes sitting on it super comfortable.
What makes this recliner cover stand out is the premium quality fabric that goes into its making. Owing to the quality, the material is pretty stretchable and can even fit an oversized recliner. Putting on and taking off this cover for maintenance work is simple.
Other than that, we couldn’t help but marvel at the excellent build quality of the slipcover. The knitting is super neat and will ensure that the slipcover stays in place even after hours of use. So, your sofa will always have a clean look and will not be ruffled.
And when it comes to convenience, this product gets some extra scores. You will find side pockets on it that can be used to keep phones or books while you take a nap. The side pockets work as a great storage place.
What Could've Been Better?
The only complaint that we have is with its packaging quality. On receiving the product, we noticed that the box in which it was delivered was tapered around the corners, and we were worried if the product was safe. Luckily, it was!
There was no way we were going to wrap up our list without having mentioned the MarCielo FBA Recliner Slipcover Burgundy. This furniture cover is suitable for most sofas, recliners, love seats, and even chairs, making it very versatile and popular among users.
360 DEGREE COMPREHENSIVE PROTECTION: The recliner stretch...
FITS MOST RECLINER: This recliner cover is one size fits...
Why Did We Like It?
When you are looking for a full-coverage slipcover for your recliner, this can be the best bet. It is made in a way that it can enwrap your recliner completely, thereby protecting it from unwanted damage, stains, and, most importantly, everyday wear and tear.
Moreover, the versatility that it puts on the table is nothing short of incredible. It is a one-size-fits-most slipcover and is suitable to be used on most types of chairs and recliners. The fit is perfect, and the slipcover stays in place without shifting or moving.
Most importantly, maintaining this item is pretty convenient. Once it gets dirty, you can simply send it for a machine wash and let it dry naturally. It is wrinkle-resistant and does not develop creases at all. Other than that, you will also find side pockets on it where you can store essential items.
What Could've Been Better?
Unfortunately, we were not really happy with their customer support team. We had a few queries, and we got a response very late on reaching out to them. To be honest, we expected a more prompt reply from a brand as good as this one.
Pros
Provides full-coverage
Build to last
Easy to maintain
Simple installation process
Cons
Customer service needs improvement
Recliner Slipcovers Buying Guide
Now that we have given you a detailed round-up of the top products, were you able to make a choice?
We understand if you are facing some trouble in making your decision. Actually, there are a few other factors that you need to take note of to understand what would be the best pick for you.
Let’s take a look at some of those factors!
1. Coverage Provided By The Recliner Slipcover
When choosing recliner slipcovers, you can opt for two types of coverage: full or partial. To be honest, there are advantages and disadvantages to both and you should select one that works best for you.
If you choose to go for a full coverage recliner cover, it will no doubt deliver a reupholstered look to the recliner. However, you need to keep in mind that full coverage slipcovers are a task to put on and take off.
Partial coverage recliner covers, on the other hand, are quite easy to put on. But they mostly look like a shield and would not cover your recliner in entirety. So, the chances are that some portions of our worn out recliner might still be visible after you put on the slipcover.
2. Maintenance
Keeping your slipcover in the right condition, especially when it is a full-coverage variant, can be pretty challenging. You might need to send it for a wash often if you have kids or pets in the house. In case you have problems washing it frequently, it is best that you go for one that is waterproof.
If the slipcover is not waterproof, at least check if the fabric is good and that the color will hold even after multiple washes.
Verdict
That’s all we have for you today!
We hope that learning about the best recliner chair covers has been fun so far and that you won’t face trouble in selecting one anymore. Making the right choice is essential because your recliner needs special care, especially when you have children in the house.
If you are still having second thoughts, let us help by letting you in on our favorites. The Easy-Going Recliner Sofa Slipcover takes the award for being an all-round model. Apart from that, if you are looking for an item that is easy to install and maintain, we would suggest that you give the H.VERSAILTEX Stretch Recliner Slipcover a try.
For any suggestions that you would like to share with us, feel free to write to us in the comments box below. And for more exciting reads, do not forget to keep a watch on this space.
Taking on a major remodeling project can be challenging, especially without the right tools.
Usually, everyone has a collection of handy tools in the house like a screwdriver, a wrench, and maybe a hammer. Most experienced users and DIY enthusiasts even add power tools to their collection. Now, the thing about power tools is that they make the job ten times easier. However, you must know how to use them.
There are too many to choose from these days, especially when it comes to saws. Moreover, choosing the right kind of power tool is the actual task. If you’re a DIY enthusiast or beginner looking into power tools, this is the guide to read.
We are here to help you pick between the all-important jigsaw and reciprocating saw. Both these tools can be super beneficial for different types of cutting, but usually, only one is enough.
So, without further ado, let’s get right into it.
Reciprocating Saw Vs. Jigsaw
Power Saws - What Are Those?
The world of construction and demolition has become much more manageable. Now, even the simplest tools such as a saw or a screwdriver have an electrically operated version. A power saw is one such tool that has been enhanced to provide more using less effort.
With the creation of power saws, it has become tremendously easy to cut through more challenging materials without much strain. But that is just one aspect of it as it is not just physical strain that this solves but also time.
Cutting a massive piece of wood might be possible with a manual tool, but the chances of it taking half a day are also pretty high. That is why these tools are rather sought after as a complicated cutting job can be done in half the time. Furthermore, this is why professionals use them for more extensive projects.
A reciprocating saw and a jigsaw are both power saws, but they are not the only ones. There are many like them which can be used for different kinds of projects. Such tools include tile cutters, miter saws, panel saws, and of course, chainsaws.
What To Consider When Buying a Power Saw
Whether this is your first power tool or the 100th, each time, there have to be certain factors that need to be kept in mind before buying them. Since each tool is different from the other, the mechanics and the ideal projects for the tools vary.
Here are some of the things you have to keep in mind when thinking about buying a power tool
Materials
The first thing to look into would be what kind of material you need to cut with the power tool. While most power tools work on all materials, others are only for specific materials, like a tile cutter.
A tile cutter cannot be used for cutting anything other than tiles, and similarly, only a tile cutter can be used to cut tiles. This is why it is crucial to make a list of materials to ascertain if any special power tools will be required.
Price
Having a budget in mind is a good idea, especially if you need to buy more than one power tool. Depending on the project, you may need more than one tool to carry out the whole project effectively.
It will not help if most of the project budget is spent on one tool in such situations. Keep a set budget aside for each tool, and then head out to look for one.
Type Of Cut
Are you looking for longer cuts or shorter ones? Precise and delicate cuts or rough cuts? It is essential to ask these questions so you can direct yourself to the appropriate tool.
Some power tools, like reciprocating tools, cut horizontally, making them ideal for specific projects. Furthermore, many tools have differently angled cuts that are specific to certain materials and projects.
Type Of Project
Larger projects will require tools that use more power and brute force to cut through objects instead of smaller projects. Make a note of the kind of work you will be undertaking before buying a power saw.
Frequency
Power tools can be expensive, which is why it is not possible to keep buying them. If you plan on using one frequently, we advise you to go for something high quality and durable. That being said, it might be a bit out of budget, but it will also be a valuable investment.
However, we recommend not spending much money on big power tools for smaller and short-term projects. There are several budget-friendly options, although they might not be as durable.
Features
Most power saws must come with multiple blades and blade guides; this makes using the tool much more effortless. In addition, they should include features that make the tool safe, like safety locks and comfortable, like padded grip handles.
It is important to remember that a power tool does have a lot of power and vibration. For this reason, comfort should be of utmost importance.
Reciprocating Saw Vs. Jigsaw Compared
Essentially, they aren’t too different from each other. Many professionals would even say that a jigsaw is in the same family as a reciprocating saw. However, the main difference comes in because of the different types of cuts it offers.
But before getting into the difference between the two tools and determining which is better, let’s first look at them individually.
Usually used in construction or electrical work, a reciprocating saw is a bit like an electrical hacksaw. It works horizontally, i.e., the blade moves forward and then back to cut through materials, which is precisely how the tool gets its name.
The best part about it is that it can be used for more rough-cutting, which is usually not what power tools are used for. As reciprocating saws pack a punch, these are primarily used by professionals for demolition purposes.
Since it is a professional tool, it is made to cut through anything from metal to plastic to wood and even plaster. No wonder so many people opt for this tool! Plus, you can use multiple blades on one tool according to your requirement.
Purpose
As we mentioned, cutting with a reciprocating saw means having rough, non-intricate cuts, and usually, that kind of work is best for demolition and remodeling. Most people use reciprocating saws for DIY projects at home or any small-scale cutting work.
Many reciprocating saws cut right through ceramic as well, which makes this the ideal tool for professionals. As the tool has a lot of power, it is best utilized in the open, where you can demolish wooden and metal materials. Anything less, and you’d be missing out on its true power and what it can offer.
Mechanics
You already know how it works; the blade works in a forward and backward movement. Since it is like an electric hacksaw, the cuts will be straight, albeit a little rough around the edges. Additionally, different kinds of blades can cut through multiple materials and be attached to the primary tool.
Keep In Mind
While the reciprocating saw is quite powerful, the power can be a bit restricted with cordless saws. This tool is known for its power which is why it is often chosen to carry out construction or demolition work. However, it is essential to keep in mind that cordless versions have batteries that are bound to run low on power after prolonged use.
If you are looking for an unending power supply for a big project, it is better to opt for a corded version. The alternative is to buy a cordless version with enough battery backup to last for a while.
The next thing to remember is that even though corded versions offer more power, they can restrict movement. When working on a big project, it is essential to move around comfortably, which might not always be possible if a 6-foot long cord is coming in the way.
Pros
Usually available in electric and non-electric variants
We weren’t kidding when we mentioned that jigsaws might be an extension of the reciprocating saw family. These power tools are very similar to the reciprocating saw in terms of looks, but the jigsaw has a circular cutting motion, unlike its sibling.
The blades in the jigsaw move vertically in a circular motion rather than a forward-backward motion. Many users love that it is incredibly lightweight, making it easy to carry and work with. Additionally, unlike the reciprocating saw, these are ideal for more delicate cuts.
For a tool that is in the same family, they sure do have a ton of differences. Let’s explore a little more.
Purpose
Unlike reciprocating saws, jigsaws are perfect for precision cutting. The movement by the thin blades of the jigsaw ensures fine cuts and more intricacy in work. Furthermore, the thin blades allow the user to use stencils for fine cutting as well.
It is not as powerful as the reciprocating saw, but it can be used for multiple tasks and even smaller DIY tasks at home. Moreover, every jigsaw can be used with numerous blades as they are mostly detachable, making it a pretty handy tool to have at home. Most DIY enthusiasts and professionals use this for remodeling and metalwork.
Mechanics
This is a bit different from reciprocating saws despite being similar as the blade is attached vertically. Once connected, the blade will move in an oscillatory motion and cut the material in the process.
The only thing to remember about this tool is that it is not as powerful by default and needs more power for some materials. The cutting would have to be done at a higher speed to give the jigsaw more power, especially to cut metal or wood.
Keep In Mind
Jigsaws are rarely ever used for massive projects, which is why power is not an issue. But that does not mean it cannot be used for heavy-duty work. When using a jigsaw for something big, make sure it has enough power to handle the task. For this reason, a corded jigsaw is a more suitable option as the supply of power is consistent.
A jigsaw usually has multiple features and aspects to look into before it is used for a project, and it all comes down to the requirements. If the project you’re working on requires a lot of movement from the tool, ensuring the jigsaw has precise steering is necessary.
On a similar note, some features need to be looked into for the user’s benefit. Minor additions to the tool like anti-vibration or comfort grip make the tool more fun to use. Plus, it makes it easier to have more precise cuts if the user is comfortable using the tool.
Pros
Ideal for making fine cuts
Switchable blades
Lightweight and comfortable
Can be used on any material
Cordless models available
Cons
Can’t be used for major projects
Main Differences Between Reciprocating Saws And Jigsaws
Cuts
One of the biggest differences between the two is the cuts they can make. Reciprocating saws are much better suited for jobs that require rough cutting and demolition. It offers cuts that are blunter in both horizontal and vertical strokes. The only thing is that those strokes are short, which is why they tend to be rougher.
On the other hand, jigsaws offer fine and more precise cuts, making them perfect for finishing a project. Since the latter’s blade works in an oscillating motion, working on parallel or curved surfaces is easy. The only thing to remember here is that the more power it has, the more efficiently it will work.
Materials
Both tools can be used on a variety of materials since they have multiple blade add-ons. But, considering that a reciprocating saw is quite powerful, it is best used on thick and tough materials like metal or hard plastic at the start of the project.
On the other hand, a jigsaw offers similar strength and power. It can also be used on metal, plastic, and even ceramic but towards the end, for finishing.
Weight
Saws and power tools, in general, have a bit of weight in the body. This is why jigsaws and reciprocating saws have a little bit of an advantage as they are both lighter tools when compared to saws in general.
However, when compared to each other, a reciprocating tool is lighter than a jigsaw. Most reciprocating saws weigh around 2-4lbs while jigsaws are around 5-10lbs, making the former a better option for extended work periods. But either way, they are both light and portable power tools.
Design
As mentioned earlier, the reciprocating saw is based on a simple hacksaw design as the blade movement is forward and back.
A few features of this tool are the blade, grip, and trigger. For ease of usage, this power tool also has a rear handle. Additionally, high-end models might have a feature to collect dust too. All in all, the design is quite simple, with a few additional features to make the cutting more effortless.
The jigsaw design is a bit more complicated and consists of multiple parts. Most of the time, there are more than ten features that together form the jigsaw. Some of those include a clamp, blade guard, footplate, lock button, and many more. Despite the difference, in theory, the tools at first glance don’t look too different.
Price
Price-wise the range for both tools is quite vast, and they are both readily available at affordable prices. A budget jigsaw usually starts at $30, and a reciprocating saw of similar quality should be around $20-$30. However, the jigsaw seems to be a bit cheaper than the reciprocating tool.
However, the higher end of the tools is where the difference comes in. A good-quality jigsaw can easily be purchased for less than $500, but a good-quality reciprocating saw is usually close to $1000. Even a mid-range reciprocating saw is over $100, while a jigsaw of similar quality is about $60-$70.
When To Use A Reciprocating Saw And A Jigsaw
We have mentioned time and again that these tools aren’t too different from each other. But, they do have specific purposes and work best in certain projects. This part of the article gives you a better idea of when a reciprocating saw and a jigsaw should be used.
Carving Work
Carving work can be done for multiple projects such as for signs, and in such projects, precision is of utmost importance. Especially when carving intricate designs and letters, everything carved should look clean and appealing. This is where a jigsaw will be of more use than a reciprocating saw.
The former is known to work best for fine cuts, and hence the work produced will be of a higher quality. All you need to do is cut over the traced design or letters, which is effortless when doing it with a jigsaw and an appropriate blade.
That being said, carving work can be done when using the correct blade on the reciprocating saw, but it will not be as clean. Since this machine is not made for delicate cutting, the result might not look as appealing as you’d like.
Clearing
Planning to tear down a big piece of wood or get rid of some metal pipes outside the house? Get a reciprocating saw.
Since work like this usually happens at the beginning of demolition or during renovation, the cut does not matter. Even if the material is not cut most accurately, what matters is that it should be out of the way. This is why a reciprocating saw is a much better option as compared to a jigsaw.
The reciprocating saw will cut through the material using less effort in no time. While this kind of work can be done with a jigsaw, the chances of getting it done quickly are very low. This is mainly because a jigsaw does not have that kind of power or strength in the blade.
Outdoor Cutting
Now we aren’t saying that someone has to be a DIY enthusiast or a professional to be using these tools. Sometimes, regular day-to-day work can also be sorted out using a power tool. Take cutting branches or bushes, for example; while there are dedicated tools for cutting them, one of the two saws can be used too.
You might have guessed it - it is a reciprocating saw. It is pretty evident since the mechanics of a jigsaw do not make it ideal for branch cutting. If you have taken it upon yourself to get rid of a few stray branches and prune a tree, then the horizontal cutting of the reciprocating saw will be ideal.
Moreover, it’s not just branches - even small trees can be cut using this tool. As already established, it is more than capable of handling thick pieces of wood, making it the perfect tool for clearing a lawn on a Sunday morning.
Fabric Cutting
This one may seem a bit odd because scissors still exist in this world, but thick fabric can be cut with a jigsaw. While most people prefer using scissors - personal or professional-grade - jigsaw provides a much smoother and even cut.
This is because a scissor, although being used for its primary purpose, is still a manual tool. A jigsaw can only provide accurate and precise cuts in half the time and effort because it is a power tool. Jigsaws even have a specific blade to take on cutting fabric like carpets.
Needless to say, this is not a job for a reciprocating tool.
Refurbishment
A full refurbishment and remodeling project is one of the few projects where having both kinds of saws is quite handy. It also depends on what type of remodeling and refurbishment project it is and what part you need to carry out.
For example, a whole kitchen needs to be refurbished with new cabinets, new platforms, etc. If you have taken it upon yourself to see the entire thing through, it is best to have both a reciprocating saw and a jigsaw.
The former will be of use in the beginning - to remove and demolish old wood and metal parts of the kitchen. This type of tool is a much better option when you have to remove small items like nails.
While the latter can be of assistance to cut kitchen pipes consistently and also for carving cabinets. Many people use jigsaws while installing countertops as well as it is easier to cut small holes with them. Plus, it has dedicated blades for this type of work.
In a nutshell, with both tools by your side, remodeling projects can be done quickly and with great precision.
Which Is Safer?
We mentioned before that despite the difference in features between the two, both tools look the same. However, the jigsaw is much easier to control since it does not have as much power as the reciprocating saw.
There may be more features in a jigsaw, but it has been made with plenty of safety features that make it safe. Moreover, the blades that come with a jigsaw are not as big as those with reciprocating saws. It’s pretty clear that large blades combined with the immense power of the reciprocating saw do not scream “safe” for a new user.
If this is your first time using a saw, we would recommend using a jigsaw. This will allow you to get used to that tool and the power that a “power tool” can offer. Only after that should you move on to something more extensive, as a reciprocating saw.
Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw FAQ
What Is A Sawzall?
A Sawzall is the same as a reciprocating saw but made by a company called Milwaukee Tools. This name is trademarked by their company and became synonymous with the term “reciprocating saw.” It was the first of its kind to enter the market in the 1950s. Since then, it has maintained its quality.
Can Bricks Be Cut With A Reciprocating Saw Or Jigsaw?
You might have better luck trying to cut brick with a reciprocating saw. While both tools can cut through concrete, bricks are a bit thick and need more power.
Is It Okay To Buy Both The Tools?
Ideally, that would be the best way to go about it. Since you can use both tools for multiple purposes, it is best to have them both. The only thing to keep in mind is your budget and frequency of using the tools.
Can A Reciprocating Saw Be Used As A Jigsaw?
Yes, indeed it can! Many reciprocating saws do have blades that cut in a vertical motion. However, the jigsaw is more precise as the power is not as strong. So if you’re only looking to cut in an up-and-down fashion, then a reciprocating saw can be used, but go for a jigsaw for precise cuts.
Conclusion - Is There A Clear Winner?
With that, we finally come to the end of this comprehensive guide on reciprocating saws and jigsaws.
We know you are looking for a clear winner, so the reciprocating saw is much better, in our opinion. It has more power and is fit to be used regularly. However, if you must buy a power tool, why not get both?
The chances of you taking on a demolition project is as high (or low) as taking on a sign-making project. You never know when the need for one tool or the other comes around, so there is no harm in having both.
But, in the end, it all comes down to what you need. Let us know which one you ended up going with. On that note, we shall sign off and see you again soon!
If you’re a fan of smoky grilled meat, love hosting people, and have space around the house, owning a grill is a wise choice.
Think about it: isn’t it fun to grill meat at home for friends and family on a warm Sunday afternoon? However, figuring out which pellet grill is ideal can be quite a task because there are so many factors to consider.
However, it’s no secret that Rec Tec and Taeger are the top two contenders. And as human beings, we are compelled to compare. From superheroes to supercars, there can only be one winner. And a pellet grill is no different.
If you are looking to know which brand is superior, you’re in the right place. In today’s guide, we are comparing Rec Tec and Traeger on various aspects to decide which might be the ideal one.
So without further ado, let’s jump right into it!
Rec Tec vs. Traeger | All You Need to Know
A Brief Overview Of Each Brand
Before we get into comparing the two, let’s talk about the grills they both have to offer. Since both these brands are high-quality, they have produced quite a few grills that have become popular in the market.
Some of the well-known Rec Tec grills are the RT-590 and the RT-700 pellet grills. And when it comes to Traeger, the Ironwood Series 885 and the Traeger Pro Series 575 are just as popular. This brings us back to figuring out which one, out of the variety of options available, is the best.
To begin with, let’s look at a brief overview and history of each brand to understand them better.
Now, while we aren’t comparing on the basis of who got here first, Traeger did set the trend. In 1985, Joe Traeger was the first person to invent pellet grills. He knew from the very start that this invention would change the culinary industry, and hence he patented it in 1986.
As the brand grew, so did its reputation. Traeger was the only trusted name for pellet grills, and it lived up to it. However, the brand gained traction not only because it was the only one making pellet grills but also because of its quality and reliability. But, the patent was only for 20 years.
In 2006, once the patent expired, many more companies began manufacturing pellet grills. This made the market more competitive. Joe Traeger ended up selling the business, and soon Traeger moved overseas for production. But, despite the ever-rising competition, it remained as one of the best and most reliable names.
Plus, as the technology advanced, so did a lot of Traeger grills. The competition in the market has led them to build new and improved grills with hi-tech features and wider cooking areas while maintaining their high-quality and premium status. Some of their newer models are Wi-Fi enabled, which is pretty impressive.
Out of the many brands that took advantage of Traeger’s expired patent, Rec Tec was the most successful. The company came into existence in 2009, which was three years after Traeger’s patent expired. It started with just two friends who loved to grill and were always looking to improve their grilling experience.
What started in a garage is now one of the best pellet grill brands in the market. But this isn’t just because they hopped on board at the right time. Rec Tec (now known as recteq) has always focused on manufacturing high-quality products using new technology. Plus, their grills have bull-horn-shaped handles (who wouldn’t love that!).
Since the company was always about trying to have the best grilling experience, we can see how temperature control can be a big deal. Getting the proper heat and smoke is crucial, and that is why Rec Tec grills focus a lot on temperature control and have digital controllers to reach precise temperatures.
Traeger vs. Rec Tec
As we mentioned earlier, both these brands have made a name for themselves with not just one or two products but many. Each of these has a vast catalog of grills at different price points with varying features.
To make the comparison easier, we have made a list of the most important features when selecting a grill. Whether you are looking online or in a store, making a note of these features will give you a better idea of the grill’s quality. Hence, picking the one that’s more suited to your needs will not be as challenging a task.
Price
Without a doubt, price is one of the essential aspects when selecting a grill. No matter how nice and efficient any product might be, it is always advisable to buy something that will not rob you of your life’s savings. Or at least it should have enough to offer to compensate for the price.
That being said, both Traeger and Rec Tec are high-end brands with expensive grills. They are not unaffordable, but even their basic grills can be considered premium, given their name and quality. So, it would be futile to look at any of these brands if you are looking for cheap and super budget-friendly grills.
However, out of the two, we suggest going for Rec Tec. Not only is it a little less expensive than Traeger, but it also has more value for the price, especially if you want a more advanced grill.
Temperature Range
When it comes to pellet grills, it is always better to buy one with a wide temperature range. It makes room for more versatile cooking. With a wide temperature range, you can smoke different kinds of meat and cook it without having to worry about finding the ideal temperature.
When it comes to Rec Tec and Traeger, both offer incredible temperature ranges. However, Rec Tec is a better performer in this regard since the range is wider and it has a “FULL” setting which increases the heat even more. Most Rec Tec models have a range of 200℉ to 500℉, and the FULL setting takes the heat beyond 500.
For most Traegers models, the max temperature is about 450℉ with just a few models going up to 500℉. The minimum temperature it can go down to is 165℉. So clearly, the difference in temperature ranges is not much. It’s just that Rec Tec’s FULL setting gives the brand advantage, especially if you prefer grilling to smoking.
Construction
It goes without saying that both brands only use high-quality materials to construct their grills. They both offer grills that have sturdy built and tight fittings that will last a long time. However, there is a difference between the two since they both use different high-quality materials.
Most of the components in Rec Tec grills are made out of stainless steel, with the exception of the heating rods that are made out of ceramic. On the other hand, Traeger grills are made with powder-coated steel, and only the handles are made with stainless steel.
Some of the high-end Trager models have stainless steel bodies and grates as well as double-wall insulation. In this aspect, the Rec Tec models are a bit more favorable since all models have stainless steel bodies, firepot, grates, and drip pans.
Rec Tec has an advantage when you compare the two since stainless steel is rust-resistant and will last longer than powder-coated steel. Plus, the ceramic heating road also has a long life and might even outlive the other components.
Cooking Space
The amount of space that is enough for cooking is very subjective. If you like to host people and cook in large quantities, then a wider cooking space is necessary. But if you’re new to using grills and are just testing the waters, then maybe getting a smaller one is wiser.
But how do you decide exactly how much cooking space you need? To put it in perspective, a full-size turkey or a dozen burgers will need at least 300 square feet or more. Rec Tec and Traeger offer grills with varying cooking spaces; it all comes down to what is ideal for you.
The only difference is that a larger cooking space is available mainly in Traeger’s premium models, while Rec Tec offers ample cooking space in all models. In addition, Rec Tec’s grills have additional space in every model that extends the area by 200-300 square feet.
Pellet Hopper
People who use the grill multiple times a week know how massively inconvenient it is to refill the hopper constantly. After all, who wants to deal with yet another tedious task more than once after prepping the food.
To avoid dealing with constant refilling of the hopper, especially when you’re smoking something overnight, we suggest looking at hoppers sized at 20 lbs or more. Rec Tec and Traeger both have grills that can meet any requirement.
Most of the Rec Tec Models start at 20 pounds and go all the way to 40 pounds. On the other hand, Traeger’s models start at 18 pounds and go to a maximum of 24. If you are looking for a grill with a smaller hopper size, like 20 or 24 pounds, both brands stand tied for us.
However, since Rec Tec has much larger sizes to offer, it has a wider variety to choose from.
Temperature Control
Temperature control is an important aspect of the smoking and grilling process. While Traeger has stepped up in this aspect over the years, Rec Tec always prioritized it. Overall they both perform equally efficiently. However, one is more traditional than the other.
Traeger has a Pro D2 controller that keeps the grill at the desired temperature within a +/- of 15℉. In the premium models, the grills have a feature where the temperature increases at a faster rate in case the lid is opened. This is quite beneficial since opening the lid to check on the meat does affect the cooking process, as it does in baking.
However, if you are looking for something a bit more advanced, Rec Tec is the way to go. Not only does it have a digital temperature screen (as opposed to Traeger’s standard temperature dial), it also Smart Grill Technology. This technology keeps the temperature inside consistent for a long time.
Plus, the temperature stays within a range of +/- 5℉, making it a lot more accurate. It also calculates when the ignitor should be turned on/off and how many pellets it needs to meet the required temperature. And all this is in addition to the auto-shutdown and cool down feature.
In a nutshell, they both have different things to offer. If simple and traditional is your style, then pick Traeger. If not, you have Rec Tec. Functionality-wise, they are both accurate and phenomenal at temperature control.
Warranty
The one thing people check after the price of any device is the warranty period, primarily if they are investing in something expensive. Saving up a fortune and buying something which only lasts for about 3-4 months is everyone’s nightmare.
This logic extends to grills too. It can be pretty expensive, but knowing a company can cover certain damages until a specific time is relieving. When it comes to Rec Tec and Traeger, it is evident that they will last long. However, having a warranty on the models is the cherry on top.
For most of the Rec Tec grills, the brand has a six-year warranty. We have established that it is a sturdy piece of equipment to have in the house. With this kind of warranty, not just you but your kids too be able to use these grills in the future.
Trager, on the other hand, while also offering long-lasting grills, only has a warranty period of three years. And while it is impressive for a brand to provide a warranty for this long, it is no match for the six years by Rec Tec.
Customer Service
Now, this may not be an essential point for a lot of people. But, if you’re looking at the warranty, we know customer service centers and numbers are on your mind.
Needless to say, since both brands have been in the business long enough, they have responsive and support customer service teams. One of the best things about Traeger is that, despite being overseas, they have a knowledgeable team in the US that is always eager to help. This is why people don’t mind the hassle of contacting them.
However, Rec Tec one-ups them here. Not only do they have a supportive team, but each grill includes the number of the company’s two founders. People who have had trouble with the grills have actually called the founders and spoken to them about their issue.
And it is this level of intimate connection that the brand is building with its customers that it is so popular.
Portability
Grilling and smoking meat is not something that can only be done in the backyard on a sunny day. Some people love to take their grill into the great outdoors for a cooking session in the middle of the forest. It’s for people like them that grills need to be more portable and mobile.
Whether it’s for tailgating or camping purposes, having a grill that cooks on the go can be very convenient. This is where Trager has gotten an opportunity to shine. Don’t get us wrong; Rec Tec has some fantastic options to choose from. Some of their models have foldable legs, and most of them have wheels.
But Trager has a much more extensive collection of mobile grills. They have prioritized mobility to a point where they have a whole collection of portable grills. Plus, they have a section of grills made for tailgating and one line that effortlessly cooks on tabletops.
Additional Features
Now, coming to the fun bit. No matter what product you want to buy, as soon as there are some bells and whistles, it automatically amplifies its need. You may not need a Wi-Fi controlled fireplace for the winter, but it sure will be fun to have.
Similarly, both these grills have evolved with time. And as technology advances and people expect more from a product, they have successfully delivered. Be it wanting to control the grill remotely or have an indicator that lets you know when the meat is ready; both brands have done it all.
Traeger
Let’s start Traeger. One of the most note-worthy features Trager has added to its grills is the wi-fire technology. Other than being a very smart name, it is also brilliant tech. Wi-fire technology is in-built in all Traeger grills, which allows you to connect the grill via wifi to an app.
The app is quite convenient since it not only allows you to monitor the temperature, but you can monitor food temperature and also add more smoke. And all of this, with just a few taps on your smartphone or tablet. Plus, the high-end models also come with two meat probes.
Speaking of high-end models, those have low pellet sensors, grease management systems, and exhaust systems. Plus, if the grill does not work, the built-in error reporting feature can tell you why it’s not working. And, this is all just the tip of the iceberg.
Rec Tec
Moving on to Rec Tec. Much like Traeger, the Rec Tec grills also have an app that monitors and changes the temperature inside the grill. The app allows you to set timers and alerts that will notify you when the food is done.
However, the cool stuff with Rec Tec is beyond the app. The grill itself allows for extra low and extra hot temperature settings. These can be set based on the amount of smoke requirement for the meat.
In addition, it has hopper lids that can also be used as a warmer. It also has interior lights that allow you to see the meat inside at night without carrying a torch everytime. It’s a small addition, but it’s the little things that count right! Plus, it has two temperature probes.
The best part about all this is that they are in all models, and not just the premium ones (as it is in Traeger). And, you can buy a smoke box that can cold smoke fish, cheese, and even sauces by paying a bit extra.
In the end, it all comes down to what you need when it comes to these extra additions. However, we are partial to Rec Tec in this aspect since the fun features are accessible in all models.
Rec Tec and Traeger: Recommendations
Having read all those features, you might tell that it is a challenging task to pick one true winner.
Both the brands have a lot to offer and are leading in one aspect or another. However, we felt it might make it easy for you to pick one if we list out a few of our recommendations based on the features above.
Both, Rec Tec and Trager, have multiple grills to choose from, but the ones mentioned below are some of the most popular in the market.
The RT-700 is one of the top-line grills by Rec Tec. If you plan to go all out with a grill, this is one of the top contenders. It has a massive 702 square inches cooking area with an additional 352 square inches. All in all, you can have a whopping 1054 square inches of cooking space.
In addition to the massive cooking area, even the pellet hopper size is huge. It has a 40 lbs capacity, which makes it ideal for overnight cooks. The temperature range on this grill is between 200℉ and 500℉. So if you’re looking for a grill that can efficiently slow cook and roast at high temperatures, this is a great option.
Other than that, it is equipped with most of the standard Rec Tec features like stainless steel construction, four wheels, and Smart Grill Technology. The grill even has a small towel ring, which we thought very convenient.
RT-590
This is the mid-range model by Rec Tec that is perfect for families that love to grill. The cooking area is 590 square inches with an ability to expand to 772 square inches. It has a simple-looking body, and the octagonal shape allows more headroom inside so you can place larger pieces of meat like two turkeys!
This one may not be as large as the 700, but it is enough for families that grill occasionally (or eat two turkeys at once). It also has two stainless grates and a generously sized hopper at 30 lbs. With a hopper that size, you can get at least 30 hours of cooking done.
As mentioned, all other features in Rec Tech are uniform. This also comes with two temperature probes, PID, and smart grill technology and has four wheels for each mobility.
RT-340
Finally, we have the low-range grill. It may cost less, but it sure does pack a punch. It has a lot to offer in addition to all the regular features like sturdy construction, dual meat probes, and Smart Grill technology. This one is perfect for people testing the waters with grills or for people that only need them very rarely.
The cooking area on this one is 340 square inches with an additional 171 square inches. It has a 20 lbs hopper capacity, and the temperature range is between 200℉ and 500℉. Much like its big brothers, this one too comes with a six-year warranty. The only difference between this and the bigger models is that this one has two wheels only.
The models in the Timberline series are all considered top-end grills by Trager. These grills have three cooking areas of varying sizes. The smallest in the series has a total cooking area of 850 square inches, while the biggest is around 1300 square inches.
The hopper capacity on all the models in this series is 24 lbs, and the temperature range is between 160℉ and 450℉. The great thing about these grills is that it is double-walled and insulated for better heat retention. It also has adjustable racks.
These grills are all Wi-Fi enabled with Wi-Fire technology and can be controlled by the Traeger app. It also comes with a three-year warranty.
Ironwood
Next in line is the mid-ranged Traeger grills. These are like the mid-ranged Rec Tec models because they are ideal for small families and frequent grilling in small quantities. The lower end of the series has a minimum of 650 square inches in terms of cooking area, while the higher end is around 800 square inches.
They also have double side-wall insulation for better heat retention. It is slightly different from the Timberline series since only the side walls are insulated instead of the whole construction. The hopper capacity is 20 lbs, and it has a temperature range of 160℉ and 450℉. These grills will use a little less than a whole bag of pellets.
Additionally, they can be controlled and monitored via Wi-Fi using the Traeger app and are protected under a three-year warranty.
Pro
Lastly, there is the Traeger Pro series grills which we recommend for new users. It’s a low-budget series from the brand and ideal for people getting used to grilling and smoking.
Since these are entry-level grills, they do not come with double side-walls or adjustable grates, but they have plenty to offer. The smallest has a cooking area of 575 square inches, while the largest is 780 square inches. All these grills have a hopper size of 18 lbs. which is ideal if you don't grill very often.
Like all the other grills by Traeger, these are also Wi-Fi enabled and can be controlled via the app. Plus, it comes with one thermometer probe to check the meat.
Summing It Up
Picking one winner is not easy when it comes to big brands like Rec Tec and Traeger. While both brands have certain advantages over the other, Rec Tec does stand out for us a bit more in terms of value.
To start with, since it is a newer brand, it has features that are more suited to the newer generation of grilling enthusiasts. Plus, they offer a lot more in terms of warranty, price, and customer service than most leading brands do.
However, in terms of grill performance, both brands are exceptional. Traeger has been in the business for a long time, so they know what they are doing. Ultimately, it all boils down to the user’s need, and so the ultimate choice is yours. On that note, we shall take your leave and be back soon with more such comprehensive guides and reviews.
Rainwater harvesting is one of the most self-sufficient and environment friendly methods of using water. You are collecting water from the sky as it falls, all the while trying to utilize is as much as you can, and without a price tag looming on it. To put things into perspective, if an inch of rain falls on a thousand square feet space, you can harvest about six hundred gallons from it. Six hundred gallons is a real lot!
Some states in the U.S.A. do not allow rainwater harvesting, for reasons that are myriad and make little sense, but most states are perfectly happy with this practice. So, before you go on to making a rainwater harvesting system, do check the local laws for any regulations against this.
But, if you’re in the clear and perhaps want to do it discreetly, these simple to make and easy to buy rainwater harvesting systems will do your job perfectly.
Simple Rain Barrel Installation
The rain barrel water harvesting system is quite easy. Through this do-it-yourself tutorial, you can make it in no time and start harvesting water in just four steps. Connecting a rain barrel system to the rainwater drainage pipes is an efficient way of collecting rainwater. What I also like about this tutorial is the reliance on visuals to explain the process, which is always a boon.
Making a rain barrel itself isn’t a complicated process. All you require is a large trash can. Using a few tools you can repurpose it into a rain barrel and use it for gardening purposes if you like. Moreover, it is quite discreet and doesn’t stand out, which is most welcome.
These giant water containers are robust and can be retrofitted as rain barrels very easily. They are large enough to not only feed the plants, but also any animals in your homestead. The added advantage of deciding to make this rain barrel system is the elaborate list of do’s and don’ts that come with the tutorial.
This rain barrel system idea is a little elaborate and comes with a series of pipes to attach, but in actuality isn’t all that difficult to make, or even costly. Just for a hundred dollars, you can have a rainwater harvesting system which will save on your future expenses. The number of gallons of water you are saving from buying or paying the bill for is huge. Plus, the tutorial is pretty detailed yet is easy to follow.
Using a rain barrel is a pretty simple rainwater harvesting system in the first place. With this rain barrel, that process becomes even simpler. Nothing too elaborate, this rain barrel can be created within a day and with very basic skills. It will be enough for small level irrigation.
More details ataeconline.org
Trashcan Barrel
Trash can rain barrels are the simplest to make and also the least expensive. They are sturdy and work as large enough water containers. Helping your budget is the tutorial which is pretty basic to follow.
This rainwater harvesting system uses a proper water tank often seen in big housing. It isn’t a typically used rain harvesting apparatus. But, it is an ideal setup for rain harvesting if you own a large irrigable land or a garden or if you keep livestock that requires constant water source. This can be most helpful as it helps in preserving rainwater for a much longer period of time.
This option requires a large place to set it up, such as a shed or barn. This also comes with a solar purification system to keep water from contamination as well. Though large, this could be very helpful and certainly worth a look if you have ample space for it.
A little different from contemporary rainwater harvesting method, this system can help in preserving a rather swell quantity of rainwater. It provides the in’s and out’s of rain catchment and should be studied a little before its installation.
This system also warns you of any problems that it may encounter. It is easy to read and understand while installing this system.
A very easy and affordable resource. Along with being functional, it is very easily available and for a low price. A rain barrel is much easy to handle and doesn't take much of space. It can be kept almost anywhere under the sky and is easier to maintain and check on.
This site provides you with detailed steps on how to make your own rainwater barrel. You can customise it in any manner you wish to, to make it look more beautiful and less boring. Though this does not provide you with a huge quantity, but it is very helpful when you want to water a few flower pot and/or vegetable patches.
If you are looking for a bit larger harvesting system, you can consider this as an option. If you have a mid-sized livestock and a garden that is bigger than that, this system is perfect.
The below mentioned website provides you with a detailed explanation on how to construct this type of water harvesting system. Instruction pictures are well explained and easy to understand even for someone who is novice in this.
The Enormously Elaborate Rainwater Harvesting System
Yes, this seems like a tedious task and could look daunting as well. But, it is quite simple. You take 4 interlocked water tanks made of metal and make the system. The video is great at explaining and helping you out at finishing this task easily and fast.
This one’s quite handy a guide for learning not only how to harvest the rainwater, but how to make use of it. The rain barrels are easy to make once you follow the steps properly and in the end you are ready to harvest.
A very unique and detailed tutorial that helps you make a rain harvesting barrels out of discarded trash cans. The coolest part it, the instructions are made in a manner that they don't get confusing after a few steps.
More details at 1craftylane.wordpress.com
The Flower Pot Barrel
This rain barrel looks like a large flower pot and hence doesn’t stand out as a sore in your surroundings. It is quite easy to make and set up and the instructions do most of the work for you.
This trash can rain barrel steps up its game. Not only does it filters it water, it also helps prevent debris from contaminating the stored water in your system. This is great as it prevents clogs. The tutorial shows you a cost effective way to make this system.
This is quite discreet a system to set up, and something you definitely require if there are regulations that prevent you from harvesting. It is robust, well-walled and easy to make following the simple yet detailed tutorial.
Tutorial For Rain Barrel Installation
Another video tutorial for visual builders, this rainwater harvesting system isn’t decorative but it does its job efficiently. Its simplicity makes it easy to build it and set it up. Just follow the tutorials.
You can’t really make this one on your own, but it does its job really well. Moreover, due to its unusual features, the bladder tank doesn’t stand out and remains quite incognito from prying eyes. You can install this system in your basement or crawl space.
More details at irrigationstore.com.au
The Canopy Rain Barrel
It's a pretty looking and very simple rainwater harvesting system. It's funnel like structure on the top is designed to maximise water collection and help you collect as much water as possible. Setting up a few of these around your property ensures you have a whole lot of water to use.
This rain barrel was created with a galvanized stock tank. It is robust and looks quite chic, blending in with the surroundings and holds enough quantity of water for you.
Though it isn’t something you can really build on your own, and one that requires elaborate welding work, this rainwater harvesting system is efficient, space saving and great to look at. Perhaps, you can install it in your backyard and paint it too to make it look prettier?
This is not a beginner’s level rainwater harvesting system. It is quite elaborate in its make and installation and is best suited for more arid climates. It is for underground installation, to keep the water cool and will help your homestead receive the water it requires, and water you need too. In places where water supply is scarce and rain doesn’t last for long, such a system becomes more of a necessity.
Using a plastic gallon barrel, a plastic adapted, a pipe thread and a hose thread, you can make this simple yet very effective rainwater harvesting system in no time.
More details at instructables.com
The Moveable Rain Barrel
This simple to make yet efficient rain barrel can be uninstalled and ported for your convenience. It is large enough to hold enough water and yet small enough to not be too visible.
This is a fully readymade rain barrel that not only does the job of rainwater collecting but its state of the art filtering system filters and purifies the water for drinking. Moreover, it is beautiful to look at and very modern in its design.
High-Rise Rain Barrel
It is installed at quite a tall height to increase the water collection. It is big enough to store water for weeks and yet small enough to install it in your backyard easily.
Two Can System
Using two new trash cans, this rainwater harvesting system helps collect more water at one go and this system can be replicated with more trash cans if you want to have more water.
This system of seven trash cans lined side by side and connected to each other does exactly what was suggested before. It makes sure you have a whole lot of water and maximises your water collection while it rains.
In this installation, the rain barrels are stacked vertically instead of horizontally, with the spivot at the very bottom so that the water pressure is highest. It is efficient and space saving as you don’t have to use a large horizontal space to keep multiple barrels.
This system is for areas that receive a high amount of rainfall or very constant rainfall. With two large containers, collecting rainwater is easier and helps in long term storage of the water.
Using a rock like facade to hide the rain barrel and make the system look more organic and one with its surrounding, this rainwater harvesting system is efficient and neat and great to look at.
With slanted roofs on two sides, water slides into the barrel, travelling through the ridges on the roof and streamlined into the center area for collection. This is very effective and collects water far more quickly than most systems.
This metal container looks fantastic and has no chance of getting a hole in it or leakage of any sort. It is big enough for storing a lot of water and isn’t big on the budget side either.
This barrel is more about the look than any special functionality. It resembles a typical, medieval barrel and is beautiful to behold. So, if you’re looking for decoration, this one might be the one you would want to go for.
This rainwater harvesting system uses a typical water storing barrel but attaches two funnels on the top on either side of the barrel for maximum water collection. Neat and efficient and not taking too much space, this is a system you can build.
Source Unknown
Rain Garden
Building a rain garden system removes the requirement of installing a barrel, transferring the water and all the intermediate steps that consume both time and energy. This system directly irrigates the garden and is a gardener’s delight.
Rainwater harvesting systems are generally inexpensive and with certain DIY projects they can actually be free of charge, a splendid thing about an immensely powerful resource.
If you have the option to grow and nurture nature through the use of rainwater, if you`ve had the option to reduce costs and water consumption in your household, why would you not do it?
What do you think about harvesting systems and collecting rainwater? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
Are you a woodworking enthusiast confused between purchasing a Radial Arm Saw and a Miter Saw? Well, you’ve come to the right place!
Having the right equipment in your tool kit can change your woodworking game completely. Whether you require the tools for personal home improvement projects or professional woodworking, having the right saw by your side is absolutely essential.
But with both Radial Arm saws and Miter saws available in the market, there has been a lingering question in most people’s minds about which to buy. Professionals and enthusiasts alike are constantly wondering which of the two saws is the better tool.
However, we believe that this perspective is the wrong way to approach this dilemma. What one really needs to be asking is not which saw is better, but which equipment will be best for you and your individual usage. But even then, making a choice between the two can seem very overwhelming, especially if you’re a beginner in the woodworking circuit.
Radial Arm Saw vs. Miter Saw
So, in order to help you all make this decision effectively, we have compiled the required differences between the two. This informative piece will detail the features, how each of these saws functions, what they are capable of, and the purpose they serve.
First, we will look at each of the pieces of equipment above on a one-to-one basis to get a more clarified idea regarding them. So, without further ado, let’s jump right into the thick of it, shall we?
What Is A Radial Arm Saw?
The Radial Arm Saw is the comparatively older equipment of the two and is, therefore, an extremely reliable tool to have in your workshed. This saw is the good old friend that every home woodworker and professional owned before the Miter Saw came into being.
So, if you’re someone who has a small workshed and is short on space, the Radial Arm Saw is a rather good investment to consider. The sheer versatility of this tool will eliminate the need for you to own multiple devices for different purposes and hence save you both money and space in the long run.
The tool itself consists of a shapely circular blade that is mounted on a sliding arm, which enables it to power through all kinds of wood stock and makes a variety of cuts. The blade on this tool can be adjusted according to various angles and degrees; however, the adjustment will need to be measured and made manually.
However, one aspect this saw falls short in is having an inbuilt safety mechanism. Although it does include some locks and provides you the option to strengthen the fence around its side, it’s still not very safe to use. This is because the powerful blade of this saw poses a significant risk to users because of its ability to cut fingers clean off if not used with extreme caution.
Moreover, if your saw is equipped with a dull blade, it has the ability to latch onto your wood piece and then throw it around the room with its sheer speed. Hence, when it comes to Radial Arm Saws, it is essential to use them with the utmost caution, and is best if not used by beginners at all.
Highlights of the Radial Arm Saw
The machine consists of a circular power saw lodged into a mechanical arm.
The diameter of the blade ranges from 12 to about 22 inches.
This equipment is highly customizable and has an array of adjustable angles and depths that can be set up in order to enhance its versatility and usage.
The side fence provided as a part of this equipment is usually sufficient to provide the required amount of stability and accuracy for a variety of cutting operations. However, it is recommended you fortify this side fence by attaching an additional fence for extra security.
Safety guards are separately available and should be necessarily purchased to make this saw more safe and secure for the user.
It comes equipped with additional attachments
Different Cuts It Facilitates
The Radial Arm Saw, as we mentioned above, has more versatility and hence facilitates a large variety of cuts. Here we wanted to mention the 4 major kinds of cuts it can perform and how to execute them to provide you with a better idea of the tool.
Crosscuts
Crosscuts are one of the simplest cuts that can be made rather easily with a Radial Arm Saw. All one needs to do is measure the piece of wood you plan to cut with a scale and mark the top part with a marker or a pencil of your choosing. After accounting for the width of your blade, lower and align it to the piece before you proceed to power the saw.
It’s essential to build a fence around the equipment so that you can hold the wooden piece against that fence while slowly pulling the saw toward you. Once the entire width of the wood is cut, turn the power off and return the blade to its original and neutral position before continuing with your work.
Ripping
Ripping is a method of cutting that enables you to cut a piece of wood along its length instead of its width like in the case of crosscuts. This can be executed in a Radial Arm Saw by twisting the rotating head of the blade and locking it in place.
The pawl of this tool requires it to be released and readjusted to the height of the wooden board you are planning to cut in order to prevent any potential jams or kickbacks. It’s also essential to note that this positioning of the blade makes it one of the most dangerous ways of utilizing this equipment. Hence it is absolutely crucial for the user to be extra cautious during the process.
Miters, Bevels, And Compounds
Miter cuts and their variations are another cut that can be executed with a Radial Arm Saw with relative ease. This specific cut and its variations are made possible by the option of miter and bevel release levels which enable you to manually customize the degree you plan to cut in.
Moreover, it is essential to ensure that the blade of the equipment is lifted when you make any of the above adjustments. It’s also crucial to lock the angle in before proceeding with the cut, which a lot of new woodworkers may tend to overlook. We will be discussing these cuts in a little more detail when we come to the Miter Saw.
Dadoes And Rabbets
Dadoe is a U-shaped cut that runs across the width of the piece of wood, while rabbet is an L-shaped cut made along the edge of the same board. These cuts come in most handy when acting as joinery in larger and more complex woodworking projects.
Since the Radial Arm Saw gives you the ability to customize its depth according to your requirements, it is also effective in making these specific kinds of cuts. However, to efficiently execute this cut, you will need to attach the separately provided dadoes blade onto the machine.
Pros
Versatility in usage
Incredibly powerful blade and cutting depth
Much more compact compared to other woodworking equipment
Cons
Not very precise in its cutting
Dangerous to use and hence requires a lot more safety precautions to be followed
What is a Miter Saw?
A Miter Saw is basically a stationary power tool constructed with a circular blade suspended from an arm as the Radial Arm Saw itself. However, unlike other more traditional circular saws, this equipment allows for considerably more precision and control in cutting wooden planks. This is made possible because of its hinged arm that is attached to its main body with a slit and an extremely well-fortified fence.
The blade of this power tool usually ranges between 8-12 inches in diameter, which further facilitates the execution of high-precision cuts more effectively. Furthermore, this tool is equipped with a unique dust collection mechanism and a blade guard that makes it very safe to use in all environments and especially for beginners starting out in the woodworking field.
If that wasn’t enough, it also has a built-in scale in place that enables users to easily adjust it with minimal effort and make cuts in varying degrees. As a result, this tool has gained a lot of popularity since its release and has now become a regular appliance found in almost every professional woodworking workshop.
A significant detail to remember, however, is that the Miter Saw is not one size fits all and is in fact, available in variations that we will be discussing below.
Types of Miter Saws
There are mainly 3 different types of Miter Saws freely available in the market right now.
Compound Miter
This variant of the Miter saw only enables the blade of the equipment to pivot from left to right specifically. This limits the movement of this saw and only facilitates wooden board cutting in that particular direction.
Dual Compound Miter
This variant of the Miter Saw is similar to Compound Miter but allows the blade of the equipment to pivot both left and right. This provides greater flexibility in cutting direction and facilitates the making of quick bevels at any angle.
Sliding Compound Miter
This last variation of the Miter Saw is the most flexible among all its counterparts. In addition to the compound movements we described above, you can slide this saw backward and forward to enable you to cater to wooden boards with greater lengths. Out of all the variants, this is, therefore, a better option to invest in.
Highlights Of The Miter Saw
This is a motorized power-cutting tool system with a circular blade, hinged arm, and heavy-duty structure.
It is available in different blade diameters that range from 8-12 inches, respectively.
It is equipped with varied adjustable mechanisms that facilitate rotating angles and depth adjustments to provide precise cuts. These mechanisms additionally come with built-in locks and stop to give them stability during operation.
A laser guide may be installed on the side fence for enhanced accuracy.
Additional clamps and table extensions can be separately purchased to use this equipment for a wider variety of projects.
The fence of this equipment is extra-fortified and provides stability while absorbing the shocks of the functioning machine.
The in-built clear protective blade guard and dust-free mechanism of this equipment make it safe to use while maintaining a clean and dust-free workspace.
Different Cuts It Facilitates
The Miter Saw, as we mentioned above, is available in 3 different variants. However, when we talk about the cuts this power tool is able to accomplish, we are explicitly talking about the Sliding Compound Miter. There are mainly 4 different kinds of cuts that this equipment can hence perform, and we are going to describe the cuts and how to execute them below briefly.
Crosscuts
As we discussed before, the crosscut is the most straightforward woodcutting procedure amongst most woodworking projects. To execute this standard cut, you will require to slice across the grain direction of any given piece of the wound on your Miter Saw.
Bevels
Bevel, on the other hand, Bevel is an angled cut that goes through the thickness of the wood board and is typically made when you want to connect two pieces of molding to establish an invisible seam. This cut is usually created by tilting the circular blade on the sliding compound miter to a specific angle. The wood is continued to be placed in the regular place allowing the angular blade to design an automatic bevel.
Miters
This cutting technique that the Miter saw facilitates is essentially what this equipment is named after. Much like the bevel cut, this cut likewise requires the circular blade of the tool to be set up in an angled position. However, this cut is mainly made across the width of the wooden board instead of its thickness and is used primarily for creating corners in wooden projects.
This is also an extremely common cutting procedure in woodworking that is regularly used to make boxes and wooden frames. Furthermore, the Miter Saw is naturally inclined at making cleaner, more precise, and better-looking miter cuts. This is possible because of its pivotable saw that can easily be adjusted to varying degrees along with its hinged handle and fence that provide it the necessary stability.
Compound Cuts
Compound Cuts are essentially an amalgamation of both the bevel and the miter cuts. It’s ideal for making kitchen renovations that require seamlessly cut wooden crown moldings. These are also a little more complicated to execute usually; however, they are made far easier because of the unique design of the Miter Saw.
Pros
Provides extremely precise operation
Additional optional attachments available for a more versatile operation
Designed with numerous safety mechanisms enabling beginners to use it
Has the ability to create 4 essential yet varied cuts
Cons
Not very powerful and can’t cut through very thick pieces of wood
Can execute a limited variety of cuts
Differences Between Radial Arm Saw and Miter Saw
Now that we’ve covered what each of these pieces of equipment essentially is and how they function individually, we wanted to highlight some of the most significant differences between them.
Power And Size
Power and size are interrelated when it comes to the factors that determine the performance of woodworking equipment. Usually, the larger the size of the tool the more powerful the tool typically is.
In this context, the Radial Arm Saw is a more substantial tool that is compatible with larger blade sizes ranging from 12 to 22 inches. Compared to this, the Miter Saw has a more compact structure and is only compatible with blades ranging from 8 to 12 inches in diameter.
The large and enhanced structure of the Radial Arm Saw provides it with more power, giving it a comparatively high cutting depth. Hence, this equipment is able to cut through thick pieces of lumber with relative ease, which the Miter Saw cannot.
Portability
On the other hand, however, the compact size and structure of the Miter Saw make it a lot more portable than its space-taking counterpart. This is further compounded because the latter requires a fixed and static workstation for a seamless operation that the Miter Saw already comes inbuilt with. Hence, you can easily lob the former around wherever you wish to place it as compared to its more substantially sized counterpart.
Safety
The Radial Arm Saw is lagging far behind the more modern and secure Miter Saw when it comes to safety. This is because the latter is constructed with a lot of considerate features that make it simpler and a delight to use.
For starters, this Miter Saw is equipped with a protective blade guard that not only protects users from the dangers of using such a big blade but also collects wooden shavings to keep your workspace clean and clutter-free. Furthermore, this equipment comes with an extra fortified fence that has an excellent shock-absorbing system that makes it a lot more stable to use.
As compared to this, The Radial Arm is a rather dangerous woodworking appliance to own and is a threat not only to beginners but also to professionals alike. Hence, before using this tool, it is essential to properly equip yourself and the equipment with all the necessary safety guards and extra fences to ensure maximum security from accidents during operation.
Precision
The Miter Saw, as we mentioned earlier, offers a lot more precision than its counterpart. This precision is mostly derived from the smaller blade diameter that it is compatible with, making it easier to control. However, the precision of this equipment can also be attributed to the clear blade guards that provide enhanced visibility, and safety lock mechanisms that make it steady.
Additionally, some saws come equipped with a laser/LED guide that adds further precision to the process of cutting. You can also buy these laser/LED guides separately and install them on your machine as and when required. Compared to this, the Radial Arm Saw does not have any of these given features. Hence, overall it lacks the precision that the Miter Saw offers.
Ease Of Use And Installation
How easy each piece of equipment is to use is intrinsically related to the safety mechanisms provided. And since the Miter Saw is loaded with more safety features it automatically makes it a lot safer to use than the Radial Arm Saw.
Additionally, the Radial saw comes with a lot of loose attachments and manually adjustable mechanisms. The angle plus depth adjustment features that this tool is equipped with are all required to be adjusted physically by the user with the help of a separate scale. The extra dadoes blade provided also needs to be set up manually, which can be quite a hassle to install.
As compared to this, the Miter Saw has all automatically adjustable features that do not require separate scales or an extra pair of hands to adjust. Therefore, it is safe to conclude that the Miter Saw is considerably easy to operate and install.
Types Of Cuts/Versatility In Work
As we mentioned earlier, the Radial Arm saw has greater versatility when it comes to cutting wood. The enhanced structure of this equipment enables you to create ripping cuts and dadoes and rabbets that the Miter Saw is unable to make. Furthermore, as we mentioned before, the Radial Saw also allows for a greater cutting depth that facilitates the slicing of thicker wood and lumber as compared to the Miter Saw.
However, while the Miter Saw may lack versatility, it can still be enhanced in that arena by installing additional clamps and table extensions. Therefore, these separately available attachments can make the equipment a little more flexible and versatile to use for your varied woodworking projects.
Which One To Choose?
With that, we have comprehensively covered all the major differences between both these woodworking saws. Hence, one could conclude, in the most basic sense, that structurally both these saws are sort of similar in their build. This is because both of them are inherently mounted circular blades, however, even so, they vary greatly when it comes to their form, usage, and functionality.
So, now the question that remains is which woodworking saw is the best purchase for you? Well, we’re here to inform you that the answer to that question lies completely in the range of your personal usage. There can be no clear or explicit winner between the two because both of them fulfill very distinct functions.
Factors To Consider While Choosing The Right Saw
Hence, although both saws may look similar to the untrained eye, the reality is that these are both very different equipment. If you ask any trained or professional woodworking they would all tell you the same thing. And that thing is that which wood-cutting saw you choose always depends on primarily two important factors, they are:
Your level of expertise
What do you plan to use it for?
So, if you’re a trained or self-developed woodworker looking to branch out into the field of woodworking and are already familiar with the safety mechanisms and procedures practiced within the industry, then the Radial Arm Saw might be the right fit for you. This choice is also, however, dependent on the kind of woodworking projects you want to take up as a professional.
If your expertise, for example, lies in small projects that need more precise cutting procedures then the Miter Saw might be a better option for you. Alternatively, if you’re planning to take up more substantially sized woodworking projects, then the Radial Arm Saw is hands down the better option for you.
On the other hand, if you are a woodworking enthusiast or someone who is fairly new to the DIY woodworking game, then the Miter Saw is without a doubt the best purchase for you. These not only offer a higher precision level but are also safer and easier to use.
Hence, while this equipment may not provide a lot of varied options for versatility in cutting, they do cover all the basic and essential cutting procedures that you might require for your projects. This includes any projects you may take up for home improvement such as creating the crown molding for your kitchen.
The Winner
So, if you ask us who the winner between these two mounted saws is, we’d have to go with the Miter Saw.
This is mainly because, regardless of your level of expertise when it comes to woodworking, the Miter Saws are usable by different kinds of people. So, no matter what your standing as a woodworker is, this saw will always come in handy.
This is because the use that this provides is unmatched by the most powerful tools available in the market. And hence, for that same reason, this saw is more popular for mainstream usage while the alternative has faded in popularity and is still fighting to remain relevant.
Final Words
It is important to remember that our choice of the winner does not erase the fact that the Radial Arm Saw provides much more functionality than its counterpart. It’s just that those extra functionalities that this equipment offers don’t come into use as often and consequently are not considered essential by most woodworkers.
We would still, therefore, ask everyone to base their final decision on the factors that we stated above so that you end up with equipment that meets all your individual woodworking needs. Nevertheless, based largely on the consensus of relevancy, if we had to pick only one mounted saw to recommend to you today, we would still go along with the Miter saw, as we mentioned earlier.
So, we hope this comprehensive guide exploring the differences between the Miter Saw and Radial Arm Saw has aided in providing you guys some clarity. That’s all we have for you today folks. Happy woodworking!
ALFRED H. MAURER, Aestheticism to Modernism, Fauve Still Life, Oil on Canvas
Simple round bed with a touch of classic.
![Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw [A Clear Winner?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/09/Single-Bevel-Vs.-Double-Bevel-Miter-Saw-01.jpg "Single Bevel Vs. Double Bevel Miter Saw [A Clear Winner?]")
![Sanding Epoxy Resin Guide 101 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/Sanding-Epoxy-Resin-01.jpg "Sanding Epoxy Resin Guide 101 [All You Need to Know]")
![5 Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/Sabre-Saw-vs.-Jigsaw-01.jpg "5 Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw [All You Need to Know]")
via 
via 
via 
via 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details at 
More details on 
More details on 
More details on 
![Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw [A Clear Winner?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Reciprocating-Saw-vs.-Jigsaw-101.jpg "Reciprocating Saw vs. Jigsaw [A Clear Winner?]")
![Rec Tec vs. Traeger [All You Need To Know & Winner]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/Rec-Tec-vs.-Traeger-01.jpg "Rec Tec vs. Traeger [All You Need To Know & Winner]")
![Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw [Differences & Winner]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/Radial-Arm-Saw-vs-Miter-Saw-001.jpg "Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw [Differences & Winner]")
